WO2022052829A1 - Optical lens, photographing module, electronic device, and photographing method of photographing module - Google Patents

Optical lens, photographing module, electronic device, and photographing method of photographing module Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022052829A1
WO2022052829A1 PCT/CN2021/115344 CN2021115344W WO2022052829A1 WO 2022052829 A1 WO2022052829 A1 WO 2022052829A1 CN 2021115344 W CN2021115344 W CN 2021115344W WO 2022052829 A1 WO2022052829 A1 WO 2022052829A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
force
moving bracket
optical lens
bracket
lens
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/115344
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
夏太红
李斯坤
秦诗鑫
郭利德
王昕�
卢磊
曾义闵
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022052829A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022052829A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B7/00Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
    • G02B7/02Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses
    • G02B7/04Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B13/00Viewfinders; Focusing aids for cameras; Means for focusing for cameras; Autofocus systems for cameras
    • G03B13/32Means for focusing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B13/00Viewfinders; Focusing aids for cameras; Means for focusing for cameras; Autofocus systems for cameras
    • G03B13/32Means for focusing
    • G03B13/34Power focusing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B30/00Camera modules comprising integrated lens units and imaging units, specially adapted for being embedded in other devices, e.g. mobile phones or vehicles
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B5/00Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of lens technology, and in particular, to an optical lens, a camera module, an electronic device, and a shooting method for the camera module.
  • the present application provides an optical lens, a camera module, an electronic device, and a shooting method for the camera module that are not easily affected by external motion or shaking.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an optical lens.
  • the optical lens includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly.
  • the motor includes a drive member and a moving bracket.
  • the first lens is mounted on the moving bracket.
  • the driving member is used for driving the moving bracket to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
  • the moving support includes a first moving support and a second moving support.
  • the optical axis direction of the optical lens is the X axis direction.
  • the optical axis refers to an axis passing through the center of each lens.
  • the self-locking assembly includes a base, a rotating part, a force applying part, an elastic part and a limiting block.
  • the base and the moving bracket are arranged at intervals.
  • the rotating member is rotatably connected to the base.
  • One end of the elastic member is connected to the rotating member, and the other end is connected to the base.
  • the limiting block is located between the rotating member and the moving bracket.
  • the limiting block is fixed to the rotating member.
  • the limiting block is fixed to the rotating member by tape or glue.
  • the limiting block and the rotating member are integrally formed.
  • the force-applying member is used to exert a force on the rotating member when electrified.
  • the energization condition of the force-applying member can be determined according to whether the moving bracket moves relatively. For example, when the moving bracket is not relatively moved, the force applying member is not energized. When the moving bracket moves relatively, the force applying member is energized. In addition, when the moving support is not relatively moved, the moving support is in the target position.
  • the target position may be the focus position of the moving bracket, or may be a fixed position of the moving bracket when the optical lens does not start shooting.
  • the limiting block When the force-applying member is not energized, the limiting block contacts the moving bracket under the elastic force of the elastic member, and a static friction force can be generated between the limiting block and the moving bracket. It can be understood that when the limiting block contacts the moving bracket under the elastic force of the elastic member, the limiting block exerts pressure on the moving bracket. At this time, when the movable bracket has a tendency to move relatively, the movable bracket generates a static friction force. Therefore, the limiting block can press the moving bracket under the elastic force of the elastic member.
  • the rotating member When the force applying member is energized, the rotating member is driven to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member, and drives the limiting block to rotate, so as to separate the limiting block from the moving bracket.
  • the movable bracket when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the movable bracket can avoid collision with other components in the optical lens, thereby reducing the collision risk of the movable bracket.
  • the movable bracket when the movable bracket includes the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, by locking the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, the collision between the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can be avoided, thereby reducing the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket. Risk of collision between a mobile bracket and a second mobile bracket.
  • Forced vibration refers to the vibration that occurs under the action of periodic external forces.
  • the connecting position of the limiting block and the rotating member is the first position.
  • the force applying position of the force applying member to the rotating member is the second position.
  • the rotational position of the rotating member is located between the first position and the second position.
  • the limiting block, the rotating member and the force applying member form a lever structure.
  • the limit block and the force applying member are located on both sides of the rotating position of the rotating member, and the limit block and the force applying member are not easy to interfere with each other during movement, thereby ensuring the self-locking assembly. reliability.
  • the distance between the first position and the rotational position of the rotating member is the first distance.
  • the distance between the second position and the rotation position of the rotating member is the second distance.
  • the first distance is greater than the second distance.
  • the force applying member is a shape memory alloy.
  • the direction of the acting force is the same as the pressure exerted by the limiting block on the moving bracket.
  • the force applying member and the moving bracket are located on the same side of the rotating member.
  • the extending direction of the force applying member can have an overlapping area with the extending direction of the moving bracket in the Y-axis. In this way, when the length of the force applying member is greatly increased, the force applying member will not increase the length of the optical lens in the Y-axis direction.
  • the contraction length of the force-applying member under power-on is also relatively large, and at this time, the angle at which the force-applying member pulls the rotating member to rotate is also relatively large.
  • the distance between the limit block and the moving bracket is also relatively large. In this way, when the moving bracket moves along the X-axis direction, it is not easy to interfere with the limiting block.
  • the material of the rotating member is a conductive material.
  • the self-locking assembly further includes a first circuit board, a connector and a rotating shaft.
  • the first circuit board is spaced apart from the moving bracket.
  • the first circuit board includes first pins and second pins arranged at intervals.
  • the connector is fixed on the first circuit board, and the connector is electrically connected to the first pin.
  • One end of the force applying member is fixed to the connector, and the other end is fixed to the rotating member.
  • One end of the rotating shaft is fixed to the base, and the other end is rotatably connected to the rotating member.
  • the rotating shaft is electrically connected to the second pin.
  • the rotating shaft can not only be used to rotate the rotating member relative to the base, but also can be used as a part of the current path.
  • the reel has the effect of "multi-purpose for one thing".
  • the rotating member can not only be used to drive the limit block to rotate, but also can be used as a part of the current path. Rotating parts also have the effect of "multi-purpose”.
  • the elastic member is located on a side of the rotating member away from the limiting block, and the elastic member is disposed opposite to the limiting block.
  • the elastic member is not likely to interfere with the force-applying member, thereby ensuring that the self Reliability of lock components.
  • the connecting position of the limiting block and the rotating member is the first position.
  • the force applying position of the force applying member to the rotating member is the second position.
  • the first position and the second position are located on the same side of the rotational position of the rotating member. At this time, the force-applying distance of the force-applying member to the limiting block is shorter, and the limiting block is more easily separated from the moving bracket.
  • the material of the rotating member is a magnetic material.
  • the force-applying member includes a magnetic member and a coil wound on the surface of the magnetic member. One end of the magnetic member is fixed on the base, and the other end faces the rotating member. The direction of the acting force is opposite to the pressure exerted by the limiting block on the moving bracket. At this time, the force applying member and the moving bracket are located on different sides of the rotating member. When the moving bracket moves along the X-axis direction, the moving bracket is not easy to interfere with the force applying member. In addition, the magnetic field generated by the force-applying member does not easily affect the movement of the movable bracket along the X-axis direction.
  • the elastic member and the force applying member are located on the same side of the rotating member, and the elastic member and the force applying member are located on both sides of the rotating position of the rotating member.
  • the elastic member and the force-applying member are arranged on both sides of the rotating position of the rotating member, when the force-applying member exerts force on the rotating member, the elastic member is not easily connected to the rotating member.
  • the force-applying members interfere with each other.
  • the motor further includes a base plate, a fixing bracket and a guide rail.
  • the fixing bracket is arranged opposite to the base plate.
  • One end of the guide rail is fixed to the base plate, and the other end is fixed to the fixing bracket.
  • the moving bracket is located between the base plate and the fixed bracket, and is movably connected to the guide rail.
  • the optical lens further includes a second lens. The second lens is mounted on the fixing bracket. The second lens is located on the object side of the first lens.
  • the side where the subject is located is the object side.
  • the surface of the lens near the object side is called the object side.
  • the side where the image of the subject is located is the image side.
  • the surface of the lens near the image side is called the image side.
  • the second lens can receive light with a large angle of view to a greater extent. At this time, the viewing angle of the optical lens can be greatly improved.
  • the optical lens further includes a housing.
  • the base plate and the fixing bracket are located inside the casing and are fixed to the casing.
  • the movable bracket includes a first movable bracket and a second movable bracket arranged at intervals.
  • the first lens is fixed on both the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket.
  • the driving member includes a first magnet, a first coil, a second magnet and a second coil.
  • the first magnet is fixed to the first moving bracket.
  • the first coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing and faces the first magnet.
  • the second magnet is fixed on the second moving bracket.
  • the second coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing and faces the second magnet.
  • the first lens mounted on the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can move along the X-axis direction alone.
  • the optical design freedom of the optical lens is better.
  • the optical lens further includes a lens circuit board.
  • the lens circuit board is electrically connected to the first coil and the second coil. At this time, the lens circuit board can transmit signals to the first coil and the second coil.
  • the optical lens further includes a Hall sensor and a detection magnet.
  • the detection magnet is fixed on the moving bracket.
  • the Hall sensor is used to detect the magnetic field strength when the detection magnet is at different positions.
  • the Hall sensor is used to measure the magnetic field strength at the position where the detection magnet is located, and it is determined whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position.
  • the driving member can continue to push the movable bracket to move along the X-axis direction, so that the movable bracket can accurately move to the target position. Therefore, by providing the Hall sensor and the detection magnet, the accuracy of the movement of the movable bracket in the X-axis direction can be significantly improved.
  • the optical lens further includes a prism motor and a reflector.
  • the reflector is rotatably connected to the prism motor.
  • the reflector is used for reflecting ambient light, so that the ambient light is transmitted to the first lens.
  • the reflector of this embodiment is described by taking a triangular prism as an example.
  • the optical lens is prone to shake during the process of collecting ambient light, and at this time, the transmission path of the ambient light is prone to deflection, resulting in poor images captured by the optical lens.
  • the prism motor can drive the triangular prism to rotate, so that the triangular prism can be used to adjust the transmission path of the ambient light and reduce or avoid the occurrence of the transmission path of the ambient light. deflection, thereby ensuring that the optical lens has a better shooting effect. Therefore, the reflector can play an optical anti-shake effect.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide another optical lens.
  • the optical lens includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly.
  • the motor includes a drive member and a moving bracket.
  • the first lens is mounted on the moving bracket.
  • the driving member is used for driving the moving bracket to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
  • the moving support includes a first moving support and a second moving support.
  • the optical axis direction of the optical lens is the X axis direction.
  • the optical axis refers to an axis passing through the center of each lens.
  • the self-locking assembly includes a first clip and a second clip.
  • the first fastener is fixed on the moving bracket.
  • a first through hole is formed on the first fastener.
  • the first fastener is fixed to the moving bracket by tape or glue.
  • the first clip and the moving bracket are integrally formed.
  • the second fastener includes an elastic member, a limiting block and a force applying member.
  • the elastic member is located on a side of the first latching member away from the moving bracket.
  • the elastic member may be an elastic piece or a spring.
  • the limiting block is located between the elastic member and the moving bracket.
  • the limiting block is fixed on one end of the elastic piece.
  • the limiting block is fixed to the elastic member by tape or glue.
  • the limiting block and the elastic member are integrally formed.
  • the force applying member is used for applying force to the limit block when the power is turned on.
  • the energization condition of the force-applying member can be determined according to whether the moving bracket moves relatively. For example, when the moving bracket is not relatively moved, the force applying member is not energized. When the moving bracket moves relatively, the force applying member is energized. In addition, when the movable bracket is not relatively moved, the movable bracket is in a fixed position. The fixed position is a position of the moving bracket when the optical lens does not start shooting.
  • part of the limiting block is located in the first through hole. At this time, the hole wall of the first through hole can limit the movement of the limiting block.
  • the limiting block When the force applying member is energized, the limiting block is driven to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member and move out of the first through hole.
  • the movable bracket when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the movable bracket can avoid collision with other components in the optical lens, thereby reducing the collision risk of the movable bracket.
  • the movable bracket when the movable bracket includes the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, by locking the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, the collision between the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can be avoided, thereby reducing the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket. Risk of collision between a mobile bracket and a second mobile bracket. The reliability of the moving bracket is better.
  • Forced vibration refers to the vibration that occurs under the action of periodic external forces.
  • the second fastener further includes a base and a sliding block.
  • One end of the elastic member away from the limiting block is fixed on the base.
  • the sliding block is connected between the elastic member and the limiting block.
  • the sliding block is slidably connected to the base.
  • the material of the sliding block is a magnetic material.
  • the sliding block may be a magnet or a magnetic steel.
  • the force-applying member includes a magnetic member and a coil wound on the surface of the magnetic member.
  • One end of the magnetic piece is fixed on the base, and the other end faces the sliding block.
  • the elastic member is sleeved with the force applying member. At this time, the force applying member is located inside the elastic member.
  • the force applying member can effectively utilize the inner space of the elastic member.
  • the assembly of the elastic member and the force-applying member is relatively compact, and the space utilization rate of the optical lens is high.
  • the elastic member when the force applying member is not energized, applies elastic force to the sliding block. It can be understood that, by pressing the limit block into the first through hole of the first fastener by the elastic force of the elastic member, the stability of the limit block can be better, that is, The limiting block is not easy to move out of the first through hole of the first clip.
  • the elastic member includes a first fixing portion, a connecting portion and a second fixing portion.
  • the connecting portion is connected between the first fixing portion and the second fixing portion.
  • the second fixing portion is disposed opposite to the first fixing portion.
  • the shape of the elastic member is roughly "C" shape.
  • the limiting block is fixed on a side of the second fixing portion away from the first fixing portion.
  • the force applying member is a shape memory alloy, one end of the force applying member is connected to the first fixing portion, and the other end is connected to the second fixing portion.
  • the material of the second fixing portion and the connecting portion is a conductive material.
  • the self-locking assembly further includes a first circuit board.
  • the first circuit board includes first pins and second pins arranged at intervals.
  • the first fixing portion includes a first conductive segment, an insulating segment and a second conductive segment. One end of the insulating segment is connected to the first conductive segment, and the other end is connected to the second conductive segment.
  • the first conductive segment is connected to one end of the force applying member.
  • the second conductive segment is connected to the connecting portion.
  • the first conductive segment is electrically connected to the first pin.
  • the second conductive segment is electrically connected to the second pin.
  • the elastic member can not only be used to drive the limiting block to extend into the first through hole or extend out of the first through hole, but also can be used as a part of the current path.
  • the elastic member has the effect of "multi-purpose”.
  • the motor further includes a base plate, a fixing bracket and a guide rail.
  • the fixing bracket is arranged opposite to the base plate.
  • One end of the guide rail is fixed to the base plate, and the other end is fixed to the fixing bracket.
  • the moving bracket is located between the base plate and the fixed bracket, and is movably connected to the guide rail.
  • the optical lens further includes a second lens. The second lens is mounted on the fixing bracket. The second lens is located on the object side of the first lens.
  • the second lens can receive light with a large angle of view to a greater extent. At this time, the viewing angle of the optical lens can be greatly improved.
  • the optical lens further includes a housing.
  • the base plate and the fixing bracket are located inside the casing and are fixed to the casing.
  • the movable bracket includes a first movable bracket and a second movable bracket arranged at intervals.
  • the first lens is fixed on both the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket.
  • the driving member includes a first magnet, a first coil, a second magnet and a second coil.
  • the first magnet is fixed to the first moving bracket.
  • the first coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing and faces the first magnet.
  • the second magnet is fixed on the second moving bracket.
  • the second coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing and faces the second magnet.
  • the first lens mounted on the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can move along the X-axis direction alone.
  • the optical lens has a better degree of freedom in optical design, and the cooperative movement among the plurality of first lenses is more flexible.
  • the optical lens further includes a lens circuit board.
  • the lens circuit board is electrically connected to the first coil and the second coil. At this time, the lens circuit board can transmit signals to the first coil and the second coil.
  • the optical lens further includes a Hall sensor and a detection magnet.
  • the detection magnet is fixed on the moving bracket.
  • the Hall sensor is used to detect the magnetic field strength when the detection magnet is at different positions.
  • the Hall sensor is used to measure the magnetic field strength at the position where the detection magnet is located, and it is determined whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position.
  • the driving member can continue to push the movable bracket to move along the X-axis direction, so that the movable bracket can accurately move to the target position. Therefore, by providing the Hall sensor and the detection magnet, the accuracy of the movement of the movable bracket in the X-axis direction can be significantly improved.
  • the optical lens further includes a prism motor and a reflector.
  • the reflector is rotatably connected to the prism motor.
  • the reflector is used for reflecting ambient light, so that the ambient light is transmitted to the first lens.
  • the reflector of this embodiment is described by taking a triangular prism as an example.
  • the optical lens is prone to shake during the process of collecting ambient light, and at this time, the transmission path of the ambient light is prone to deflection, resulting in poor images captured by the optical lens.
  • the prism motor can drive the triangular prism to rotate, so that the triangular prism can be used to adjust the transmission path of the ambient light and reduce or avoid the occurrence of the transmission path of the ambient light. deflection, thereby ensuring that the optical lens has a better shooting effect. Therefore, the reflector can play an optical anti-shake effect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a camera module.
  • the camera module includes a module circuit board, a photosensitive chip, an optical filter, and the above-mentioned optical lens.
  • the optical lens includes the optical lens of the first aspect and the optical lens of the second aspect.
  • the module circuit board is located on the image side of the optical lens.
  • the photosensitive chip is fixed on the side of the module circuit board facing the optical lens.
  • the photosensitive chip is used for collecting ambient light passing through the optical lens.
  • the filter is fixed on the side of the photosensitive chip facing the optical lens.
  • the filter can be used to filter stray light in ambient light, and make the filtered ambient light propagate to the photosensitive chip, so as to ensure that the image captured by the camera module has better clarity.
  • the internal structure of the camera module is not likely to collide or interfere with each other due to external vibration or shaking, and the reliability of the camera module better.
  • the stability of the camera module is good, and the optical lens is not prone to forced vibration.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device.
  • the electronic device may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or the like.
  • the electronic device includes a casing and the above-mentioned camera module, and the camera module is mounted on the casing.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a shooting method for a camera module.
  • the camera module includes an optical lens and a photosensitive chip.
  • the photosensitive chip is located on the image side of the optical lens.
  • the optical lens includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly.
  • the motor includes a drive member and a moving bracket.
  • the first lens is mounted on the moving bracket.
  • the driving member is used for driving the moving bracket to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
  • the moving support includes a first moving support and a second moving support.
  • the optical axis direction of the optical lens is the X axis direction.
  • the optical axis refers to an axis passing through the center of each lens.
  • the self-locking assembly includes a base, a rotating part, a force applying part, an elastic part and a limiting block.
  • the base and the moving bracket are arranged at intervals.
  • the rotating member is rotatably connected to the base.
  • One end of the elastic member is connected to the rotating member, and the other end is connected to the base.
  • the limiting block is located between the rotating member and the moving bracket. The limiting block is fixed to the rotating member.
  • the shooting method includes:
  • the force application member is controlled to be powered off, and the rotating member drives the limit block to rotate under the elastic force of the elastic member, so that the limit block is pressed against the desired position. contact with the moving bracket;
  • the photosensitive chip is controlled to convert optical signals into electrical signals and output them.
  • the movable bracket when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the movable bracket can avoid collision with other components in the optical lens, thereby reducing the collision risk of the movable bracket.
  • the movable bracket when the movable bracket includes the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, by locking the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, the collision between the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can be avoided, thereby reducing the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket. Risk of collision between a mobile bracket and a second mobile bracket.
  • Forced vibration refers to the vibration that occurs under the action of periodic external forces.
  • the optical lens further includes a Hall sensor and a detection magnet, and the detection magnet is fixed to the moving bracket;
  • the method further includes:
  • the Hall sensor detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet
  • the moving bracket is controlled to drive the first lens to move the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
  • the Hall sensor is used to measure the magnetic field strength at the position where the detection magnet is located, and it is determined whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position.
  • the driving member can continue to push the movable bracket to move along the X-axis direction, so that the movable bracket can accurately move to the target position. Therefore, by providing the Hall sensor and the detection magnet, the accuracy of the movement of the movable bracket in the X-axis direction can be significantly improved.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide another shooting method for a camera module.
  • the camera module includes an optical lens and a photosensitive chip.
  • the photosensitive chip is located on the image side of the optical lens.
  • the optical lens includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly.
  • the motor includes a drive member and a moving bracket.
  • the first lens is mounted on the moving bracket.
  • the driving member is used for driving the moving bracket to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
  • the moving support includes a first moving support and a second moving support.
  • the optical axis direction of the optical lens is the X axis direction.
  • the optical axis refers to an axis passing through the center of each lens.
  • the self-locking assembly includes a first clip and a second clip.
  • the first fastener is fixed on the moving bracket.
  • a first through hole is formed on the first fastener.
  • the first fastener is fixed to the moving bracket by tape or glue.
  • the first clip and the moving bracket are integrally formed.
  • the second snap member includes an elastic member, a limiting block and a force applying member.
  • the elastic member is located on a side of the first latching member away from the moving bracket.
  • the elastic member may be an elastic piece or a spring.
  • the limiting block is located between the elastic member and the moving bracket. The limiting block is fixed on one end of the elastic piece.
  • the shooting method includes:
  • controlling the moving bracket to drive the first lens to move from a fixed position to a target position along the optical axis of the optical lens
  • controlling the photosensitive chip to convert optical signals into electrical signals and output them
  • part of the limiting block protrudes into the first through hole under the elastic force of the elastic member.
  • the movable bracket when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the movable bracket can avoid collision with other components in the optical lens, thereby reducing the collision risk of the movable bracket.
  • the movable bracket when the movable bracket includes the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, by locking the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, the collision between the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can be avoided, thereby reducing the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket. Risk of collision between a mobile bracket and a second mobile bracket. The reliability of the moving bracket is better.
  • Forced vibration refers to the vibration that occurs under the action of periodic external forces.
  • the optical lens further includes a Hall sensor and a detection magnet, and the detection magnet is fixed to the moving bracket;
  • the method further includes:
  • the Hall sensor detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet
  • the moving bracket is controlled to drive the first lens to move the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens from the fixed position.
  • the Hall sensor is used to measure the magnetic field strength at the position where the detection magnet is located, and it is determined whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position.
  • the driving member can continue to push the movable bracket to move along the X-axis direction, so that the movable bracket can accurately move to the target position. Therefore, by providing the Hall sensor and the detection magnet, the accuracy of the movement of the movable bracket in the X-axis direction can be significantly improved.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 2 is a partial exploded schematic view of the electronic device shown in Fig. 1;
  • FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the electronic device shown in FIG. 1 at line A-A;
  • Fig. 4 is the structural representation of the camera module of the electronic device shown in Fig. 1;
  • FIG. 5 is a partially exploded schematic view of the camera module shown in FIG. 4;
  • FIG. 6 is a partially exploded schematic view of the optical lens shown in FIG. 5;
  • FIG. 7 is a partially exploded schematic view of an embodiment of the lens assembly shown in FIG. 6;
  • FIG. 8 is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor shown in FIG. 7;
  • FIG. 9 is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor shown in FIG. 7;
  • Figure 10 is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor shown in Figure 7;
  • FIG. 11 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment
  • FIG. 12 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment
  • FIG. 13 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment
  • Figure 14 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 13;
  • Fig. 15 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in Fig. 13;
  • Figure 16 is an exploded schematic view of the self-locking member shown in Figure 14;
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment
  • Figure 18 is an enlarged schematic view of part of the camera module shown in Figure 17 at B;
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 in another state of the structure of the first embodiment
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of a shooting method of the camera module shown in FIG. 1 under the first embodiment
  • FIG. 21 is a partially exploded schematic view of another embodiment of the lens assembly shown in FIG. 6;
  • FIG. 22 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the second embodiment
  • Figure 23 is a partial exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 22;
  • Figure 24 is an exploded schematic view of the self-locking member shown in Figure 23;
  • Figure 25 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 22;
  • 26 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the second embodiment
  • Figure 27 is an enlarged schematic view of the part of the camera module shown in Figure 26 at C;
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the second embodiment
  • FIG. 29 is a partially exploded schematic view of still another embodiment of the lens assembly shown in FIG. 6;
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the third embodiment
  • Figure 31 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 30;
  • Fig. 32 is a partial exploded schematic view of the second clip shown in Fig. 30;
  • Fig. 33 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the second clip shown in Fig. 31;
  • Fig. 34 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the second clip shown in Fig. 31;
  • Figure 35 is an enlarged schematic view of the part of the camera module shown in Figure 30 at D;
  • FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the third embodiment
  • FIG. 37 is a schematic flowchart of a shooting method of the camera module shown in FIG. 1 under a third embodiment
  • FIG. 38 is a partially exploded schematic view of still another embodiment of the lens assembly shown in FIG. 6;
  • 39 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the fourth embodiment.
  • Figure 40 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 39;
  • Figure 41 is a partially exploded schematic view of the second clip shown in Figure 40;
  • Figure 42 is a partial structural schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 39;
  • Figure 43 is an enlarged schematic view of the part of the camera module shown in Figure 39 at E;
  • FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 1 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 1 may be a mobile phone, a tablet personal computer, a laptop computer, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a camera, a personal computer, a notebook computer, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, Augmented reality (AR) glasses, AR helmets, virtual reality (VR) glasses or VR helmets, or other forms of equipment with photography and videography functions.
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • AR Augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • FIG. 1 is described by taking a mobile phone as an example.
  • FIG. 2 is a partial exploded schematic view of the electronic device 1 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the electronic device 1 includes a casing 70 , a screen 80 , a host circuit board 90 and a camera module 100 .
  • FIGS. 1, 2 and the following related drawings only schematically show some components included in the electronic device 1, and the actual shapes, actual sizes, actual positions and actual structures of these components are not affected by those shown in FIGS. 1 and 1. 2 and the accompanying drawings below.
  • the electronic device 1 may also not include the screen 80 and the host circuit board 90 .
  • the width direction of the electronic device 1 is defined as the X axis.
  • the longitudinal direction of the electronic device 1 is the Y axis.
  • the thickness direction of the electronic device 1 is the Z axis. It can be understood that, the coordinate system setting of the electronic device 1 can be flexibly set according to specific actual needs.
  • the housing 70 includes a frame 71 and a back cover 72 .
  • the rear cover 72 is fixed to one side of the frame 71 .
  • the back cover 72 is fixedly connected to the frame 71 by adhesive.
  • the rear cover 72 and the frame 71 form an integral molding structure, that is, the rear cover 72 and the frame 71 are an integral structure.
  • the housing 70 may also include a midplane (not shown).
  • the middle plate is connected to the inner surface of the frame 71 .
  • the middle plate is opposite to and spaced apart from the rear cover 72 .
  • the screen 80 is fixed on the other side of the frame 71 .
  • the screen 80 is disposed opposite to the rear cover 72 .
  • the screen 80 , the frame 71 and the back cover 72 together enclose the interior of the electronic device 1 .
  • the interior of the electronic device 1 can be used to place components of the electronic device 1 , such as a battery, a receiver, and a microphone.
  • the screen 80 may be used to display images, text, and the like.
  • the screen 80 may be a flat screen or a curved screen.
  • the screen 80 includes a first cover 81 and a display screen 82 .
  • the first cover plate 81 is stacked on the display screen 82 .
  • the first cover plate 81 can be disposed close to the display screen 82 , and can be mainly used for protecting and dustproofing the display screen 82 .
  • the material of the first cover plate 81 may be, but not limited to, glass.
  • the display screen 82 can adopt an organic light-emitting diode (organic light-emitting diode, OLED) display screen, an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode, AMOLED) display screen , quantum dot light emitting diode (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED) display, etc.
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED active matrix organic light emitting diode
  • QLED quantum dot light emitting diode
  • FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the electronic device 1 shown in FIG. 1 at the line A-A.
  • the host circuit board 90 is fixed inside the electronic device 1 . Specifically, the host circuit board 90 may be fixed to the side of the screen 80 facing the back cover 72 . In other embodiments, when the housing 70 includes a midplane, the host circuit board 90 may be fixed to the surface of the midplane facing the rear cover 72 .
  • the host circuit board 90 may be a rigid circuit board, a flexible circuit board, or a flexible-rigid circuit board.
  • the host circuit board 90 may use an FR-4 dielectric board, a Rogers (Rogers) dielectric board, or a mixed FR-4 and Rogers dielectric board, and so on.
  • FR-4 is the code name for a flame-resistant material grade
  • the Rogers dielectric board is a high-frequency board.
  • the host circuit board 90 may be used to house the chips.
  • the chip may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), and a universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like.
  • the camera module 100 is fixed inside the electronic device 1 . Specifically, the camera module 100 is fixed on the side of the screen 80 facing the back cover 72 . In other embodiments, when the housing 70 includes a middle plate, the camera module 100 can be fixed on the surface of the middle plate facing the rear cover 72 .
  • the host circuit board 90 is provided with an escape space 91 .
  • the shape of the avoidance space 91 is not limited to the rectangular shape illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 . At this time, the shape of the host circuit board 90 is not limited to the " ⁇ " shape shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 .
  • the camera module 100 is located in the avoidance space 91 . In this way, in the Z-axis direction, the camera module 100 and the host circuit board 90 have an overlapping area, so as to avoid an increase in the thickness of the electronic device 1 due to the camera module 100 being stacked on the host circuit board 90 .
  • the host circuit board 90 may not be provided with the avoidance space 91 . At this time, the camera module 100 may be stacked on the host circuit board 90 , or disposed at intervals from the host circuit board 90 .
  • the camera module 100 is electrically connected to the host circuit board 90 .
  • the camera module 100 is electrically connected to the CPU through the host circuit board 90 .
  • the CPU receives the user's instruction, the CPU can send a signal to the camera module 100 through the host circuit board 90 to control the camera module 100 to capture images or record videos.
  • the camera module 100 can also directly receive the user's instruction, and take images or video according to the user's instruction.
  • the rear cover 72 defines a through hole 73 .
  • the through hole 73 communicates the inside of the electronic device 1 to the outside of the electronic device 1 .
  • the electronic device 1 further includes a camera decoration part 61 and a second cover plate 62 .
  • Part of the camera decorations 61 may be fixed on the inner surface of the back cover 72 , and some of the camera decorations 61 are in contact with the hole walls of the through holes 73 .
  • the second cover plate 62 is fixedly connected to the inner surface of the camera decorative piece 61 .
  • the camera decoration 61 and the second cover 62 separate the inside of the electronic device 1 from the outside of the electronic device 1 , so as to prevent water or dust from entering the inside of the electronic device 1 through the through hole 73 .
  • the material of the second cover plate 62 is a transparent material. For example, glass or plastic. At this time, ambient light outside the electronic device 1 can enter the interior of the electronic device 1 through the second cover plate 62 .
  • the camera module 100 collects ambient light entering the interior of the electronic device 1 .
  • the shape of the through hole 73 is not limited to the circle shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 .
  • the shape of the through hole 73 may also be an ellipse or other irregular shapes.
  • the camera module 100 can also collect ambient light passing through the back cover 72 .
  • the material of the back cover 72 is a transparent material. For example, glass or plastic.
  • the surface of the rear cover 72 facing the inside of the electronic device 1 is partially coated with ink and partially uncoated with ink. At this time, the area where the ink is not applied forms the light-transmitting area.
  • the camera module 100 collects ambient light. It can be understood that, the electronic device 1 of this embodiment may not need to open the through hole 73 , nor may the camera decorative member 61 and the second cover plate 62 be provided. The electronic device 1 has better integrity and lower cost.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 100 of the electronic device 1 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • FIG. 5 is a partially exploded schematic view of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the camera module 100 includes an optical lens 10 , a module circuit board 20 , a photosensitive chip 30 and a filter 40 . It should be noted that the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 is the same as the optical axis direction of the camera module 100 .
  • the module circuit board 20 is fixed on the light-emitting side of the optical lens 10 , that is, the module circuit board 20 is located on the image side of the optical lens 10 .
  • FIG. 4 illustrates that the module circuit board 20 and the optical lens 10 roughly enclose the shape of a cuboid. As shown in FIG. 3 , the module circuit board 20 can be electrically connected to the host circuit board 90 . In this way, signals can be transmitted between the host circuit board 90 and the module circuit board 20 .
  • the modular circuit board 20 may be a rigid circuit board, a flexible circuit board, or a flexible-rigid circuit board.
  • the modular circuit board 20 may use an FR-4 dielectric board, a Rogers (Rogers) dielectric board, or a mixed media board of Rogers and FR-4, and so on.
  • the photosensitive chip 30 is fixed on the side of the module circuit board 20 facing the optical lens 10 .
  • the photosensitive chip 30 is electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 . In this way, after the photosensitive chip 30 collects the ambient light, the photosensitive chip 30 generates a signal according to the ambient light, and transmits the signal to the host circuit board 90 via the module circuit board 20 .
  • the photosensitive chip 30 may be mounted on the module circuit board 20 through a chip on board (COB) technology. In other embodiments, the photosensitive chip 30 may also be packaged on the module circuit board 20 by a ball grid array (BGA) technology or a land grid array (LGA) technology.
  • COB chip on board
  • BGA ball grid array
  • LGA land grid array
  • electronic components or other chips are also mounted on the modular circuit board 20 .
  • Electronic components or other chips are arranged around the photosensitive chip 30 .
  • the electronic components or other chips are used to assist the photosensitive chip 30 to collect ambient light, and to assist the photosensitive chip 30 to perform signal processing on the collected ambient light.
  • a reinforcing plate is provided on a side of the module circuit board 20 away from the photosensitive chip 30 .
  • the reinforcing plate is a steel plate. The reinforcing plate can improve the strength of the module circuit board 20 .
  • the module circuit board 20 may also be partially provided with a sink, and in this case, the photosensitive chip 30 may be installed in the sink.
  • the photosensitive chip 30 and the module circuit board 20 have an overlapping area in the X-axis direction, and at this time, the camera module 100 can be set thinner in the X-axis direction.
  • the filter 40 is located on the side of the photosensitive chip 30 facing the optical lens 10 .
  • the filter 40 can be used to filter the stray light of ambient light passing through the optical lens 10 , and make the filtered ambient light propagate to the photosensitive chip 30 , so as to ensure that the image captured by the electronic device 1 has better clarity.
  • the filter 40 may be, but is not limited to, a blue glass filter.
  • the filter 40 can also be a reflective infrared filter, or a double-pass filter (the double-pass filter can transmit visible light and infrared light in ambient light at the same time, or allow visible light in ambient light to pass through at the same time. It transmits light of other specific wavelengths (such as ultraviolet light) at the same time, or transmits infrared light and light of other specific wavelengths (such as ultraviolet light) at the same time.).
  • FIG. 6 is a partially exploded schematic view of the optical lens 10 shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the optical lens 10 includes a lens assembly 101 and a reflection assembly 11 .
  • the optical axis direction of the lens assembly 101 is the same as the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
  • the reflection assembly 11 is fixed on the light incident side of the lens assembly 101 .
  • FIG. 5 illustrates the shape of the reflection assembly 11 and the lens assembly 101 roughly enclosing a rectangular parallelepiped. Wherein, the reflection component 11 is used for reflecting the ambient light, so that the ambient light is transmitted to the lens component 101 .
  • the reflection component 11 may be used to reflect the ambient light propagating along the Z-axis direction to the ambient light propagating along the X-axis direction. In other embodiments, the reflection component 11 may be used to reflect ambient light propagating along the Z-axis direction to ambient light propagating in other directions.
  • the reflecting assembly 11 includes a prism motor 111 and a reflecting member 112 .
  • the prism motor 111 is fixed to the light incident side of the lens assembly 101 .
  • the reflector 112 is located inside the prism motor 111 .
  • the reflector 112 may be a triangular prism or a reflector.
  • the reflecting member 112 in this embodiment is described by taking a triangular prism as an example. It should be noted that the reference numerals of the triangular prisms below are the same as those of the reflector 112 .
  • the prism motor 111 is provided with a first light-transmitting hole 1111 .
  • the first light-transmitting hole 1111 communicates the inside of the prism motor 111 to the outside of the prism motor 111 .
  • the shape of the first light-transmitting hole 1111 is not limited to the rectangle shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the first light-transmitting hole 1111 is disposed opposite to the second cover plate 62 . At this time, ambient light outside the electronic device 1 can enter the interior of the prism motor 111 through the second cover plate 62 and the first light-transmitting hole 1111 .
  • the prism motor 111 is provided with a second light-transmitting hole 1112 .
  • the second light-transmitting hole 1112 communicates the inside of the prism motor 111 to the outside of the prism motor 111 .
  • the second light-transmitting hole 1112 faces the lens assembly 101 .
  • the triangular prism 112 includes a light incident surface 1121 , a reflection surface 1122 and a light exit surface 1123 .
  • the reflective surface 1122 is connected between the light incident surface 1121 and the light exit surface 1123.
  • the light incident surface 1121 is disposed opposite to the first light transmission hole 1111 .
  • the light-emitting surface 1123 is disposed opposite to the second light-transmitting hole 1112 .
  • the triangular prism 112 is used to reflect the ambient light propagating in the Z-axis direction to propagating in the X-axis direction.
  • the components of the camera module 100 that receive ambient light propagating along the X-axis direction can be arranged along the X-axis direction. Since the size of the electronic device 1 in the X-axis direction is relatively large, the arrangement of the components in the camera module 100 in the X-axis direction is more flexible and simpler.
  • the optical axis direction of the camera module 100 is the X axis direction. In other embodiments, the optical axis direction of the camera module 100 may also be the Y axis direction.
  • the triangular prism 112 is rotatably connected to the prism motor 111 .
  • the triangular prism 112 can rotate on the XZ plane with the Y axis as the rotation axis.
  • the triangular prism 112 can also be rotated in the XY plane with the Z axis as the rotation axis. It can be understood that the camera module 100 is prone to shake during the process of collecting ambient light, and at this time, the transmission path of the ambient light is prone to deflection, resulting in poor images captured by the camera module 100 .
  • the prism motor 111 can drive the triangular prism 112 to rotate, so that the triangular prism 112 is used to adjust the transmission path of the ambient light and reduce or avoid the deflection of the transmission path of the ambient light.
  • the reflection component 11 can play an optical anti-shake effect.
  • the triangular prism 112 can also be fixedly connected to the prism motor 111 or can be slidably connected to the prism motor 111 .
  • the lens assembly 101 has various arrangement modes. Several ways of setting the lens assembly 101 will be described in detail below with reference to the related drawings.
  • the first embodiment please refer to FIG. 7 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of an embodiment of the lens assembly 101 shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the lens assembly 101 includes a housing 12 , a motor 14 , a lens 15 , a lens circuit board 16 , a hall sensor 171 , a detection magnet 172 and a self-locking assembly 50 .
  • the housing 12 includes an upper cover 121 and a bottom plate 122 .
  • the upper cover 121 is mounted on the bottom plate 122 .
  • the upper cover 121 and the bottom plate 122 form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped. It should be noted that, the symbols 122 at the top of FIG. 7 have clearly marked the corresponding structures at the bottom of FIG. 7 .
  • the upper mark 122 in FIG. 7 mainly indicates that both the bottom plate 122 and the upper cover 121 belong to the casing 12 .
  • the upper cover 121 includes a right side panel 1212 , an upper side panel 1215 , and a front side panel 1213 and a rear side panel 1214 disposed opposite to each other.
  • the right side plate 1212 is connected between the front side plate 1213 and the rear side plate 1214 .
  • the upper side plate 1215 is connected between the front side plate 1213 and the rear side plate 1214 .
  • the right side plate 1212 is provided with a third light-transmitting hole 1211 .
  • the third light-transmitting hole 1211 communicates the inside of the housing 12 to the outside of the housing 12 .
  • the shape of the third light-transmitting hole 1211 is not limited to the rectangle shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 .
  • the third light-transmitting hole 1211 and the second light-transmitting hole 1112 are disposed opposite to each other. When the ambient light is transmitted to the outside of the reflection element 11 through the second light-transmitting hole 1112 , the ambient light is transmitted to the inside of the lens element 101 through the third light-transmitting hole 1211 .
  • FIG. 8 is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor 14 shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the motor 14 includes a base plate 13 , a guide rail 141 , a fixed bracket 142 , a first moving bracket 143 , a second moving bracket 144 , a first magnet 145 , a first coil 146 , a second magnet 147 and a second coil 148 .
  • the first magnet 145 and the first coil 146 form a first driving member.
  • the second magnet 147 and the second coil 148 form a second driving member.
  • the first driving member is used to drive the first moving bracket 143 to move along the X-axis direction.
  • the second driving member is used for driving the second moving bracket 144 to move along the X-axis direction.
  • the number of driving members is not limited to the two shown in this embodiment.
  • the moving brackets are not limited to the two illustrated in this embodiment.
  • the substrate 13 has a plate-like structure.
  • the substrate 13 is provided with a fourth light-transmitting hole 131 .
  • the fourth light-transmitting holes 131 penetrate through two opposite surfaces of the substrate 13 .
  • the substrate 13 is fixed to the side of the housing 12 away from the third light-transmitting hole 1211 .
  • the substrate 13 and the housing 12 substantially enclose a rectangular parallelepiped.
  • FIG. 3 also illustrates that the substrate 13 is fixed to the side of the housing 12 away from the third light-transmitting hole 1211 .
  • the fourth light-transmitting hole 131 communicates the inside of the housing 12 to the outside of the housing 12 .
  • the photosensitive chip 30 and the light filter 40 are both located in the fourth light transmission hole 131 , and the light filter 40 is fixed on the hole wall of the fourth light transmission hole 131 . In this way, when the ambient light propagates to the inside of the housing 12 through the third light-transmitting hole 1211 , the ambient light can propagate to the filter 40 and the photosensitive chip 30 in sequence through the fourth light-transmitting hole 131 .
  • the substrate 13 defines a plurality of first fixing holes 132 .
  • the number of the first fixing holes 132 is not limited to the four shown in FIG. 8 .
  • the plurality of first fixing holes 132 penetrate through two opposite surfaces of the substrate 13 .
  • the plurality of first fixing holes 132 are located at the periphery of the fourth light-transmitting hole 131 .
  • the fixing bracket 142 defines a second fixing hole 1421 .
  • the second fixing hole 1421 penetrates two opposite surfaces of the fixing bracket 142 .
  • the number of the second fixing holes 1421 is the same as that of the first fixing holes 132 .
  • FIG. 9 is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor 14 shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the plurality of guide rails 141 are connected to the plurality of first fixing holes 132 in one-to-one correspondence.
  • the plurality of guide rails 141 are connected to the plurality of second fixing holes 1421 in one-to-one correspondence.
  • One end of the guide rail 141 is fixed in the first fixing hole 132 , and the other end is fixed in the second fixing hole 1421 .
  • the base plate 13 and the fixing bracket 142 are disposed opposite to each other, and both the base plate 13 and the fixing bracket 142 are fixedly connected to the guide rail 141 .
  • the fixing bracket 142 also defines a first mounting hole 1422 .
  • the lens 15 includes a second lens 152 .
  • the second lens 152 is installed in the first installation hole 1422 .
  • the second lens 152 is a fixed-focus lens.
  • the first moving bracket 143 is located between the fixed bracket 142 and the base plate 13 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is movably connected to the guide rail 141 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 defines a plurality of first sliding holes 1433 .
  • the number of the first sliding holes 1433 is the same as that of the guide rails 141 .
  • the plurality of guide rails 141 pass through the plurality of first sliding holes 1433 in a one-to-one correspondence.
  • the guide rail 141 can slide relative to the hole wall of the first sliding hole 1433 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 includes a first part 1431 and a second part 1432 connected to the first part 1431 .
  • the symbols 1432 at the top of FIG. 8 have clearly marked the corresponding structures at the bottom of FIG. 8 .
  • the upper mark 1432 in FIG. 8 mainly indicates that both the second part 1432 and the first part 1431 belong to the first moving bracket 143 .
  • first portion 1431 is provided with two first sliding holes 1433 .
  • the first part 1431 and the second part 1432 together define two other first sliding holes 1433 . It can be understood that, by arranging the first moving bracket 143 into the first part 1431 and the second part 1432 , the assembly difficulty of the plurality of guide rails 141 and the first moving bracket 143 is reduced.
  • the first portion 1431 is provided with a second mounting hole 1434 .
  • the second mounting hole 1434 is disposed opposite to the first mounting hole 1422 .
  • the lens 15 includes the first lens 151 .
  • the number of the first lenses 151 is two.
  • the first lens 151 is mounted in the second mounting hole 1434 .
  • the first lens 151 can also move relative to the guide rail 141 .
  • the number of the first lenses 151 mounted on the first moving bracket 143 may also be one, or more than two.
  • the first portion 1431 is provided with a first mounting groove 1435 .
  • the first installation groove 1435 is used for fixing the first magnet 145 .
  • the first magnet 145 substantially fills the first installation slot 1435 .
  • the first coil 146 is located inside the housing 12 (please refer to FIG. 7 ).
  • the first coil 146 is fixed to the surface of the front side plate 1213 (refer to FIG. 7 ) facing the first portion 1431 .
  • the first coil 146 faces the first magnet 145 .
  • FIG. 10 is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor 14 shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the second moving bracket 144 is located between the base plate 13 and the fixed bracket 142 .
  • the second moving bracket 144 is movably connected to the guide rail 141 .
  • the second moving bracket 144 defines a plurality of second sliding holes 1443 .
  • the number of the second sliding holes 1443 is the same as that of the guide rails 141 .
  • the plurality of guide rails 141 pass through the plurality of second sliding holes 1443 in a one-to-one correspondence.
  • the guide rail 141 can slide relative to the hole wall of the second sliding hole 1443 . It can be understood that, the second moving bracket 144 may move simultaneously with the first moving bracket 143 , or may not move simultaneously with the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the second moving bracket 144 includes a third part 1441 and a fourth part 1442 connected to the third part 1441 .
  • the third portion 1441 is provided with two second sliding holes 1443 .
  • the third portion 1441 and the fourth portion 1442 together define two other second sliding holes 1443 . It can be understood that, by arranging the second moving bracket 144 into the third part 1441 and the fourth part 1442 , the assembly difficulty of the plurality of guide rails 141 and the second moving bracket 144 is reduced.
  • the third portion 1441 is provided with a third mounting hole 1444 .
  • the third mounting hole 1444 is disposed opposite to the second mounting hole 1434 .
  • two first lenses 151 are installed in the third installation holes 1444 .
  • the number of the first lenses 151 fixed by the third mounting holes 1444 may also be one, or more than two.
  • the third portion 1441 is provided with a second mounting groove 1445 .
  • the second installation groove 1445 is used for fixing the second magnet 147 .
  • the second coil 148 is located inside the housing 12 (see FIG. 7). The second coil 148 is fixed to the surface of the rear side plate 1214 (refer to FIG. 7 ) facing the third portion 1441 . The second coil 148 faces the second magnet 147 .
  • FIG. 11 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment.
  • the lens circuit board 16 is located on one side of the motor 14 .
  • the substrate 13 is provided with grooves 133 .
  • a part of the lens circuit board 16 protrudes through the groove 133 and extends to be electrically connected with the module circuit board 20 .
  • FIG. 3 illustrates that the lens circuit board 16 is fixed to the upper side plate 1215 of the housing 12 .
  • the lens circuit board 16 is in contact with the module circuit board 20 .
  • the lens circuit board 16 may be a rigid circuit board, a flexible circuit board, or a flexible-rigid circuit board.
  • the lens circuit board 16 may use an FR-4 dielectric board, a Rogers dielectric board, a mixed media board of Rogers and FR-4, or the like.
  • the first coil 146 is electrically connected to the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the first coil 146 can be electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 through the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the first coil 146 is energized, and the first magnet 145 can generate a negative direction along the X-axis or the X-axis under the action of the first coil 146.
  • the ampere force in the positive direction of the axis At this time, the first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move along the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction under the ampere force.
  • the first lens 151 fixed to the first moving bracket 143 can also move in the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction.
  • the first magnet 145 can generate electricity along the X-axis. Ampere force in the negative or positive X-axis direction. At this time, the first magnet 145 can push the first moving bracket 143 to move along the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction under the ampere force.
  • the second coil 148 is electrically connected to the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the second coil 148 can be electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 through the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the second coil 148 is energized, and the second magnet 147 can generate ampere force along the negative direction of the X axis or the positive direction of the X axis.
  • the second magnet 147 pushes the second moving bracket 144 to move along the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction under the ampere force.
  • the first lens 151 fixed to the second moving bracket 144 can also move in the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction.
  • the second magnet 147 can generate electricity along the X axis. Ampere force in the negative or positive X-axis direction. At this time, the second magnet 147 can push the second moving bracket 144 to move along the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction under the ampere force.
  • the lens assembly 101 may also not include the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the first coil 146 and the second coil 148 may be electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 through wires, respectively.
  • FIG. 12 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment.
  • the first portion 1431 of the first moving bracket 143 is provided with a sinker 1436 .
  • the opening of the sink groove 1436 faces the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the detection magnet 172 is disposed in the sink 1436 . In this way, in the Z-axis direction, the detection magnet 172 does not increase the thickness of the camera module 100 .
  • the Hall sensor 171 is fixed on the side of the lens circuit board 16 facing the first moving bracket 143 , and is electrically connected to the lens circuit board 16 . At this time, the Hall sensor 171 is electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 through the lens circuit board 16 . The Hall sensor 171 is used to detect the magnetic field strength when the detection magnet 172 is at different positions.
  • the second moving bracket 144 may also be provided with a sink.
  • a detection magnet is arranged in the sink.
  • the lens circuit board 16 is provided with a Hall sensor. The Hall sensor is used to detect the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet on the second moving bracket 144 .
  • the lens circuit board 16 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 .
  • the first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move relative to the guide rail 141 along the positive X-axis direction or the negative X-axis direction under the ampere force.
  • the Hall sensor 171 is used to measure the magnetic field strength at the position where the detection magnet 172 is located, and determine whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position.
  • the Hall sensor 171 feeds back to the module circuit board 20 through the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the module circuit board 20 can provide the compensation current signal to the first coil 146 , so that the first moving bracket 143 can be accurately moved to the target position.
  • the moving accuracy of the first moving bracket 143 can be significantly improved, that is, the focusing accuracy of the camera module 100 can be significantly improved, thereby making the image captured by the camera module 100 more accurate. The effect is better.
  • FIG. 13 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment.
  • the self-locking component 50 is located inside the housing 12 (refer to FIG. 7 ), and the self-locking component 50 is disposed on the bottom plate 122 .
  • part of the self-locking assembly 50 is disposed close to the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143 when the power is turned on.
  • the power-on condition of the self-locking assembly 50 can be determined according to whether the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively. For example, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the self-locking assembly 50 is not powered on.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 is powered on.
  • the first moving bracket 143 is in the target position.
  • the target position may be the focus position of the first moving bracket 143 , or may be a fixed position of the first moving bracket 143 when the camera module 100 does not start shooting.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 locks the first movable bracket 143 by applying pressure along the Y-axis direction to the first movable bracket 143 .
  • the structure and locking principle of the self-locking assembly 50 will be described in detail below with reference to the relevant drawings. I won't go into details here.
  • the first moving bracket 143 moves to the target position relative to the guide rail 141 , the first moving bracket 143 is locked by the self-locking component 50 , so that the stability of the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is better. , that is, the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is not easily moved due to external shaking or vibration, so that when the user takes a photo, the captured image is not easily deformed or blurred. In particular, when the user takes a photo during exercise, the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is also better.
  • the first moving bracket 143 when the first moving bracket 143 moved to the target position is locked, the first moving bracket 143 can not only avoid collision with other components in the camera module 100 , thereby reducing the impact risk of the first moving bracket 143 , and can Avoid forced vibration. It can be understood that forced vibration refers to the vibration that occurs under the action of periodic external forces.
  • part of the self-locking assembly 50 may also be disposed near the second moving bracket 144 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can be used to lock the second moving bracket 144 when energized.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can be used not only to lock the first moving bracket 143 under the condition of electrification, but also to lock the second moving bracket 144 under the condition of electrification.
  • FIG. 14 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 includes a first circuit board 51 , a connector 52 , a self-locking member 53 and a force applying member 54 .
  • the first circuit board 51 may be a rigid circuit board, a flexible circuit board, or a flexible-rigid circuit board.
  • the first circuit board 51 includes first pins 511 and second pins 512 arranged at intervals.
  • FIG. 15 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the first circuit board 51 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
  • the first circuit board 51 is located on the periphery of the bottom plate 122 .
  • a part of the first circuit board 51 is located between the substrate 13 and the second movable bracket 144 , that is, the first circuit board 51 and the second movable bracket 144 are arranged at intervals. At this time, the space between the substrate 13 and the second moving bracket 144 can be effectively utilized, thereby significantly improving the space utilization rate.
  • the end of the base plate 13 close to the bottom plate 122 is provided with a communication hole 134 .
  • the communication hole 134 communicates the side of the base plate 13 close to the second moving bracket 144 to the side of the base plate 13 far away from the second moving support 144 .
  • Part of the first circuit board 51 passes through the substrate 13 through the communication hole 134 and is electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 . In this way, the signal can be transmitted to the first circuit board 51 via the module circuit board 20 .
  • the connector 52 includes a fixing base 521 , a connecting member 522 and a conductive sheet 523 .
  • the material of the fixing seat 521 may be an insulating material.
  • the material of the fixing base 521 is plastic.
  • the fixing base 521 is fixed to the first circuit board 51 .
  • the fixing base 521 is partly fixed to the first circuit board 51 and partly fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
  • the material of the conductive sheet 523 is a conductive material.
  • the conductive sheet 523 is a steel sheet, an aluminum sheet or a copper sheet.
  • the conductive sheet 523 is fixed to the fixing base 521 through the connecting member 522 .
  • the connecting member 522 is a conductive post.
  • the fixing base 521 and the conductive sheet 523 are respectively provided with first through holes 524 .
  • the connecting member 522 passes through the first through hole 524 on the fixing base 521 and the conductive sheet 523 in sequence, and is fixed in the first through hole 524 .
  • the conductive sheet 523 is fixed to the fixing base 521 through the connecting member 522 .
  • the connector 522 may also be other fasteners, such as pins or screws.
  • the material of the connecting member 522 is a conductive material.
  • one end of the connecting member 522 passes through the through hole 524 of the fixing base 521 , one end of the connecting member 522 is electrically connected to the first pin 511 of the first circuit board 51 .
  • the connector 52 may also be a connector of other structures.
  • the connector can be electrically connected to the first pins 511 of the first circuit board 51 .
  • the specific embodiment is not limited.
  • FIG. 16 is an exploded schematic view of the self-locking member 53 shown in FIG. 14 .
  • the self-locking member 53 includes a base 531 , a rotating shaft 532 , a rotating member 533 , an elastic member 534 and a limiting block 535 .
  • the elastic member 534 can be a spring or an elastic sheet.
  • the elastic member 534 in this embodiment is described by taking a spring as an example.
  • the base 531 includes a fixing portion 5311 and a limiting portion 5312 .
  • the limiting portion 5312 is connected to one side of the fixing portion 5311 and located at the periphery of the fixing portion 5311 . At this time, the base 531 is roughly in a " ⁇ " shape.
  • the fixing portion 5311 and the limiting portion 5312 can be integrally formed.
  • FIG. 16 schematically distinguishes the fixing portion 5311 and the limiting portion 5312 by dotted lines.
  • the fixing portion 5311 defines a second through hole 5313 .
  • the second through holes 5313 penetrate through opposite surfaces of the fixing portion 5311 .
  • the second through holes 5313 are disposed opposite to the second pins 512 (refer to FIG. 14 ).
  • the base 531 and the connector 52 are arranged at intervals.
  • Part of the fixing part 5311 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 , and part of the fixing part 5311 is fixed to the first circuit board 51 . In other embodiments, all the fixing parts 5311 may be fixed to the first circuit board 51.
  • the base 531 and the first moving bracket 143 are arranged at intervals.
  • one end of the rotating shaft 532 passes through the second through hole 5313 of the fixing portion 5311 .
  • the rotating shaft 532 is fixedly connected to the hole wall of the second through hole 5313 . That is, one end of the rotating shaft 532 is fixed to the base 531 .
  • the material of the rotating shaft 532 is a conductive material. For example, copper, aluminum, silver, gold or aluminum alloy, etc.
  • the shaft 532 passing through the second through hole 5313 of the fixing portion 5311 is electrically connected to the second pin 512 (please refer to FIG. 14 ).
  • the rotating member 533 includes a middle portion 5331 , a first end portion 5332 and a second end portion 5333 .
  • the first end portion 5332 and the second end portion 5333 are respectively connected to two ends of the middle portion 5331 . Both the first end portion 5332 and the second end portion 5333 are bent toward the same side of the middle portion 5331 .
  • the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 is provided with two convex portions 5334 .
  • the protruding directions of the two protruding portions 5334 are opposite to the bending directions of the first end portion 5332 and the second end portion 5333 .
  • the number of protrusions 5334 may also be one, or more than two.
  • a third through hole 5335 is defined in each of the two protruding portions 5334 . The third through hole 5335 penetrates two opposite surfaces of the convex portion 5334 .
  • the other end of the rotating shaft 532 passes through the third through holes 5335 on the two convex portions 5334 in sequence, and rotates relative to the hole walls of the third through holes 5335 .
  • the rotating member 533 is rotatably connected to the fixing portion 5311 through the rotating shaft 532 .
  • the material of the rotating member 533 is a conductive material.
  • a conductive material For example, copper, aluminum, silver, gold or aluminum alloy, etc.
  • the rotating member 533 is electrically connected to the rotating shaft 532 .
  • one end of the elastic member 534 is fixed to the limiting portion 5312 of the base 531 , and the other end is fixed to the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the elastic member 534 is located on the side of the rotating member 533 away from the connector 52 .
  • the limiting block 535 is fixed on the side of the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 away from the elastic member 534 . At this time, the limiting block 535 is disposed opposite to the elastic member 534 .
  • the material of the limiting block 414 may be a polymer material.
  • thermoplastic polyurethane elastomer thermoplastic polyurethanes, TPU
  • thermoplastic elastomer thermoplastic elastomer
  • TPR thermoplastic rubber material
  • the material of the limiting block 414 may also be a metal material.
  • the limiting block 535 is fixed to the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 by tape or glue. In other embodiments, the limiting block 535 can also be integrally formed with the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
  • one end of the force applying member 54 is fixed to the conductive sheet 523 of the connector 52 , and the other end is fixed to the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 .
  • hooks are provided on the conductive sheet 523 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 .
  • both ends of the force applying member 54 are respectively fixed on the hooks on the conductive sheet 523 and the first end portion 5332 . In this way, the connection between the force applying member 54 and the conductive sheet 523 and the rotating member 533 is more stable.
  • the force applying member 54 is a shape memory alloy (SMA).
  • SMA shape memory alloy
  • a current path is formed between the first circuit board 51 , the connecting member 522 , the conductive sheet 523 , the force applying member 54 , the rotating shaft 532 and the rotating member 533 .
  • the current path refers to a loop through which current can be transmitted among the first circuit board 51 , the connecting member 522 , the conductive sheet 523 , the force applying member 54 , the rotating shaft 532 and the rotating member 533 .
  • the force-applying member 54 is used to exert a force on the rotating member 533 when the power is turned on.
  • the power-on state of the force applying member 54 can be determined according to whether the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively. For example, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the force applying member 54 is not energized. When the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively, the force applying member 54 is energized. In addition, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the first moving bracket 143 is in the target position.
  • the force applying member 54 when the force applying member 54 is energized, the current signal acts on the force applying member 54, and the force applying member 54 contracts. At this time, the urging member 54 generates a contraction force. In this way, the force applying member 54 in the retracted state can exert a force on the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the acting force is the contraction force generated when the force applying member 54 is energized.
  • the direction of the force is the negative direction of the Y axis.
  • the rotating member 533 rotates relative to the rotating shaft 532, the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 compresses the elastic member 534, and the rotating member 533 drives the limiting block 535 to rotate relative to the rotating member 533.
  • the shaft 532 rotates.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 has two states. One is the locked state. One is the unlocked state. The two states will be described in detail below with reference to the relevant drawings.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is an enlarged schematic view of part of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 17 at B.
  • the module circuit board 20 does not transmit a current signal to the first circuit board 51 , the force applying member 54 is not energized, the force applying member 54 does not shrink, and the force applying member 54 does not rotate.
  • the first end 5332 of the piece 533 exerts a pulling force.
  • the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 abuts against the limiting portion 5312 of the base 531 under the elastic force of the elastic member 534 .
  • the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 drives the limit block 535 to rotate under the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , so that the limit block 535 contacts the first moving bracket 143 , and the limit block 535 contacts the first moving bracket 143 Static friction can be generated between them.
  • the limiting block 535 exerts a pressure along the negative direction of the Y-axis on the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the locking state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scene where the camera module 100 is focused, or the camera module 100 is in a scene where no images or videos are taken.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in another state of the structure of the first embodiment.
  • the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first circuit board 51 .
  • a loop is formed between the rotating members 533 .
  • the force applying member 54 is energized, the force applying member 54 contracts.
  • the force-applying member 54 generates a contraction force. In this way, the force-applying member 54 in the retracted state can exert a pulling force on the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 , wherein the direction of the pulling force is the negative direction of the Y-axis.
  • the rotating member 533 When the tensile force on the first end portion 5332 is greater than the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 compresses the elastic member 534 , and the rotating member 533 rotates relative to the rotating shaft 532 . In this way, the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 is separated from the limiting portion 5312 of the base 531 . In addition, the rotating member 533 drives the limiting block 535 to rotate, so that the limiting block 535 is separated from the first moving bracket 143 . The first moving bracket 143 is in an unlocked state.
  • the unlocked state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scenario in which the camera module 100 starts focusing.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 of the first embodiment of the present embodiment is described in detail above. Several setting effects of the self-locking assembly 50 of this embodiment will be described below with reference to the above figures.
  • the direction of the force applied by the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 is the same as the direction of the pressure applied by the limiting block 535 to the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the force applying member 54 and the first moving bracket 143 are located on the same side of the rotating member 533 .
  • the extending direction of the force applying member 54 can have an overlapping area with the extending direction of the first moving bracket 143 in the Y-axis. In this way, when the length of the force applying member 54 is greatly increased, the force applying member 54 will not increase the length of the lens assembly 101 in the Y-axis direction.
  • the retracted length of the force-applying member 54 under power-on is also relatively large.
  • the distance between 535 and the first moving bracket 143 is also larger. In this way, when the first moving bracket 143 moves along the X-axis direction, it is not easy to interfere with the limiting block 535 .
  • the direction of the force applied by the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 and the direction of the pressure applied by the limiting block 535 to the first moving bracket 143 may also be different.
  • connection position of the limiting block 535 and the rotating member 533 is the first position.
  • the first position in this embodiment is located at the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the connection position of the force applying member 54 and the rotating member 533 (that is, the force applying position of the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 ) is the second position.
  • the second position in this embodiment is located at the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the rotational position of the rotating member 533 is between the first position and the second position.
  • the limit block 535 and the force applying member 54 are located on both sides of the rotating shaft 532, and the limit block 535 and the force applying member 54 are not easy to interfere with each other during movement, so as to ensure the reliability of the self-locking assembly 50.
  • the first position and the second position may also be located on the same side of the rotating member 533 .
  • the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 is rotatably connected to the base 531 through the rotating shaft 532 .
  • the force applying member 54 applies force to the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the limiting block 535 is still fixed to the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the elastic member 534 is located on the side of the rotating member 533 away from the limiting block 535 . At this time, the elastic member 534 is disposed away from the first moving bracket 143 . At this time, when the first moving bracket 143 moves along the X-axis direction, the elastic member 534 is not likely to interfere with the first moving bracket 143 , thereby ensuring the reliability of the self-locking assembly 50 .
  • the elastic member 534 is disposed opposite to the limiting block 535 . At this time, the elastic member 534 is disposed away from the force-applying member 54 . At this time, when the force applying member 54 exerts a pulling force on the rotating member 533 , the elastic member 534 is not likely to interfere with the force applying member 54 , thereby ensuring the reliability of the self-locking assembly 50 .
  • the elastic member 534 is located on the side of the rotating member 533 close to the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the elastic member 534 and the force applying member 54 may also be located on the same side of the rotational position of the rotating member 533 .
  • the rotating shaft 532 can not only be used to rotate the rotating member 533 relative to the base 531, but also can be used as a part of the current path.
  • the rotating shaft 532 has the effect of "multi-purpose for one thing".
  • the rotating member 533 can not only be used to drive the limiting block 535 to rotate, but also can be used as a part of the current path.
  • the rotating member 533 also has the effect of "multi-purpose”.
  • the distance between the first position and the rotational position of the rotating member 533 is the first distance.
  • the distance between the second position and the rotating position of the rotating member 533 is the second distance.
  • the first distance is greater than the second distance.
  • a photographing method of the camera module 100 will be introduced in conjunction with the structure of the camera module 100 (please refer to FIG. 1 to FIG. 19 ).
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of a photographing method of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 1 in the first embodiment.
  • the shooting method of the camera module 100 includes:
  • the S100 receives the shooting signal.
  • the shooting signal may be a signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 .
  • the shooting signal may also be a signal formed by the touch signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 and sent to the host circuit board 90 , where the chip on the host circuit board 90 processes the touch signal. .
  • the module circuit board 20 may be used to receive a shooting signal.
  • S200 controls the force applying member 54 to be energized, so that the force applying member 54 exerts a force on the rotating member 533 to drive the rotating member 533 to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , drive the limiting block 535 to rotate, and leave the first moving bracket 143 .
  • this embodiment is described by taking the self-locking assembly 50 for locking the first moving bracket 143 as an example.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can also be used for locking the second moving support 144 .
  • one set of self-locking components 50 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143
  • the other set is used to lock the second moving bracket 144 .
  • the force applying member 54 in this embodiment is an SMA.
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the force applying member 54 to energize.
  • the current signal acts on the force applying member 54, and the force applying member 54 contracts.
  • the force-applying member 54 generates a contraction force. In this way, the force-applying member 54 in the retracted state can exert a pulling force on the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the rotating member 533 overcomes the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 compresses the elastic member 534 , and the rotating member 533 rotates relative to the rotating shaft 532 .
  • the limiting block 535 also rotates relative to the rotating shaft 532 .
  • the limiting block 535 is separated from the first moving bracket 143 .
  • S300 controls the first moving bracket 143 to drive the first lens 151 to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 can drive the first lens 151 to move along the X axis positive direction or the X axis negative direction.
  • the moving distance of the first lens 151 can be set according to the user's focusing requirement.
  • the first coil 146 when the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 through the lens circuit board 16, the first coil 146 is energized, and the first magnet 145 can generate a negative force along the X-axis under the action of the first coil 146. direction of ampere force. At this time, the first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move in the negative direction of the X-axis under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the first moving bracket 143 can also move in the negative direction of the X-axis.
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the force applying member 54 to be powered off.
  • the force applying member 54 does not shrink, and the force applying member 54 does not exert a pulling force on the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 drives the limiting block 535 to rotate under the elastic force of the elastic member 534, so that the limiting block 535 contacts the first moving bracket 143, limiting the Static frictional force is generated between the position block 535 and the first moving bracket 143 . In this way, the limiting block 535 can press the first moving bracket 143 .
  • S500 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to convert optical signals into electrical signals and output them.
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to collect ambient light passing through the optical lens 10 .
  • the collected ambient light is converted into electrical signals, and the electrical signals are output to the host circuit board 90 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is locked by the self-locking component 50, so that the stability of the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is better, that is, the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is better
  • the lens 151 is not easily moved due to external shaking or vibration, so that when the user is taking a photo, the captured image is not easily deformed or blurred. In particular, when the user takes a photo during exercise, the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is also better.
  • the method further includes:
  • the Hall sensor 171 detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet 172 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
  • the lens circuit board 16 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 .
  • the first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move relative to the guide rail 141 along the positive X-axis direction or the negative X-axis direction under the ampere force. At this time, it is easy for the first moving bracket 143 not to move to the target position.
  • the Hall sensor 171 is used to detect the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet 172, and it is determined whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position.
  • the Hall sensor 171 feeds back to the module circuit board 20 through the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the module circuit board 20 can provide the compensation current signal to the first coil 146 , so that the first moving bracket 143 is moved to the target position. In this way, the focusing accuracy of the camera module 100 can be improved by the Hall sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 , so that the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is better.
  • a lens assembly 101 is introduced in detail above. Hereinafter, another setting manner of the lens assembly 101 will be described in detail with reference to the related drawings.
  • FIG. 21 is a partially exploded schematic view of another embodiment of the lens assembly 101 shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the lens assembly 101 includes a housing 12 , a motor 14 , a lens 15 , a lens circuit board 16 , a hall sensor 171 , a detection magnet 172 and a self-locking assembly 50 .
  • the arrangement of the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 171 , and the detection magnet 172 may refer to the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 172 in the first embodiment.
  • the arrangement of the sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 I won't go into details here.
  • FIG. 22 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in the second embodiment.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 is disposed close to the first moving bracket 143 , and a part of the self-locking assembly 50 is located between the first moving bracket 143 and the bottom plate 122 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143 when the power is turned on.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 locks the first movable bracket 143 by applying pressure along the Z-axis direction to the first movable bracket 143 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 of this embodiment can effectively utilize the space between the first moving bracket 143 and the bottom plate 122 , The space utilization of the lens assembly 101 is improved.
  • part of the self-locking assembly 50 may also be disposed near the second moving bracket 144 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can be used to lock the second moving bracket 144 when energized.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can be used not only to lock the first moving bracket 143 under the condition of electrification, but also to lock the second moving bracket 144 under the condition of electrification.
  • FIG. 23 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 22 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 includes a first circuit board 51 , a self-locking member 53 and a force applying member 54 .
  • the arrangement of the first circuit board 51 may refer to the arrangement of the first circuit board 51 in the first embodiment. I won't go into details here. Different from the first circuit board 51 of the first embodiment, the size of the first circuit board 51 of the present embodiment in the Y-axis direction is short.
  • the first pins 511 and the second pins 512 of the first circuit board 51 may be disposed close to each other. Of course, in other embodiments, the first pin 511 and the second pin 512 may also be provided separately.
  • FIG. 24 is an exploded schematic view of the self-locking member 53 shown in FIG. 23 .
  • the self-locking member 53 includes a base 531 , a rotating shaft 532 , a rotating member 533 , an elastic member 534 and a limiting block 535 .
  • the base 531 includes a first fixing portion 5311 , a connecting portion 5312 and a second fixing portion 5313 .
  • the connecting portion 5312 is located on one side of the first fixing portion 5311 and connected to the periphery of the first fixing portion 5311 .
  • the second fixing portion 5313 is connected to the side of the connecting portion 5312 away from the first fixing portion 5311 .
  • the second fixing portion 5313 is disposed opposite to the first fixing portion 5311 .
  • part of the connecting portion 5312 is connected between the first fixing portion 5311 and the second fixing portion 5313 .
  • the first fixing portion 5311 , the connecting portion 5312 and the second fixing portion 5313 are integrally formed.
  • FIG. 24 schematically distinguishes the first fixing part 5311 , the connecting part 5312 and the second fixing part 5313 by dotted lines.
  • the first fixing portion 5311 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
  • the base 531 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
  • the base 531 is spaced apart from the first moving bracket 143 .
  • some of the first fixing parts 5311 are fixed to the first circuit board 51
  • some of the first fixing parts 5311 are fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
  • the connecting portion 5312 defines a first through hole 5314 .
  • the first through holes 5314 penetrate through opposite surfaces of the connecting portion 5312 .
  • the rotating shaft 532 includes a main shaft 5321 and a collar 5322 .
  • the radius of the collar 5322 is larger than the radius of the main shaft 5321 .
  • one end of the main shaft 5321 passes through the first through hole 5314 of the connecting portion 5312 .
  • the main shaft 5321 is fixedly connected to the hole wall of the first through hole 5314 .
  • the collar 5322 is sleeved on the main shaft 5321 .
  • the collar 5322 is rotatably connected to the main shaft 5321 .
  • the rotating member 533 includes a middle portion 5331 , a first end portion 5332 and a second end portion 5333 .
  • the first end portion 5332 and the second end portion 5333 are respectively connected to two ends of the middle portion 5331 .
  • the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 is arc-shaped.
  • the shape of the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 is adapted to the shape of the outer surface of the collar 5322 .
  • the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 may also have other shapes.
  • the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 is fixed to the collar 5322 .
  • the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 can rotate as the collar 5322 rotates relative to the main shaft 5321 .
  • the rotating member 533 is rotatably connected to the base 531 through the rotating shaft 532 .
  • the first end 5332 and the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 are located on both sides of the collar 5322 .
  • the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 is located on the side of the second fixing portion 5313 away from the first fixing portion 5311 .
  • the material of the rotating member 533 is a magnetic material.
  • the rotating member 533 is a magnet or a magnetic steel.
  • one end of the elastic member 534 is fixed to the first fixing portion 5311 of the base 531 , and the other end is fixed to the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the elastic member 534 can be a spring or an elastic sheet.
  • the elastic member 534 in this embodiment is a spring as an example.
  • the limiting block 535 is fixed to a side of the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 away from the second fixing portion 5313 .
  • the limiting block 535 is located between the rotating member 533 and the first moving bracket 143 (please refer to FIG. 22 ).
  • FIG. 25 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 22 .
  • the force applying member 54 includes a magnetic member 541 and a coil 542 wound on the surface of the magnetic member 541 .
  • both the first fixing portion 5311 and the second fixing portion 5313 of the base 531 are provided with a second through hole 5315 .
  • One end of the magnetic member 541 passes through the second through hole 5315 of the first fixing portion 5311 and is fixedly connected to the hole wall of the second through hole 5315 .
  • the other end of the magnetic member 541 passes through the second through hole 5315 of the second fixing portion 5313 and faces the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 . In this way, the connection stability between the magnetic member 541 and the base 531 is better.
  • the coil 542 is located between the first fixing portion 5311 and the second fixing portion 5313 .
  • the input end of the coil 542 is electrically connected to the first pin 511 of the first circuit board 51 .
  • the output end of the coil 542 is electrically connected to the second pin 512 of the first circuit board 51 .
  • the first circuit board 51 and the coil 542 form a current path.
  • the force applying member 54 is used for applying force to the rotating member 533 when the coil 542 is energized.
  • the energization condition of the coil 542 can be determined according to whether the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively. For example, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the coil 542 is not energized. When the first moving bracket 143 relatively moves, the coil 542 is energized. In addition, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the first moving bracket 143 is in the target position.
  • the current signal acts on the coil 542, and the coil 542 generates a magnetic field.
  • the material of the rotating member 533 is a magnetic material, a magnetic attraction force is generated between the force applying member 54 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the force applying member 54 is used for applying force to the rotating member 533 when the power is turned on.
  • the acting force is the magnetic attraction force between the force applying member 54 and the rotating member 533 .
  • the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 stretches the elastic member 534, and the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 follows the elastic force of the elastic member 534.
  • the collar 5322 rotates relative to the main shaft 5321.
  • the limiting block 535 fixed to the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 also rotates relative to the main shaft 5321 along with the collar 5322 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 has two states. One is the locked state. One is the unlocked state. The two states will be described in detail below with reference to the relevant drawings.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 27 is an enlarged schematic view of part of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 26 at C.
  • the module circuit board 20 does not transmit a current signal to the first circuit board 51 and the coil 542 is not energized.
  • the elastic member 534 since the elastic member 534 is in a stretched state, the elastic member 534 applies an elastic force along the negative direction of the Z-axis to the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the limiting block 535 is in contact with the first moving bracket 143 under the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , and a static friction force is generated between the limiting block 535 and the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the limiting block 535 exerts a pressure along the positive direction of the Z-axis on the first moving bracket 143 .
  • a static friction force is generated between the limiting block 535 and the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the static friction force can prevent the first moving bracket 143 from sliding along the X-axis direction. In this way, the first moving bracket 143 is locked by the self-locking assembly 50 .
  • the locking state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scene where the camera module 100 is focused, or the camera module 100 is in a scene where no images or videos are taken.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the second embodiment.
  • the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first circuit board 51 , the coil 542 is energized, and the coil 542 generates a magnetic field.
  • the material of the rotating member 533 is a magnetic material, a magnetic attraction force is generated between the force applying member 54 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 is subjected to a pulling force along the negative direction of the Z-axis.
  • the elastic member 534 since the elastic member 534 is in a stretched state, the elastic member 534 exerts a pulling force along the negative direction of the Z axis on the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 receives an elastic force along the positive direction of the Z-axis. It can be understood that when the magnetic attraction force between the force applying member 54 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 is greater than the elastic force of the elastic member 534, the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 stretches the elastic member 534, and the rotating member The middle portion 5331 of 533 rotates as the collar 5322 rotates relative to the main shaft 5321 .
  • the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 is rotated to contact the magnetic member 541 .
  • the rotating member 533 drives the limiting block 535 to rotate, so that the limiting block 535 is separated from the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is in an unlocked state.
  • the unlocked state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scenario in which the camera module 100 starts focusing.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 of the second embodiment of the present embodiment is described in detail above. Several setting effects of the self-locking assembly 50 of this embodiment will be described below with reference to the above figures.
  • the direction of the force applied by the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 is opposite to the direction of the pressure applied by the limiting block 535 to the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the force applying member 54 and the first moving bracket 143 are located on different sides of the rotating member 533 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 moves along the X-axis direction
  • the first moving bracket 143 is less likely to interfere with the force applying member 54 .
  • the magnetic field generated by the force-applying member 54 cannot easily affect the movement of the first moving bracket 143 along the X-axis direction.
  • the direction of the force applied by the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 is the same as the direction of the pressure applied by the limiting block 535 to the first moving bracket 143 .
  • connection position of the limiting block 535 and the rotating member 533 is the first position.
  • the first position in this embodiment is located at the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the connection position of the force applying member 54 and the rotating member 533 (that is, the force applying position of the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 ) is the second position.
  • the second position of this embodiment is also located at the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . Both the first position and the second position are located on the same side of the rotating position of the rotating member 533 .
  • the structure of the self-locking assembly 50 is relatively compact.
  • the force-applying distance of the force-applying member 54 to the limiting block 535 is relatively short.
  • first position and the second position may also be located on different sides of the rotating member 533 .
  • first position is at the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the second position is located at the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the elastic member 534 and the force applying member 54 are located on the same side of the rotating member 533 . At this time, when the first moving bracket 143 is moving, the elastic member 534 is not likely to collide with or interfere with each other with the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the elastic member 534 and the force-applying member 54 are located on both sides of the rotating position of the rotating member 533 . At this time, when the urging member 54 urges the rotating member 533 , the elastic member 534 and the urging member 54 cannot easily interfere with each other.
  • the elastic member 534 is located on the side of the rotating member 533 close to the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the elastic member 534 and the force applying member 54 may also be located on the same side of the rotation position of the rotating member 533 .
  • a photographing method of the camera module 100 will be introduced in conjunction with the structure of the camera module 100 (please refer to FIG. 21 to FIG. 28 ).
  • the shooting method of the camera module 100 includes;
  • the shooting signal may be a signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 .
  • the shooting signal may also be a signal formed by the touch signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 and sent to the host circuit board 90 , where the chip on the host circuit board 90 processes the touch signal. .
  • the module circuit board 20 may be used to receive a shooting signal.
  • the force applying member 54 is controlled to be energized, so that the force applying member 54 exerts a force on the rotating member 533 to drive the rotating member 533 to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , drive the limiting block 535 to rotate, and leave the first moving bracket 143 .
  • this embodiment is described by taking the self-locking assembly 50 for locking the first moving bracket 143 as an example.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can also be used for locking the second moving support 144 .
  • one set of self-locking components 50 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143
  • the other set is used to lock the second moving bracket 144 .
  • the force applying member 54 includes a magnetic member 541 and a coil 542 wound on the surface of the magnetic member 541 .
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the coil 542 to energize.
  • the coil 542 generates a magnetic field. Since the material of the rotating member 533 is a magnetic material, a magnetic attraction force is generated between the force applying member 54 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 is subjected to a pulling force along the negative direction of the Z-axis.
  • the elastic member 534 since the elastic member 534 is in a stretched state, the elastic member 534 exerts a pulling force along the negative direction of the Z axis on the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 receives an elastic force along the positive direction of the Z-axis. It can be understood that when the magnetic attraction force between the force applying member 54 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 is greater than the elastic force of the elastic member 534, the rotating member 533 overcomes the elastic force of the elastic member 534, and the second end of the rotating member 533 overcomes the elastic force of the elastic member 534.
  • the portion 5333 stretches the elastic member 534, and the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 rotates as the collar 5322 rotates relative to the main shaft 5321. At this time, the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 is rotated to contact the magnetic member 541 . In this way, the rotating member 533 drives the limiting block 535 to rotate, so that the limiting block 535 is separated from the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move along the direction of the optical axis of the optical lens 10 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 can drive the first lens 151 to move along the X axis positive direction or the X axis negative direction.
  • the moving distance of the first lens 151 can be set according to the user's focusing requirement.
  • the first coil 146 when the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 through the lens circuit board 16, the first coil 146 is energized, and the first magnet 145 can generate a negative force along the X-axis under the action of the first coil 146. direction of ampere force. At this time, the first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move in the negative direction of the X-axis under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the first moving bracket 143 can also move in the negative direction of the X-axis.
  • the control force application member 54 When the first moving bracket 143 moves to the target position, the control force application member 54 is powered off, and the rotating member 533 drives the limit block 535 to rotate under the elastic force of the elastic member 534, so that the limit block 535 presses the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the coil 542 to power off. At this time, the coil 542 is not energized. Coil 542 produces no magnetic field.
  • the elastic member 534 since the elastic member 534 is in a stretched state, the elastic member 534 applies an elastic force along the negative direction of the Z-axis to the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
  • the limiting block 535 is in contact with the first moving bracket 143 under the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , and a static friction force is generated between the limiting block 535 and the first moving bracket 143 . In this way, the limiting block 535 can press the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the photosensitive chip 30 is controlled to convert the optical signal into an electrical signal and output it.
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to collect ambient light passing through the optical lens 10 .
  • the collected ambient light is converted into electrical signals, and the electrical signals are output to the host circuit board 90 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is locked by the self-locking component 50, so that the stability of the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is better, that is, the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is better
  • the lens 151 is not easily moved due to external shaking or vibration, so that when the user is taking a photo, the captured image is not easily deformed or blurred. In particular, when the user takes a photo during exercise, the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is also better.
  • the second moving bracket 144 may also be provided with a self-locking assembly 50 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can also perform the above steps on the second moving bracket 144 . The details are not repeated here.
  • the method further includes:
  • the Hall sensor 171 detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet 172 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
  • the focusing accuracy of the camera module 100 can be improved by the Hall sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 , so that the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is better.
  • FIG. 29 is another embodiment of the lens assembly 101 shown in FIG. 6 . Partially exploded schematic diagram of .
  • the lens assembly 101 includes a housing 12 , a motor 14 , a lens 15 , a lens circuit board 16 , a hall sensor 171 , a detection magnet 172 and a self-locking assembly 50 .
  • the arrangement of the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 171 , and the detection magnet 172 may refer to the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 172 in the first embodiment.
  • the arrangement of the sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 I won't go into details here.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in the third embodiment.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 is disposed adjacent to the second moving bracket 144 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 is used to lock the second moving bracket 144 when the power is turned on.
  • the power-on condition of the self-locking assembly 50 can be determined according to whether the second moving bracket 144 moves relatively. For example, when the second moving bracket 144 is not relatively moved, the self-locking assembly 50 is not powered. When the second moving bracket 144 moves relatively, the self-locking assembly 50 is powered on.
  • the second moving bracket 144 is in a fixed position. The fixed position is a position of the second moving bracket 144 when the camera module 100 does not start shooting.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 is used to lock the fourth part 1442 of the second moving bracket 144 under the condition of electrification. It can be understood that, compared with the self-locking assembly 50 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 of this embodiment locks the second moving bracket 144 in a fixed position. The location can be flexibly set according to needs.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can also be used to lock the third portion 1441 of the second moving bracket 144 when powered on.
  • part of the self-locking assembly 50 may also be disposed near the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can be used to lock the first moving bracket 143 when the power is turned on.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can be used not only to lock the first moving bracket 143 under the condition of electrification, but also to lock the second moving bracket 144 under the condition of electrification.
  • FIG. 31 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 30 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 includes a first circuit board 51 , a first fastener 52 and a second fastener 53 .
  • the arrangement of the first circuit board 51 may refer to the arrangement of the first circuit board 51 in the second embodiment. I won't go into details here.
  • the first circuit board 51 includes a first lead 511 and a second lead 512 .
  • the first fastener 52 is a plate-like structure.
  • the first fastener 52 defines a first through hole 521 .
  • the first through hole 521 penetrates through two opposite surfaces of the first clip 52 .
  • part of the first fastener 52 is fixed to the fourth part 1442 of the second moving bracket 144 , and part of the first fastener 52 protrudes toward the substrate 13 .
  • the first snap member 52 can be fixed to the fourth portion 1442 of the second moving bracket 144 by glue or adhesive tape.
  • the first snap member 52 may also be integrally formed with the fourth portion 1442 of the second moving bracket 144 .
  • FIG. 32 is a partially exploded schematic view of the second fastener 53 shown in FIG. 30 .
  • the second latching member 53 includes a base 531 , a force applying member 532 , an elastic member 533 , a sliding block 534 and a limiting block 535 .
  • the elastic member 533 may be a spring or an elastic sheet.
  • the elastic member 533 in this embodiment is a spring as an example.
  • the base 531 includes a fixing portion 5311 , a connecting portion 5312 , a first limiting portion 5313 and a second limiting portion 5314 .
  • the connecting portion 5312 is located on one side of the fixing portion 5311 and is connected to the periphery of the fixing portion 5311 .
  • the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 are both connected to the connecting portion 5312 .
  • the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 and the fixing portion 5311 are located on the same side of the connecting portion 5312 .
  • the first limiting portion 5313 is disposed opposite to the second limiting portion 5314 .
  • the fixing portion 5311 , the connecting portion 5312 , the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 are integrally formed.
  • FIG. 32 schematically distinguishes the fixing portion 5311 , the connecting portion 5312 , the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 by dotted lines.
  • the fixing portion 5311 , the connecting portion 5312 , the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 may also be bonded by adhesive tape or glue.
  • the connecting portion 5312 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
  • the base 531 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
  • some of the connecting portions 5312 are fixed to the first circuit board 51
  • some of the connecting portions 5312 are fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
  • the fixing portion 5311 defines a second through hole 5315 .
  • the second through holes 5315 penetrate through opposite surfaces of the fixing portion 5311 .
  • the force applying member 532 includes a magnetic member 5321 and a coil 5322 wound on the surface of the magnetic member 5321 .
  • FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the second fastener 53 shown in FIG. 31 .
  • One end of the magnetic member 5321 passes through the second through hole 5315 of the fixing portion 5311 (please refer to FIG. 32 ), and is fixedly connected to the hole wall of the second through hole 5315 .
  • the coil 5322 is located on the side of the fixing portion 5311 close to the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 .
  • the input end of the coil 5322 is electrically connected to the first pin 511 of the first circuit board 51 .
  • the output end of the coil 5322 is electrically connected to the second pin 512 of the first circuit board 51 .
  • the first circuit board 51 and the coil 5322 form a current path.
  • FIG. 34 is a partial structural diagram of the second fastener 53 shown in FIG. 31 .
  • the elastic member 533 sets the force member 532 , that is, the force application member 532 is located inside the elastic member 533 .
  • the force-applying member 532 can effectively utilize the inner space of the elastic member 533 to improve the space utilization rate of the self-locking assembly 50 .
  • one end of the elastic member 533 is fixed to the fixing portion 5311 of the base 531 .
  • the elastic member 533 is located on the side of the first locking member 52 away from the second moving bracket 144 (please refer to FIG. 30 ).
  • the elastic member 533 is not provided with the force member 532 , and the elastic member 533 and the force application member 532 are arranged at intervals.
  • the sliding block 534 is fixed to the end of the elastic member 533 away from the fixing portion 5311 . At this time, one end of the magnetic member 5321 faces the sliding block 534 .
  • the sliding block 534 is slidably connected between the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 .
  • the material of the sliding block 534 is a magnetic material.
  • the sliding block 534 is a magnet or magnetic steel.
  • the limiting block 535 is connected to a side of the sliding block 534 away from the elastic member 533 . At this time, the limiting block 535 is located between the elastic member 533 and the first moving bracket 143 (please refer to FIG. 30 ).
  • the material of the limiting block 535 may be different from the material of the sliding block 534, or may be the same. For example, when the material of the limiting block 535 is different from the material of the sliding block 534, the material of the limiting block 535 can refer to the material of the limiting block 535 of the first embodiment.
  • the limiting block 535 is fixed to the side of the sliding block 534 away from the elastic member 533 by glue or tape.
  • the sliding block 534 and the limiting block 535 may also be integrally formed.
  • the limiting block 535 is used to lock the second moving bracket 144 when the coil 5322 is powered on.
  • the energization of the coil 5322 can be determined according to whether the second moving bracket 144 is relatively moved. For example, when the second moving bracket 144 is not relatively moving, the coil 5322 is not energized. When the second moving bracket 144 is relatively moved, the coil 5322 is energized. In addition, when the second moving bracket 144 is not relatively moved, the second moving bracket 144 is in the target position.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 has two states. One is the locked state. One is the unlocked state. The two states will be described in detail below with reference to the relevant drawings.
  • FIG. 35 is an enlarged schematic view of part of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 30 at D.
  • the module circuit board 20 does not transmit electrical signals to the first circuit board 51 .
  • the coil 5322 is not energized (see Figure 33). Coil 5322 produces no magnetic field.
  • the elastic member 533 since the elastic member 533 is in a compressed state, the elastic member 533 applies an elastic force along the negative direction of the Y-axis to the sliding block 534 . At this time, the sliding block 534 is squeezed between the elastic member 533 and the top of the first limiting portion 5313 and the top of the second limiting portion 5314 .
  • part of the limiting block 535 is located in the first through hole 521 of the first locking member 52 . Since the hole wall of the first through hole 521 can limit the movement of the limiting block 535, the second moving bracket 144 is in a locked state.
  • the stability of the limiting block 535 can be improved, that is, the limiting block 535 is not easily removed from the first through hole 521.
  • a latch 52 is moved out of the first through hole 521 .
  • the locking state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scene where the camera module 100 is not in use.
  • the elastic member 533 may also be in a natural state. At this time, part of the limiting block 535 may also be located in the first through hole 521 of the first clip 52 .
  • FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the third embodiment.
  • the module circuit board 20 transmits electrical signals to the first circuit board 51 , the coil 5322 (refer to FIG. 33 ) is energized, and the coil 5322 generates a magnetic field.
  • the material of the sliding block 534 is a magnetic material, a magnetic attraction force is generated between the force applying member 532 and the sliding block 534 .
  • the sliding block 534 is subjected to the force exerted by the force applying member 532 , and the force is the magnetic attraction force between the force applying member 532 and the sliding block 534 .
  • the elastic member 533 since the elastic member 533 is in a compressed state, the elastic member 533 applies an elastic force along the negative direction of the Y-axis to the sliding block 534 .
  • the magnetic attraction force of the sliding block 534 is greater than the elastic force of the sliding block 534 along the negative direction of the Y-axis, the sliding block 534 will be in the positive direction of the Y-axis relative to the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 under the action of the pulling force. slide.
  • the limiting block 535 overcomes the elastic force of the elastic member 533 and moves out of the first through hole 521 of the first locking member 52 .
  • the second moving bracket 144 is in an unlocked state.
  • the unlocked state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to the scenario in which the camera module 100 starts to be used.
  • the structure of the second latching member 53 of the present embodiment may also adopt the structure composed of the connector 52 , the self-locking member 53 and the force-applying member 54 of the first embodiment.
  • the structure of the second latching member 53 of the present embodiment may also adopt the structure composed of the self-locking member 53 and the force applying member 54 of the second embodiment.
  • the structure constituted by the connector 52 , the self-locking member 53 and the force applying member 54 in the first embodiment may also adopt the structure of the second latching member 53 in this embodiment.
  • the structure formed by the self-locking member 53 and the force-applying member 54 of the second embodiment may also adopt the structure of the second locking member 53 of the present embodiment.
  • FIGS. 1 to 12 and FIGS. 29 to 36 The structure of a camera module 100 is described in detail above. Hereinafter, another photographing method of the camera module 100 will be described in conjunction with the structure of the camera module 100 (please refer to FIGS. 1 to 12 and FIGS. 29 to 36 ).
  • FIG. 37 is a schematic flowchart of a photographing method of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 1 in the third embodiment.
  • the shooting method of the camera module 100 includes:
  • the S100 receives the shooting signal.
  • the shooting signal may be a signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 .
  • the shooting signal may also be a signal formed by the touch signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 and sent to the host circuit board 90 , where the chip on the host circuit board 90 processes the touch signal. .
  • the module circuit board 20 may be used to receive a shooting signal.
  • S200 controls the force application member 532 to be energized, so that the force application member 532 applies a force to the limit block 535 to drive the limit block 535 to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member 533 and move out of the first through hole 521 .
  • the force applying member 532 includes a magnetic member 5321 and a coil 5322 wound on the surface of the magnetic member 5321 .
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the coil 5322 to energize.
  • Coil 5322 generates a magnetic field.
  • the material of the sliding block 534 is a magnetic material, a magnetic attraction force is generated between the force applying member 532 and the sliding block 534 .
  • the sliding block 534 is pulled along the positive direction of the Y-axis.
  • the elastic member 533 since the elastic member 533 is in a compressed state, the elastic member 533 applies an elastic force along the negative direction of the Y-axis to the sliding block 534 .
  • the sliding block 534 When the pulling force of the sliding block 534 in the positive direction of the Y-axis is greater than the elastic force of the sliding block 534 in the negative direction of the Y-axis, under the action of the pulling force, the sliding block 534 is relatively opposite to the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 along the Sliding in the positive direction of the Y-axis. Under the pulling force of the sliding block 534 , the limiting block 535 overcomes the elastic force of the elastic member 533 and moves out of the first through hole 521 of the first locking member 52 .
  • S300 controls the second moving bracket 144 to drive the first lens 151 to move from the fixed position to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
  • the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the second coil 148 through the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the second coil 148 is energized, and the second magnet 147 can generate an ampere force in the negative direction of the X-axis.
  • the second magnet 147 pushes the second moving bracket 144 to move in the negative direction of the X-axis under the ampere force.
  • the first lens 151 fixed to the second moving bracket 144 can also move in the negative direction of the X-axis.
  • the fixed position refers to a position of the second moving bracket 144 within the moving range.
  • the location can be flexibly set according to needs.
  • the target position refers to any position of the second moving bracket 144 within the moving stroke range.
  • S400 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to convert optical signals into electrical signals and output them.
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to collect ambient light passing through the optical lens 10 .
  • the collected ambient light is converted into electrical signals, and the electrical signals are output to the host circuit board 90 .
  • S500 controls the second moving bracket 144 to drive the first lens 151 to move from the target position to the fixed position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
  • the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the second coil 148 through the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the second coil 148 When the second coil 148 is energized, the second magnet 147 can generate an ampere force along the positive direction of the X-axis. At this time, the second magnet 147 pushes the second moving bracket 144 to move in the positive direction of the X-axis under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the second moving bracket 144 can also move in the positive direction of the X-axis.
  • the second magnet 147 can generate electricity along the X axis. Ampere force in the positive direction. At this time, the second magnet 147 can push the second moving bracket 144 to move in the positive direction of the X-axis under the ampere force.
  • S600 controls the power of the force-applying member 532 to be powered off, and part of the limiting block 535 extends into the first through hole 521 under the elastic force of the elastic member 533 .
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the coil 5322 to be powered off. At this time, the coil 5322 is not energized. Coil 5322 produces no magnetic field. Since the elastic member 533 is in a compressed state, the elastic member 533 exerts an elastic force along the negative direction of the Y-axis on the sliding block 534 . At this time, the sliding block 534 is squeezed between the elastic member 533 and the top of the first limiting portion 5313 and the top of the second limiting portion 5314 . In this way, the limiting block 535 extends into the first through hole 521 of the first latching member 52 under the supporting force of the sliding block 534 . In this way, the hole wall of the first through hole 521 can limit the movement of the limiting block 535 .
  • the method further includes:
  • the Hall sensor 171 detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet 172 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
  • the Hall sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 can improve the shooting accuracy of the camera module 100 , so that the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is better.
  • FIG. 38 is another embodiment of the lens assembly 101 shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the lens assembly 101 includes a housing 12 , a motor 14 , a lens 15 , a lens circuit board 16 , a hall sensor 171 , a detection magnet 172 and a self-locking assembly 50 .
  • the arrangement of the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 171 , and the detection magnet 172 may refer to the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 172 in the first embodiment.
  • the arrangement of the sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 I won't go into details here.
  • FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in the fourth embodiment.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 is disposed close to the first moving bracket 143 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143 when the power is turned on.
  • the power-on condition of the self-locking assembly 50 can be determined according to whether the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively. For example, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the self-locking assembly 50 is not powered on. When the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively, the self-locking assembly 50 is powered on. In addition, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the first moving bracket 143 is in a fixed position. The fixed position is a position of the first moving bracket 143 when the camera module 100 does not start shooting.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 is used for locking the first moving support 143 when the first moving support 143 moves to a fixed position relative to the guide rail 141 . It can be understood that, like the third embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 of this embodiment locks the first moving bracket 143 in a fixed position.
  • the fixed position refers to a position of the first moving bracket 143 within the moving stroke range. The location can be flexibly set according to needs.
  • part of the self-locking assembly 50 may also be disposed near the second moving bracket 144 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 can be used to lock the second moving bracket 144 when the second moving bracket 144 moves to a fixed position.
  • a set is disposed close to the first moving bracket 143 for locking the first moving bracket 143 when the first moving bracket 143 moves to a fixed position relative to the guide rail 141 .
  • Another set is disposed close to the second moving bracket 144 for locking the second moving bracket 144 when the second moving bracket 144 moves to a fixed position.
  • FIG. 40 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 39 .
  • the self-locking assembly 50 includes a first circuit board 51 , a first fastener 52 and a second fastener 53 .
  • the arrangement of the first circuit board 51 may refer to the arrangement of the first circuit board 51 in the first embodiment. I won't go into details here.
  • the first circuit board 51 includes first pins 511 and second pins 512 .
  • the first fastener 52 is a plate-like structure.
  • the first fastener 52 defines a first through hole 521 .
  • the first through hole 521 penetrates through two opposite surfaces of the first clip 52 .
  • a part of the first latching member 52 is fixed to the first moving bracket 143 .
  • FIG. 41 is a partially exploded schematic view of the second fastener 53 shown in FIG. 40 .
  • the second latching member 53 includes an elastic member 531 , a force applying member 532 and a limiting block 533 .
  • the elastic member 531 in this embodiment is described by taking an elastic piece as an example.
  • the elastic member 531 includes a first fixing portion 5311 , a connecting portion 5312 and a second fixing portion 5313 .
  • the connecting portion 5312 is connected between the first fixing portion 5311 and the second fixing portion 5313 .
  • the second fixing portion 5313 is disposed opposite to the first fixing portion 5311 .
  • the elastic member 531 is approximately in a "C" shape.
  • the connecting portion 5312 is arc-shaped.
  • the elasticity of the elastic member 531 is better.
  • the connecting portion 5312 may also be in the shape of a bar or other shapes.
  • the materials of the connecting portion 5312 and the second fixing portion 5313 are both conductive materials.
  • the first fixing portion 5311 includes a first conductive segment 5314 , an insulating segment 5315 and a second conductive segment 5316 .
  • One end of the insulating segment 5315 is connected to the first conductive segment 5314 , and the other end is connected to the second conductive segment 5316 .
  • the second conductive segment 5316 is connected to the connecting portion 5312 .
  • the insulating segment 5315 is located on the same side of the first conductive segment 5314 and the second conductive segment 5316 . In other embodiments, the insulating segment 5315 may also be located between the first conductive segment 5314 and the second conductive segment 5316 .
  • FIG. 42 is a partial structural diagram of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 39 .
  • the first fixing portion 5311 of the elastic member 531 is fixed to the first circuit board 51 .
  • the elastic member 531 is located on the side of the first locking member 52 (refer to FIG. 39 ) away from the first moving bracket 143 (refer to FIG. 39 ).
  • the limiting block 533 is fixed to the side of the second fixing portion 5313 away from the first fixing portion 5311 . At this time, the limiting block 533 is located between the first moving bracket 143 and the second fixing portion 5313 of the elastic member 531 .
  • the material of the limiting block 533 may be the same as that of the second fixing portion 5313, or may be different. When the material of the limiting block 533 is different from the material of the second fixing portion 5313 , the material of the limiting block 533 can also be the material of the limiting block 535 of the first embodiment.
  • the limiting block 533 is fixed to the side of the second fixing portion 5313 away from the first fixing portion 5311 by glue or tape.
  • the limiting block 533 and the second fixing portion 5313 may also be integrally formed.
  • first conductive segment 5314 is electrically connected to the first pin 511 of the first circuit board 51 .
  • the second conductive segment 5316 is electrically connected to the second pin 512 of the first circuit board 51 .
  • the biasing member 532 is SMA. One end of the force applying member 532 is connected to the first conductive segment 5314 , and the other end is connected to the second fixing portion 5313 . In this way, the first circuit board 51 , the first conductive segment 5314 , the force applying member 532 , the second fixing portion 5313 , the connecting portion 5312 and the second conductive segment 5316 form a current path.
  • the limiting block 533 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143 when the force applying member 532 is powered on.
  • the energization of the force-applying member 532 can be determined according to whether the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively. For example, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the force applying member 532 is not powered on. When the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively, the force applying member 532 is energized. In addition, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the first moving bracket 143 is in a fixed position.
  • the force applying member 532 contracts. At this time, the force applying member 532 generates a contraction force. In this way, the urging member 532 in the contracted state can apply a pulling force to the second fixing portion 5313 .
  • the pulling force received by the second fixing portion 5313 is greater than the elastic force of the connecting portion 5312, the connecting portion 5312 is bent. In this way, the second fixing portion 5313 drives the limiting block 533 to move.
  • the self-locking assembly 50 has two states. One is the locked state. One is the unlocked state. The two states will be described in detail below with reference to the relevant drawings.
  • FIG. 43 is an enlarged schematic view of part of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 39 at E.
  • the module circuit board 20 does not transmit a current signal to the first circuit board 51 , and the force applying member 532 is not energized.
  • the force applying member 532 does not shrink.
  • the force applying member 532 does not exert a pulling force on the second fixing portion 5313 .
  • part of the limiting block 533 is located in the first through hole 521 of the first fastener 52 .
  • the hole wall of the first through hole 521 can limit the movement of the limiting block 533 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is in a locked state.
  • the locking state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scene where the camera module 100 is not in use.
  • FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the fourth embodiment.
  • the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first circuit board 51 , and the force applying member 532 is energized.
  • the force applying member 532 contracts.
  • the force applying member 532 generates a contraction force.
  • the urging member 532 in the contracted state can apply a pulling force to the second fixing portion 5313 .
  • the connecting portion 5312 is bent.
  • the second fixing portion 5313 drives the limiting block 533 to move.
  • the limiting block 533 is moved out from the first through hole 521 of the first fastener 52 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is in an unlocked state.
  • the unlocked state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to the scenario in which the camera module 100 starts to be used.
  • the structure of the second latching member 53 of the present embodiment may also adopt the structure composed of the connector 52 , the self-locking member 53 and the force-applying member 54 of the first embodiment.
  • the structure of the second latching member 53 of the present embodiment may also adopt the structure composed of the self-locking member 53 and the force applying member 54 of the second embodiment.
  • the structure constituted by the connector 52 , the self-locking member 53 and the force applying member 54 in the first embodiment may also adopt the structure of the second latching member 53 in this embodiment.
  • the structure formed by the self-locking member 53 and the force-applying member 54 of the second embodiment may also adopt the structure of the second locking member 53 of the present embodiment.
  • a camera module 100 The structure of a camera module 100 is described in detail above. Hereinafter, another photographing method of the camera module 100 will be introduced in conjunction with the structure of the camera module 100 (please refer to FIG. 38 to FIG. 44 ).
  • the shooting method of the camera module 100 includes:
  • the shooting signal may be a signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 .
  • the shooting signal may also be a signal formed by the touch signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 and sent to the host circuit board 90 , where the chip on the host circuit board 90 processes the touch signal. .
  • the module circuit board 20 may be used to receive a shooting signal.
  • the force applying member 532 is controlled to be energized, so that the force applying member 532 exerts a force on the limiting block 535 to drive the limiting block 535 to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member 533 and move out of the first through hole 521 .
  • the biasing member 532 is an SMA.
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the force applying member 532 to energize.
  • the force applying member 532 contracts.
  • the force-applying member 532 generates a contraction force.
  • the urging member 532 in the contracted state can apply a pulling force to the second fixing portion 5313 .
  • the pulling force received by the second fixing portion 5313 is greater than the elastic force of the connecting portion 5312, the connecting portion 5312 is bent. In this way, the second fixing portion 5313 drives the limiting block 533 to move. At this time, the limiting block 533 is moved out from the first through hole 521 of the first fastener 52 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move from the fixed position to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
  • the fixed position refers to a position of the first moving bracket 143 within the moving stroke range.
  • the location can be flexibly set according to needs.
  • the target position refers to any position of the first moving bracket 143 within the moving stroke range.
  • the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 through the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the first coil 146 is energized, and under the action of the first coil 146, the first magnet 145 can generate the magnet 145 in the negative direction of the X axis to push the first moving bracket 143 to move in the negative direction of the X axis under the ampere force.
  • the first lens 151 fixed to the first moving bracket 143 can also move in the negative direction of the X-axis.
  • the photosensitive chip 30 is controlled to convert the optical signal into an electrical signal and output it.
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to collect ambient light passing through the optical lens 10 .
  • the collected ambient light is converted into electrical signals, and the electrical signals are output to the host circuit board 90 .
  • the second moving bracket 144 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move from the target position to the fixed position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
  • the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 through the lens circuit board 16 .
  • the first coil 146 is energized, and the first magnet 145 can generate an ampere force along the positive direction of the X-axis under the action of the first coil 146 .
  • the first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move in the positive direction of the X-axis under the ampere force.
  • the first lens 151 fixed to the first moving bracket 143 can also move in the positive direction of the X-axis.
  • the first magnet 145 can generate electricity along the X-axis. Ampere force in the positive direction. At this time, the first magnet 145 can push the first moving bracket 143 to move in the positive direction of the X-axis under the ampere force.
  • part of the limiting block 535 extends into the first through hole 521 under the elastic force of the elastic member 533 .
  • the module circuit board 20 controls the force applying member 532 to power off.
  • the force applying member 532 is not energized, and the current signal does not act on the force applying member 532 .
  • the force applying member 532 does not shrink.
  • the limiting block 533 protrudes into the first through hole 521 of the first fastener 52 under the elastic force of the connecting portion 5312 .
  • the hole wall of the first through hole 521 can limit the movement of the limiting block 533 .
  • the method further includes:
  • the Hall sensor 171 detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet 172 .
  • the first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
  • the Hall sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 can improve the shooting accuracy of the camera module 100 , so that the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is better.
  • Each camera module 100 is provided with a self-locking assembly 50 . It can be understood that when the first lens 151 of the camera module 100 moves to the target position, the motor is locked by the self-locking component 50, so that the stability of the first lens 151 on the motor 14 is better, that is, the The first lens 151 is not easily moved due to external shaking or vibration, so that when the user is taking a photo, the captured image is not easily deformed or blurred. In particular, when the user takes a photo during exercise, the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is also better. Therefore, the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 of the present application is also better.

Abstract

An optical lens (10), a photographing module (100), an electronic device (1), and a photographing method of the photographing module (100). The optical lens (10) comprises a motor (14), a first lens (151), and a self-locking assembly (50). The motor (14) comprises a driving member and a moving support. The first lens (151) is mounted on the moving support. The driving member is used for driving the moving support to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens (10). The self-locking assembly (50) comprises a base (531), a rotating member (533), a force application member (54), an elastic member (534), and a limiting block (535). When the force application member (54) is not energized, the limiting block (535) is in contact with the moving support under the elastic force of the elastic member (534), and static friction can be generated between the limiting block (535) and the moving support. When the force application member (54) is energized, the rotating member (533) is driven to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member (534) and drive the limiting block (535) to rotate so as to separate the limiting block (535) from the moving support. The optical lens (10) is not easily affected due to external movement or shaking during photographing. When the optical lens (10) is applied to the photographing module (100) and the electronic device (1), the photographing performances of the photographing module (100) and the electronic device (1) are better.

Description

光学镜头、摄像模组、电子设备及摄像模组的拍摄方法Optical lens, camera module, electronic equipment and shooting method of camera module
本申请要求于2020年09月10日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010949115.0、申请名称为“光学镜头、摄像模组、电子设备及摄像模组的拍摄方法”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed with the China Patent Office on September 10, 2020, the application number is 202010949115.0, and the application name is "photography method of optical lens, camera module, electronic equipment and camera module", which The entire contents of this application are incorporated by reference.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及镜头技术领域,尤其涉及一种光学镜头、摄像模组、电子设备及摄像模组的拍摄方法。The present application relates to the field of lens technology, and in particular, to an optical lens, a camera module, an electronic device, and a shooting method for the camera module.
背景技术Background technique
随着电子设备技术的日趋发展,人们希望手机的拍摄性能能够越来越好。然而,由于传统的手机在拍摄过程中,容易因外界的运动或抖动而使得拍摄的图像变形或模糊,从而严重影响手机的用户体验性。故而,如何设置一种稳定性较佳,不容易因外界运动或者抖动而影响拍摄质量的摄像模组非常重要。With the development of electronic equipment technology, people hope that the shooting performance of mobile phones can be better and better. However, during the shooting process of a traditional mobile phone, the captured image is easily deformed or blurred due to external movement or shaking, thus seriously affecting the user experience of the mobile phone. Therefore, it is very important how to set up a camera module with better stability and less likely to affect the shooting quality due to external movement or shaking.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请提供一种不容易因外界运动或者抖动而影响拍摄的光学镜头、摄像模组、电子设备及摄像模组的拍摄方法。The present application provides an optical lens, a camera module, an electronic device, and a shooting method for the camera module that are not easily affected by external motion or shaking.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种光学镜头。光学镜头包括马达、第一透镜以及自锁组件。所述马达包括驱动件以及移动支架。所述第一透镜安装于所述移动支架。所述驱动件用于驱动所述移动支架沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动。在本申请中,移动支架包括第一移动支架及第二移动支架。光学镜头的光轴方向为X轴方向。另外,光轴指的是一条经过各个透镜的中心的轴线。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an optical lens. The optical lens includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly. The motor includes a drive member and a moving bracket. The first lens is mounted on the moving bracket. The driving member is used for driving the moving bracket to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens. In the present application, the moving support includes a first moving support and a second moving support. The optical axis direction of the optical lens is the X axis direction. In addition, the optical axis refers to an axis passing through the center of each lens.
所述自锁组件包括底座、转动件、施力件、弹性件以及限位块。所述底座与所述移动支架间隔设置。所述转动件转动连接于所述底座。所述弹性件的一端连接于所述转动件,另一端连接于所述底座。The self-locking assembly includes a base, a rotating part, a force applying part, an elastic part and a limiting block. The base and the moving bracket are arranged at intervals. The rotating member is rotatably connected to the base. One end of the elastic member is connected to the rotating member, and the other end is connected to the base.
其中,所述限位块位于所述转动件与所述移动支架之间。所述限位块固定于所述转动件。一种实施方式中,所述限位块通过胶带或者胶水固定于所述转动件。一种实施方式中,所述限位块与所述转动件为一体成型结构。Wherein, the limiting block is located between the rotating member and the moving bracket. The limiting block is fixed to the rotating member. In one embodiment, the limiting block is fixed to the rotating member by tape or glue. In one embodiment, the limiting block and the rotating member are integrally formed.
其中,所述施力件用于在通电时对所述转动件施加作用力。所述施力件的通电情况可以根据所述移动支架是否相对移动决定。例如,当所述移动支架未相对移动时,所述施力件未通电。当所述移动支架相对移动时,所述施力件通电。另外,当所述移动支架未相对移动时,所述移动支架处于目标位置。目标位置可以为所述移动支架的对焦位置,也可以为所述光学镜头未启动拍摄时所述移动支架的一个固定位置。Wherein, the force-applying member is used to exert a force on the rotating member when electrified. The energization condition of the force-applying member can be determined according to whether the moving bracket moves relatively. For example, when the moving bracket is not relatively moved, the force applying member is not energized. When the moving bracket moves relatively, the force applying member is energized. In addition, when the moving support is not relatively moved, the moving support is in the target position. The target position may be the focus position of the moving bracket, or may be a fixed position of the moving bracket when the optical lens does not start shooting.
所述施力件未通电时,所述限位块在所述弹性件的弹力下与所述移动支架接触,所述限位块与所述移动支架之间能够产生静摩擦力。可以理解的是,当所述限位块在所述弹性件的弹力下与所述移动支架接触时,所述限位块对所述移动支架施加压力。此时,当所述移动支架具有相对移动的趋势时,所述移动支架产生静摩擦力。故而,所述限位块能够在所述弹性件的弹力下压紧所述移动支架。When the force-applying member is not energized, the limiting block contacts the moving bracket under the elastic force of the elastic member, and a static friction force can be generated between the limiting block and the moving bracket. It can be understood that when the limiting block contacts the moving bracket under the elastic force of the elastic member, the limiting block exerts pressure on the moving bracket. At this time, when the movable bracket has a tendency to move relatively, the movable bracket generates a static friction force. Therefore, the limiting block can press the moving bracket under the elastic force of the elastic member.
所述施力件通电时,驱动所述转动件克服所述弹性件的弹力,并带动所述限位块转动,以使所述限位块与所述移动支架分开。When the force applying member is energized, the rotating member is driven to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member, and drives the limiting block to rotate, so as to separate the limiting block from the moving bracket.
可以理解的是,通过控制所述施力件的通电情况来控制所述限位块是压紧于所述移动支 架,还是与所述移动支架分开,从而控制所述移动支架是处于锁紧状态,还是处于解锁状态。此时,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,安装于所述移动支架的第一透镜的稳定较佳。这样,当光学镜头在拍摄过程中,第一透镜不容易因外界的抖动或者振动而发生移动,所述光学镜头拍摄的图像不容易出现变形或模糊,所述光学镜头拍摄图像的质量较佳。特别是,当用户在运动过程中拍照时,所述光学镜头拍摄的图像的效果较佳。It can be understood that whether the limit block is pressed against the moving bracket or separated from the moving bracket is controlled by controlling the energization of the force-applying member, so as to control whether the moving bracket is in a locked state , still unlocked. At this time, when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the stability of the first lens mounted on the movable bracket is better. In this way, when the optical lens is in the shooting process, the first lens is not easily moved due to external shaking or vibration, the image captured by the optical lens is not easily deformed or blurred, and the quality of the image captured by the optical lens is better. In particular, when the user takes a picture during the movement, the effect of the image captured by the optical lens is better.
另外,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,所述移动支架可以避免与所述光学镜头内的其他部件发生碰撞,从而降低所述移动支架的撞击风险。另外,当所述移动支架包括第一移动支架与第二移动支架时,通过锁紧第一移动支架与第二移动支架,可以避免第一移动支架与第二移动支架发生碰撞现象,从而降低第一移动支架与第二移动支架的撞击风险。In addition, when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the movable bracket can avoid collision with other components in the optical lens, thereby reducing the collision risk of the movable bracket. In addition, when the movable bracket includes the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, by locking the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, the collision between the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can be avoided, thereby reducing the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket. Risk of collision between a mobile bracket and a second mobile bracket.
另外,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,所述移动支架可以避免发生受迫振动。受迫振动指的是在周期性的外力作用下,其所发生的振动。In addition, when the movable bracket is in the locked state, the movable bracket can avoid forced vibration. Forced vibration refers to the vibration that occurs under the action of periodic external forces.
一种实施方式中,所述限位块与所述转动件的连接位置为第一位置。所述施力件对所述转动件的施力位置为第二位置。所述转动件的转动位置位于所述第一位置与所述第二位置之间。此时,所述限位块、所述转动件以及所述施力件形成杠杆结构。所述限位块与所述施力件位于所述转动件的转动位置的两侧,所述限位块与所述施力件在运动中不容易相互干涉,从而保证所述自锁组件的可靠性。In one embodiment, the connecting position of the limiting block and the rotating member is the first position. The force applying position of the force applying member to the rotating member is the second position. The rotational position of the rotating member is located between the first position and the second position. At this time, the limiting block, the rotating member and the force applying member form a lever structure. The limit block and the force applying member are located on both sides of the rotating position of the rotating member, and the limit block and the force applying member are not easy to interfere with each other during movement, thereby ensuring the self-locking assembly. reliability.
一种实施方式中,所述第一位置与所述转动件的转动位置的距离为第一距离。所述第二位置与所述转动件的转动位置的距离为第二距离。第一距离大于第二距离。此时,当所述施力件在通电下,所述施力件拉动所述转动件转动的角度较大,所述限位块与所述移动支架分开的距离也较大。这样,当所述移动支架沿X轴方向移动时,不容易与所述限位块发生干涉。In one embodiment, the distance between the first position and the rotational position of the rotating member is the first distance. The distance between the second position and the rotation position of the rotating member is the second distance. The first distance is greater than the second distance. At this time, when the force-applying member is energized, the angle at which the force-applying member pulls the rotating member to rotate is relatively large, and the distance between the limiting block and the moving bracket is relatively large. In this way, when the moving bracket moves along the X-axis direction, it is not easy to interfere with the limiting block.
一种实施方式中,所述施力件为形状记忆合金。所述作用力的方向与所述限位块施加于所述移动支架的压力相同。In one embodiment, the force applying member is a shape memory alloy. The direction of the acting force is the same as the pressure exerted by the limiting block on the moving bracket.
可以理解的是,通过设置所述作用力的方向与所述限位块施加于所述移动支架的压力相同,从而使得所述施力件与所述移动支架位于所述转动件的同一侧。此时,所述施力件的延伸方向能够与所述移动支架在Y轴的延伸方向具有重叠区域。这样,当所述施力件的长度较大程度地增加时,所述施力件也不会增大所述光学镜头在Y轴方向的长度。另外,当所述施力件的长度较大程度增加时,所述施力件在通电下的收缩长度也较大,此时,所述施力件拉动所述转动件转动的角度也较大,所述限位块与所述移动支架分开的距离也较大。这样,当所述移动支架沿X轴方向移动时,不容易与所述限位块发生干涉。It can be understood that by setting the direction of the acting force to be the same as the pressure exerted by the limiting block on the moving bracket, the force applying member and the moving bracket are located on the same side of the rotating member. At this time, the extending direction of the force applying member can have an overlapping area with the extending direction of the moving bracket in the Y-axis. In this way, when the length of the force applying member is greatly increased, the force applying member will not increase the length of the optical lens in the Y-axis direction. In addition, when the length of the force-applying member increases to a large extent, the contraction length of the force-applying member under power-on is also relatively large, and at this time, the angle at which the force-applying member pulls the rotating member to rotate is also relatively large. , the distance between the limit block and the moving bracket is also relatively large. In this way, when the moving bracket moves along the X-axis direction, it is not easy to interfere with the limiting block.
一种实施方式中,所述转动件的材质为导电材料。所述自锁组件还包括第一电路板、连接器以及转轴。所述第一电路板与所述移动支架间隔设置。所述第一电路板包括间隔设置的第一引脚与第二引脚。所述连接器固定于所述第一电路板,且所述连接器电连接于所述第一引脚。所述施力件的一端固定于所述连接器,另一端固定于所述转动件。所述转轴的一端固定于所述底座,另一端转动连接于所述转动件。所述转轴电连接于所述第二引脚。此时,所述第一电路板、所述连接器、所述施力件、所述转轴以及所述转动件形成电流通路。可以理解的是,转轴既能够用于使转动件相对底座转动,又能够作为电流通路的一部分。转轴具有“一物多用”的效果。另外,转动件既能够用于带动限位块转动,又能够作为电流通路的一部分。转动件也具有“一物多用”的效果。In one embodiment, the material of the rotating member is a conductive material. The self-locking assembly further includes a first circuit board, a connector and a rotating shaft. The first circuit board is spaced apart from the moving bracket. The first circuit board includes first pins and second pins arranged at intervals. The connector is fixed on the first circuit board, and the connector is electrically connected to the first pin. One end of the force applying member is fixed to the connector, and the other end is fixed to the rotating member. One end of the rotating shaft is fixed to the base, and the other end is rotatably connected to the rotating member. The rotating shaft is electrically connected to the second pin. At this time, the first circuit board, the connector, the force applying member, the rotating shaft and the rotating member form a current path. It can be understood that the rotating shaft can not only be used to rotate the rotating member relative to the base, but also can be used as a part of the current path. The reel has the effect of "multi-purpose for one thing". In addition, the rotating member can not only be used to drive the limit block to rotate, but also can be used as a part of the current path. Rotating parts also have the effect of "multi-purpose".
一种实施方式中,所述弹性件位于所述转动件远离所述限位块的一侧,且所述弹性件与所述限位块相对设置。In one embodiment, the elastic member is located on a side of the rotating member away from the limiting block, and the elastic member is disposed opposite to the limiting block.
可以理解的是,通过将所述弹性件设置于所述转动件远离所述限位块的一侧,从而当所 述移动支架沿X轴方向移动中,所述弹性件不容易与所述移动支架发生干涉,从而保证所述自锁组件的可靠性。It can be understood that, by arranging the elastic member on the side of the rotating member away from the limit block, when the moving bracket moves along the X-axis direction, the elastic member is not easily connected with the movement. The bracket interferes, thereby ensuring the reliability of the self-locking assembly.
另外,通过设置所述弹性件与所述限位块相对,从而当所述施力件对所述转动件施加拉力时,所述弹性件不容易与施力件发生干涉,从而保证所述自锁组件的可靠性。In addition, by arranging the elastic member to be opposite to the limiting block, when the force-applying member exerts a pulling force on the rotating member, the elastic member is not likely to interfere with the force-applying member, thereby ensuring that the self Reliability of lock components.
一种实施方式中,所述限位块与所述转动件的连接位置为第一位置。所述施力件对所述转动件的施力位置为第二位置。所述第一位置与所述第二位置位于所述转动件的转动位置的同一侧。此时,所述施力件对所述限位块的施力距离较短,所述限位块更容易与所述移动支架分开。In one embodiment, the connecting position of the limiting block and the rotating member is the first position. The force applying position of the force applying member to the rotating member is the second position. The first position and the second position are located on the same side of the rotational position of the rotating member. At this time, the force-applying distance of the force-applying member to the limiting block is shorter, and the limiting block is more easily separated from the moving bracket.
一种实施方式中,所述转动件的材质为磁性材料。所述施力件包括磁性件及缠绕于所述磁性件表面的线圈。所述磁性件的一端固定于所述底座,另一端朝向所述转动件。所述作用力的方向与所述限位块施加于所述移动支架的压力相反。此时,所述施力件与所述移动支架位于所述转动件的不同侧。当所述移动支架沿X轴方向移动时,所述移动支架不容易与所述施力件相互干涉。另外,所述施力件产生的磁场不容易影响所述移动支架沿X轴方向移动。In one embodiment, the material of the rotating member is a magnetic material. The force-applying member includes a magnetic member and a coil wound on the surface of the magnetic member. One end of the magnetic member is fixed on the base, and the other end faces the rotating member. The direction of the acting force is opposite to the pressure exerted by the limiting block on the moving bracket. At this time, the force applying member and the moving bracket are located on different sides of the rotating member. When the moving bracket moves along the X-axis direction, the moving bracket is not easy to interfere with the force applying member. In addition, the magnetic field generated by the force-applying member does not easily affect the movement of the movable bracket along the X-axis direction.
一种实施方式中,所述弹性件与所述施力件位于所述转动件的同一侧,且所述弹性件与所述施力件位于所述转动件的转动位置的两边。In one embodiment, the elastic member and the force applying member are located on the same side of the rotating member, and the elastic member and the force applying member are located on both sides of the rotating position of the rotating member.
可以理解的是,通过设置所述弹性件与所述施力件位于所述转动件的同一侧,从而当所述移动支架在移动过程中,所述弹性件不容易与所述移动支架相互碰撞或者相互干涉。It can be understood that, by arranging the elastic member and the force-applying member to be located on the same side of the rotating member, when the moving bracket is moving, the elastic member is not easy to collide with the moving bracket. or interfere with each other.
另外,通过将所述弹性件与所述施力件设置于所述转动件的转动位置的两边,从而当所述施力件在对所述转动件施力时,所述弹性件不容易与所述施力件相互干涉。In addition, by arranging the elastic member and the force-applying member on both sides of the rotating position of the rotating member, when the force-applying member exerts force on the rotating member, the elastic member is not easily connected to the rotating member. The force-applying members interfere with each other.
一种实施方式中,所述马达还包括基板、固定支架及导轨。所述固定支架与所述基板相对设置。所述导轨的一端固定于所述基板,另一端固定于所述固定支架。所述移动支架位于所述基板与所述固定支架之间,且活动连接于所述导轨。所述光学镜头还包括第二透镜。所述第二透镜安装于所述固定支架。所述第二透镜位于所述第一透镜的物侧。In one embodiment, the motor further includes a base plate, a fixing bracket and a guide rail. The fixing bracket is arranged opposite to the base plate. One end of the guide rail is fixed to the base plate, and the other end is fixed to the fixing bracket. The moving bracket is located between the base plate and the fixed bracket, and is movably connected to the guide rail. The optical lens further includes a second lens. The second lens is mounted on the fixing bracket. The second lens is located on the object side of the first lens.
可以理解的是,以透镜为界,被摄物体所在一侧为物侧。透镜靠近物侧的表面称为物侧面。被摄物体的图像所在的一侧为像侧。透镜靠近像侧的表面称为像侧面。It can be understood that, taking the lens as the boundary, the side where the subject is located is the object side. The surface of the lens near the object side is called the object side. The side where the image of the subject is located is the image side. The surface of the lens near the image side is called the image side.
可以理解的是,通过在所述第一透镜的物侧设置第二透镜,从而利用所述第二透镜较大程度地接收大视场角的光线。此时,所述光学镜头的视场角能够较大程度地提高。It can be understood that by arranging the second lens on the object side of the first lens, the second lens can receive light with a large angle of view to a greater extent. At this time, the viewing angle of the optical lens can be greatly improved.
一种实施方式中,所述光学镜头还包括外壳。所述基板与所述固定支架位于所述外壳的内部,且固定于所述外壳。所述移动支架包括间隔设置的第一移动支架以及第二移动支架。其中,所述第一移动支架与所述第二移动支架均固定有所述第一透镜。所述驱动件包括第一磁铁、第一线圈、第二磁铁以及第二线圈。所述第一磁铁固定于所述第一移动支架。所述第一线圈固定于所述外壳的内侧,且朝向所述第一磁铁。所述第二磁铁固定于所述第二移动支架。所述第二线圈固定于所述外壳的内侧,且朝向所述第二磁铁。In one embodiment, the optical lens further includes a housing. The base plate and the fixing bracket are located inside the casing and are fixed to the casing. The movable bracket includes a first movable bracket and a second movable bracket arranged at intervals. Wherein, the first lens is fixed on both the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket. The driving member includes a first magnet, a first coil, a second magnet and a second coil. The first magnet is fixed to the first moving bracket. The first coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing and faces the first magnet. The second magnet is fixed on the second moving bracket. The second coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing and faces the second magnet.
可以理解的是,当移动支架设置成间隔设置的第一移动支架以及第二移动支架时,安装于所述第一移动支架与所述第二移动支架的第一透镜能够单独沿X轴方向移动。此时,光学镜头的光学设计自由度更佳。It can be understood that, when the movable brackets are arranged as the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket arranged at intervals, the first lens mounted on the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can move along the X-axis direction alone. . At this time, the optical design freedom of the optical lens is better.
一种实施方式中,所述光学镜头还包括镜头电路板。所述镜头电路板电连接于所述第一线圈与所述第二线圈。此时,所述镜头电路板能够向所述第一线圈与所述第二线圈传输信号。In one embodiment, the optical lens further includes a lens circuit board. The lens circuit board is electrically connected to the first coil and the second coil. At this time, the lens circuit board can transmit signals to the first coil and the second coil.
一种实施方式中,所述光学镜头还包括霍尔传感器及检测磁铁。所述检测磁铁固定于所述移动支架。所述霍尔传感器用于检测当所述检测磁铁处于不同位置处的磁场强度。In one embodiment, the optical lens further includes a Hall sensor and a detection magnet. The detection magnet is fixed on the moving bracket. The Hall sensor is used to detect the magnetic field strength when the detection magnet is at different positions.
可以理解的是,当移动支架沿X轴方向向目标位置移动时,移动支架容易出现未移动至 目标位置。本实施方式利用霍尔传感器测量检测磁铁所处位置的磁场强度,并判断该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度是否相等。当该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度不相等时,驱动件能够继续推动移动支架沿X轴方向移动,以使移动支架准确地移动至目标位置。故而,通过设置霍尔传感器与检测磁铁,能够显著地提高移动支架沿X轴方向移动的准确度。It can be understood that when the moving bracket moves toward the target position along the X-axis direction, the moving bracket is prone to not move to the target position. In this embodiment, the Hall sensor is used to measure the magnetic field strength at the position where the detection magnet is located, and it is determined whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position. When the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position, the driving member can continue to push the movable bracket to move along the X-axis direction, so that the movable bracket can accurately move to the target position. Therefore, by providing the Hall sensor and the detection magnet, the accuracy of the movement of the movable bracket in the X-axis direction can be significantly improved.
一种实施方式中,所述光学镜头还包括棱镜马达以及反射件。所述反射件转动连接于所述棱镜马达。所述反射件用于反射环境光线,以使环境光线传播至所述第一透镜。本实施方式的反射件以三棱镜为例进行描述。In one embodiment, the optical lens further includes a prism motor and a reflector. The reflector is rotatably connected to the prism motor. The reflector is used for reflecting ambient light, so that the ambient light is transmitted to the first lens. The reflector of this embodiment is described by taking a triangular prism as an example.
可以理解的是,所述光学镜头在采集环境光线的过程中容易发生抖动,此时,环境光线的传输路径容易发生偏折,从而导致所述光学镜头拍摄的图像不佳。在本实施例中,当环境光线的传输路径发生偏折时,所述棱镜马达能够驱动所述三棱镜转动,从而利用所述三棱镜来调整环境光线的传输路径,减少或者避免环境光线的传输路径发生偏折,进而保证所述光学镜头具有较佳的拍摄效果。故而,所述反射件可以起到光学防抖的效果。It can be understood that the optical lens is prone to shake during the process of collecting ambient light, and at this time, the transmission path of the ambient light is prone to deflection, resulting in poor images captured by the optical lens. In this embodiment, when the transmission path of the ambient light is deflected, the prism motor can drive the triangular prism to rotate, so that the triangular prism can be used to adjust the transmission path of the ambient light and reduce or avoid the occurrence of the transmission path of the ambient light. deflection, thereby ensuring that the optical lens has a better shooting effect. Therefore, the reflector can play an optical anti-shake effect.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供另一种光学镜头。所述光学镜头包括马达、第一透镜以及自锁组件。所述马达包括驱动件以及移动支架。所述第一透镜安装于所述移动支架。所述驱动件用于驱动所述移动支架沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动。在本申请中,所述移动支架包括第一移动支架及第二移动支架。所述光学镜头的光轴方向为X轴方向。另外,光轴指的是一条经过各个透镜的中心的轴线。In a second aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide another optical lens. The optical lens includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly. The motor includes a drive member and a moving bracket. The first lens is mounted on the moving bracket. The driving member is used for driving the moving bracket to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens. In the present application, the moving support includes a first moving support and a second moving support. The optical axis direction of the optical lens is the X axis direction. In addition, the optical axis refers to an axis passing through the center of each lens.
所述自锁组件包括第一卡扣件和第二卡扣件。其中,所述第一卡扣件固定于所述移动支架。所述第一卡扣件开设有第一通孔。一种实施方式中,所述第一卡扣件通过胶带或者胶水固定于所述移动支架。一种实施方式中,所述第一卡扣件与所述移动支架为一体成型结构。The self-locking assembly includes a first clip and a second clip. Wherein, the first fastener is fixed on the moving bracket. A first through hole is formed on the first fastener. In one embodiment, the first fastener is fixed to the moving bracket by tape or glue. In one embodiment, the first clip and the moving bracket are integrally formed.
其中,所述第二卡扣件包括弹性件、限位块以及施力件。所述弹性件位于所述第一卡扣件远离所述移动支架的一侧。所述弹性件可以为弹片,也可以为弹簧。Wherein, the second fastener includes an elastic member, a limiting block and a force applying member. The elastic member is located on a side of the first latching member away from the moving bracket. The elastic member may be an elastic piece or a spring.
其中,所述限位块位于所述弹性件与所述移动支架之间。所述限位块固定于所述弹性件的一端。一种实施方式中,所述限位块通过胶带或者胶水固定于所述弹性件。一种实施方式中,所述限位块与所述弹性件为一体成型结构。Wherein, the limiting block is located between the elastic member and the moving bracket. The limiting block is fixed on one end of the elastic piece. In one embodiment, the limiting block is fixed to the elastic member by tape or glue. In one embodiment, the limiting block and the elastic member are integrally formed.
所述施力件用于在通电时对所述限位块施加作用力。所述施力件的通电情况可以根据所述移动支架是否相对移动决定。例如,当所述移动支架未相对移动时,所述施力件未通电。当所述移动支架相对移动时,所述施力件通电。另外,当所述移动支架未相对移动时,所述移动支架处于固定位置。固定位置为所述光学镜头未启动拍摄时所述移动支架的一个位置。The force applying member is used for applying force to the limit block when the power is turned on. The energization condition of the force-applying member can be determined according to whether the moving bracket moves relatively. For example, when the moving bracket is not relatively moved, the force applying member is not energized. When the moving bracket moves relatively, the force applying member is energized. In addition, when the movable bracket is not relatively moved, the movable bracket is in a fixed position. The fixed position is a position of the moving bracket when the optical lens does not start shooting.
所述施力件未通电时,部分所述限位块位于所述第一通孔内。此时,所述第一通孔的孔壁能够限定所述限位块的移动。When the force applying member is not energized, part of the limiting block is located in the first through hole. At this time, the hole wall of the first through hole can limit the movement of the limiting block.
所述施力件通电时,驱动所述限位块克服所述弹性件的弹力,并移出所述第一通孔。When the force applying member is energized, the limiting block is driven to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member and move out of the first through hole.
可以理解的是,通过控制所述施力件的通电情况来控制所述限位块是位于所述第一通孔内,还是移出所述第一通孔,从而控制所述移动支架是处于锁紧状态,还是处于解锁状态。此时,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,安装于所述移动支架的第一透镜的稳定较佳。It can be understood that whether the limit block is located in the first through hole or moved out of the first through hole is controlled by controlling the power-on condition of the force applying member, so as to control whether the moving bracket is in the locked state. tight, or unlocked. At this time, when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the stability of the first lens mounted on the movable bracket is better.
另外,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,所述移动支架可以避免与所述光学镜头内的其他部件发生碰撞,从而降低所述移动支架的撞击风险。另外,当所述移动支架包括第一移动支架与第二移动支架时,通过锁紧第一移动支架与第二移动支架,可以避免第一移动支架与第二移动支架发生碰撞现象,从而降低第一移动支架与第二移动支架的撞击风险。所述移动支架的可靠性较佳。In addition, when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the movable bracket can avoid collision with other components in the optical lens, thereby reducing the collision risk of the movable bracket. In addition, when the movable bracket includes the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, by locking the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, the collision between the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can be avoided, thereby reducing the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket. Risk of collision between a mobile bracket and a second mobile bracket. The reliability of the moving bracket is better.
另外,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,所述移动支架可以避免发生受迫振动。受迫振 动指的是在周期性的外力作用下,其所发生的振动。In addition, when the movable bracket is in the locked state, the movable bracket can avoid forced vibration. Forced vibration refers to the vibration that occurs under the action of periodic external forces.
一种实施方式中,所述第二卡扣件还包括底座以及滑动块。所述弹性件远离所述限位块的一端固定于所述底座。所述滑动块连接于所述弹性件与所述限位块之间。所述滑动块滑动连接于所述底座。In one embodiment, the second fastener further includes a base and a sliding block. One end of the elastic member away from the limiting block is fixed on the base. The sliding block is connected between the elastic member and the limiting block. The sliding block is slidably connected to the base.
其中,所述滑动块的材质为磁性材料。例如,所述滑动块可以为磁铁或者磁钢。Wherein, the material of the sliding block is a magnetic material. For example, the sliding block may be a magnet or a magnetic steel.
其中,所述施力件包括磁性件及缠绕于所述磁性件表面的线圈。所述磁性件的一端固定于所述底座,另一端朝向所述滑动块。Wherein, the force-applying member includes a magnetic member and a coil wound on the surface of the magnetic member. One end of the magnetic piece is fixed on the base, and the other end faces the sliding block.
一种实施方式中,所述弹性件套设所述施力件。此时,所述施力件位于所述弹性件的内部。所述施力件能够有效地利用所述弹性件的内部空间。所述弹性件与所述施力件的装配较为紧凑,光学镜头的空间利用率较高。In one embodiment, the elastic member is sleeved with the force applying member. At this time, the force applying member is located inside the elastic member. The force applying member can effectively utilize the inner space of the elastic member. The assembly of the elastic member and the force-applying member is relatively compact, and the space utilization rate of the optical lens is high.
一种实施方式中,所述施力件未通电时,所述弹性件对所述滑动块施加弹力。可以理解的是,通过所述弹性件的弹力将所述限位块挤压在所述第一卡扣件的第一通孔内,可以使得所述限位块的稳定性更佳,也即所述限位块不容易从所述第一卡扣件的第一通孔内移出。In one embodiment, when the force applying member is not energized, the elastic member applies elastic force to the sliding block. It can be understood that, by pressing the limit block into the first through hole of the first fastener by the elastic force of the elastic member, the stability of the limit block can be better, that is, The limiting block is not easy to move out of the first through hole of the first clip.
一种实施方式中,所述弹性件包括第一固定部、连接部以及第二固定部。所述连接部连接于所述第一固定部与所述第二固定部之间。所述第二固定部与所述第一固定部相对设置。此时,所述弹性件的形状大致呈“C”型。In one embodiment, the elastic member includes a first fixing portion, a connecting portion and a second fixing portion. The connecting portion is connected between the first fixing portion and the second fixing portion. The second fixing portion is disposed opposite to the first fixing portion. At this time, the shape of the elastic member is roughly "C" shape.
其中,所述限位块固定于所述第二固定部远离所述第一固定部的一侧。Wherein, the limiting block is fixed on a side of the second fixing portion away from the first fixing portion.
所述施力件为形状记忆合金,所述施力件的一端连接于所述第一固定部,另一端连接于所述第二固定部。The force applying member is a shape memory alloy, one end of the force applying member is connected to the first fixing portion, and the other end is connected to the second fixing portion.
一种实施方式中,所述第二固定部与所述连接部的材质为导电材料。所述自锁组件还包括第一电路板。所述第一电路板包括间隔设置的第一引脚与第二引脚。In one embodiment, the material of the second fixing portion and the connecting portion is a conductive material. The self-locking assembly further includes a first circuit board. The first circuit board includes first pins and second pins arranged at intervals.
所述第一固定部包括第一导电段、绝缘段以及第二导电段。所述绝缘段的一端连接于所述第一导电段,另一端连接于所述第二导电段。所述第一导电段连接于所述施力件的一端。所述第二导电段连接于所述连接部。所述第一导电段电连接于所述第一引脚。所述第二导电段电连接于所述第二引脚。这样,所述第一电路板、所述第一导电段、所述施力件、所述第二固定部、所述连接部以及所述第二导电段形成电流通路。The first fixing portion includes a first conductive segment, an insulating segment and a second conductive segment. One end of the insulating segment is connected to the first conductive segment, and the other end is connected to the second conductive segment. The first conductive segment is connected to one end of the force applying member. The second conductive segment is connected to the connecting portion. The first conductive segment is electrically connected to the first pin. The second conductive segment is electrically connected to the second pin. In this way, the first circuit board, the first conductive segment, the force applying member, the second fixing portion, the connecting portion and the second conductive segment form a current path.
可以理解的是,所述弹性件既能够用于带动限位块伸入所述第一通孔或者伸出所述第一通孔,又能够作为电流通路的一部分。所述弹性件具有“一物多用”的效果。It can be understood that, the elastic member can not only be used to drive the limiting block to extend into the first through hole or extend out of the first through hole, but also can be used as a part of the current path. The elastic member has the effect of "multi-purpose".
一种实施方式中,所述马达还包括基板、固定支架及导轨。所述固定支架与所述基板相对设置。所述导轨的一端固定于所述基板,另一端固定于所述固定支架。所述移动支架位于所述基板与所述固定支架之间,且活动连接于所述导轨。所述光学镜头还包括第二透镜。所述第二透镜安装于所述固定支架。所述第二透镜位于所述第一透镜的物侧。In one embodiment, the motor further includes a base plate, a fixing bracket and a guide rail. The fixing bracket is arranged opposite to the base plate. One end of the guide rail is fixed to the base plate, and the other end is fixed to the fixing bracket. The moving bracket is located between the base plate and the fixed bracket, and is movably connected to the guide rail. The optical lens further includes a second lens. The second lens is mounted on the fixing bracket. The second lens is located on the object side of the first lens.
可以理解的是,通过在所述第一透镜的物侧设置第二透镜,从而利用所述第二透镜较大程度地接收大视场角的光线。此时,所述光学镜头的视场角能够较大程度地提高。It can be understood that by arranging the second lens on the object side of the first lens, the second lens can receive light with a large angle of view to a greater extent. At this time, the viewing angle of the optical lens can be greatly improved.
一种实施方式中,所述光学镜头还包括外壳。所述基板与所述固定支架位于所述外壳的内部,且固定于所述外壳。所述移动支架包括间隔设置的第一移动支架以及第二移动支架。其中,所述第一移动支架与所述第二移动支架均固定有所述第一透镜。所述驱动件包括第一磁铁、第一线圈、第二磁铁以及第二线圈。所述第一磁铁固定于所述第一移动支架。所述第一线圈固定于所述外壳的内侧,且朝向所述第一磁铁。所述第二磁铁固定于所述第二移动支架。所述第二线圈固定于所述外壳的内侧,且朝向所述第二磁铁。In one embodiment, the optical lens further includes a housing. The base plate and the fixing bracket are located inside the casing and are fixed to the casing. The movable bracket includes a first movable bracket and a second movable bracket arranged at intervals. Wherein, the first lens is fixed on both the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket. The driving member includes a first magnet, a first coil, a second magnet and a second coil. The first magnet is fixed to the first moving bracket. The first coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing and faces the first magnet. The second magnet is fixed on the second moving bracket. The second coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing and faces the second magnet.
可以理解的是,当移动支架设置成间隔设置的第一移动支架以及第二移动支架时,安装 于所述第一移动支架与所述第二移动支架的第一透镜能够单独沿X轴方向移动。此时,光学镜头的光学设计自由度更佳,多个第一透镜之间的配合运动更加灵活。It can be understood that, when the movable brackets are arranged as the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket arranged at intervals, the first lens mounted on the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can move along the X-axis direction alone. . In this case, the optical lens has a better degree of freedom in optical design, and the cooperative movement among the plurality of first lenses is more flexible.
一种实施方式中,所述光学镜头还包括镜头电路板。所述镜头电路板电连接于所述第一线圈与所述第二线圈。此时,所述镜头电路板能够向所述第一线圈与所述第二线圈传输信号。In one embodiment, the optical lens further includes a lens circuit board. The lens circuit board is electrically connected to the first coil and the second coil. At this time, the lens circuit board can transmit signals to the first coil and the second coil.
一种实施方式中,所述光学镜头还包括霍尔传感器及检测磁铁。所述检测磁铁固定于所述移动支架。所述霍尔传感器用于检测当所述检测磁铁处于不同位置处的磁场强度。In one embodiment, the optical lens further includes a Hall sensor and a detection magnet. The detection magnet is fixed on the moving bracket. The Hall sensor is used to detect the magnetic field strength when the detection magnet is at different positions.
可以理解的是,当移动支架沿X轴方向向目标位置移动时,移动支架容易出现未移动至目标位置。本实施方式利用霍尔传感器测量检测磁铁所处位置的磁场强度,并判断该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度是否相等。当该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度不相等时,驱动件能够继续推动移动支架沿X轴方向移动,以使移动支架准确地移动至目标位置。故而,通过设置霍尔传感器与检测磁铁,能够显著地提高移动支架沿X轴方向移动的准确度。It can be understood that, when the moving bracket moves toward the target position along the X-axis direction, the moving bracket is likely to fail to move to the target position. In this embodiment, the Hall sensor is used to measure the magnetic field strength at the position where the detection magnet is located, and it is determined whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position. When the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position, the driving member can continue to push the movable bracket to move along the X-axis direction, so that the movable bracket can accurately move to the target position. Therefore, by providing the Hall sensor and the detection magnet, the accuracy of the movement of the movable bracket in the X-axis direction can be significantly improved.
一种实施方式中,所述光学镜头还包括棱镜马达以及反射件。所述反射件转动连接于所述棱镜马达。所述反射件用于反射环境光线,以使环境光线传播至所述第一透镜。本实施方式的反射件以三棱镜为例进行描述。In one embodiment, the optical lens further includes a prism motor and a reflector. The reflector is rotatably connected to the prism motor. The reflector is used for reflecting ambient light, so that the ambient light is transmitted to the first lens. The reflector of this embodiment is described by taking a triangular prism as an example.
可以理解的是,所述光学镜头在采集环境光线的过程中容易发生抖动,此时,环境光线的传输路径容易发生偏折,从而导致所述光学镜头拍摄的图像不佳。在本实施例中,当环境光线的传输路径发生偏折时,所述棱镜马达能够驱动所述三棱镜转动,从而利用所述三棱镜来调整环境光线的传输路径,减少或者避免环境光线的传输路径发生偏折,进而保证所述光学镜头具有较佳的拍摄效果。故而,所述反射件可以起到光学防抖的效果。It can be understood that the optical lens is prone to shake during the process of collecting ambient light, and at this time, the transmission path of the ambient light is prone to deflection, resulting in poor images captured by the optical lens. In this embodiment, when the transmission path of the ambient light is deflected, the prism motor can drive the triangular prism to rotate, so that the triangular prism can be used to adjust the transmission path of the ambient light and reduce or avoid the occurrence of the transmission path of the ambient light. deflection, thereby ensuring that the optical lens has a better shooting effect. Therefore, the reflector can play an optical anti-shake effect.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种摄像模组。所述摄像模组包括模组电路板、感光芯片、滤光片以及如上所述光学镜头。所述光学镜头包括上述第一方面的光学镜头以及上述第二方面的光学镜头。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a camera module. The camera module includes a module circuit board, a photosensitive chip, an optical filter, and the above-mentioned optical lens. The optical lens includes the optical lens of the first aspect and the optical lens of the second aspect.
其中,所述模组电路板位于所述光学镜头的像侧。所述感光芯片固定于所述模组电路板朝向所述光学镜头的一侧。所述感光芯片用于采集穿过所述光学镜头的环境光线。Wherein, the module circuit board is located on the image side of the optical lens. The photosensitive chip is fixed on the side of the module circuit board facing the optical lens. The photosensitive chip is used for collecting ambient light passing through the optical lens.
其中,所述滤光片固定于所述感光芯片朝向所述光学镜头的一侧。所述滤光片可用于过滤环境光线中的杂光,并使过滤后的环境光线传播至所述感光芯片,从而保证摄像模组拍摄图像具有较佳的清晰度。Wherein, the filter is fixed on the side of the photosensitive chip facing the optical lens. The filter can be used to filter stray light in ambient light, and make the filtered ambient light propagate to the photosensitive chip, so as to ensure that the image captured by the camera module has better clarity.
可以理解的是,当上述的光学镜头应用于所述摄像模组时,所述摄像模组的内部结构不容易因外界的震动或者晃动而出现相互碰撞或者干涉,所述摄像模组的可靠性较佳。另外,所述摄像模组的稳定性较佳,所述光学镜头不容易出现受迫振动。It can be understood that when the above-mentioned optical lens is applied to the camera module, the internal structure of the camera module is not likely to collide or interfere with each other due to external vibration or shaking, and the reliability of the camera module better. In addition, the stability of the camera module is good, and the optical lens is not prone to forced vibration.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种电子设备。该电子设备可以为手机和平板电脑等。电子设备包括壳体及如上所述的摄像模组,所述摄像模组安装于所述壳体。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device. The electronic device may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or the like. The electronic device includes a casing and the above-mentioned camera module, and the camera module is mounted on the casing.
可以理解的是,当上述的摄像模组应用于所述电子设备时,所述电子设备的可靠性较佳。另外,所述电子设备的稳定性较佳,所述电子设备不容易出现受迫振动。It can be understood that when the above-mentioned camera module is applied to the electronic device, the reliability of the electronic device is better. In addition, the stability of the electronic device is good, and the electronic device is not prone to forced vibration.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种摄像模组的拍摄方法。所述摄像模组包括光学镜头以及感光芯片。所述感光芯片位于所述光学镜头的像侧。所述光学镜头包括马达、第一透镜以及自锁组件。所述马达包括驱动件以及移动支架。所述第一透镜安装于所述移动支架。所述驱动件用于驱动所述移动支架沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动。在本申请中,移动支架包括第一移动支架及第二移动支架。光学镜头的光轴方向为X轴方向。另外,光轴指的是一条经过各个透镜的中心的轴线。所述自锁组件包括底座、转动件、施力件、弹性件以及限位块。所述底座与所述移动支架间隔设置。所述转动件转动连接于所述底座。所述弹性件的一端连 接于所述转动件,另一端连接于所述底座。其中,所述限位块位于所述转动件与所述移动支架之间。所述限位块固定于所述转动件。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a shooting method for a camera module. The camera module includes an optical lens and a photosensitive chip. The photosensitive chip is located on the image side of the optical lens. The optical lens includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly. The motor includes a drive member and a moving bracket. The first lens is mounted on the moving bracket. The driving member is used for driving the moving bracket to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens. In the present application, the moving support includes a first moving support and a second moving support. The optical axis direction of the optical lens is the X axis direction. In addition, the optical axis refers to an axis passing through the center of each lens. The self-locking assembly includes a base, a rotating part, a force applying part, an elastic part and a limiting block. The base and the moving bracket are arranged at intervals. The rotating member is rotatably connected to the base. One end of the elastic member is connected to the rotating member, and the other end is connected to the base. Wherein, the limiting block is located between the rotating member and the moving bracket. The limiting block is fixed to the rotating member.
所述拍摄方法包括:The shooting method includes:
接收拍摄信号;receive shooting signals;
控制所述施力件通电,以使所述施力件向所述转动件施加作用力,以驱动所述转动件克服所述弹性件的弹力,带动所述限位块转动并离开所述移动支架;Control the power-on of the force-applying member, so that the force-applying member exerts a force on the rotating member, so as to drive the rotating member to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member, and drive the limiting block to rotate and leave the movement bracket;
控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动;controlling the moving bracket to drive the first lens to move along the optical axis of the optical lens;
当所述移动支架移动至目标位置时,控制所述施力件断电,所述转动件在所述弹性件的弹力下带动所述限位块转动,以使所述限位块压紧所述移动支架接触;When the moving bracket moves to the target position, the force application member is controlled to be powered off, and the rotating member drives the limit block to rotate under the elastic force of the elastic member, so that the limit block is pressed against the desired position. contact with the moving bracket;
控制所述感光芯片将光信号转换成电信号并输出。The photosensitive chip is controlled to convert optical signals into electrical signals and output them.
可以理解的是,通过控制所述施力件的通电情况来控制所述限位块是压紧于所述移动支架,还是与所述移动支架分开,从而控制所述移动支架是处于锁紧状态,还是处于解锁状态。此时,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,安装于所述移动支架的第一透镜的稳定较佳。这样,当光学镜头在拍摄过程中,第一透镜不容易因外界的抖动或者振动而发生移动,所述光学镜头拍摄的图像不容易出现变形或模糊,所述光学镜头拍摄图像的质量较佳。特别是,当用户在运动过程中拍照时,所述光学镜头拍摄的图像的效果较佳。It can be understood that whether the limit block is pressed against the moving bracket or separated from the moving bracket is controlled by controlling the energization of the force-applying member, so as to control whether the moving bracket is in a locked state , still unlocked. At this time, when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the stability of the first lens mounted on the movable bracket is better. In this way, when the optical lens is in the shooting process, the first lens is not easily moved due to external shaking or vibration, the image captured by the optical lens is not easily deformed or blurred, and the quality of the image captured by the optical lens is better. In particular, when the user takes a picture during the movement, the effect of the image captured by the optical lens is better.
另外,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,所述移动支架可以避免与所述光学镜头内的其他部件发生碰撞,从而降低所述移动支架的撞击风险。另外,当所述移动支架包括第一移动支架与第二移动支架时,通过锁紧第一移动支架与第二移动支架,可以避免第一移动支架与第二移动支架发生碰撞现象,从而降低第一移动支架与第二移动支架的撞击风险。In addition, when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the movable bracket can avoid collision with other components in the optical lens, thereby reducing the collision risk of the movable bracket. In addition, when the movable bracket includes the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, by locking the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, the collision between the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can be avoided, thereby reducing the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket. Risk of collision between a mobile bracket and a second mobile bracket.
另外,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,所述移动支架可以避免发生受迫振动。受迫振动指的是在周期性的外力作用下,其所发生的振动。In addition, when the movable bracket is in the locked state, the movable bracket can avoid forced vibration. Forced vibration refers to the vibration that occurs under the action of periodic external forces.
一种实施方式中,所述光学镜头还包括霍尔传感器以及检测磁铁,所述检测磁铁固定于所述移动支架;In one embodiment, the optical lens further includes a Hall sensor and a detection magnet, and the detection magnet is fixed to the moving bracket;
在“控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动”之中,所述方法还包括:In "controlling the moving bracket to drive the first lens to move along the optical axis of the optical lens", the method further includes:
所述霍尔传感器检测检测磁铁的磁场强度;The Hall sensor detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet;
当确认出磁场强度不等于预设磁场强度时,控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动目标位置。When it is confirmed that the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength, the moving bracket is controlled to drive the first lens to move the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
可以理解的是,当移动支架沿X轴方向向目标位置移动时,移动支架容易出现未移动至目标位置。本实施方式利用霍尔传感器测量检测磁铁所处位置的磁场强度,并判断该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度是否相等。当该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度不相等时,驱动件能够继续推动移动支架沿X轴方向移动,以使移动支架准确地移动至目标位置。故而,通过设置霍尔传感器与检测磁铁,能够显著地提高移动支架沿X轴方向移动的准确度。It can be understood that, when the moving bracket moves toward the target position along the X-axis direction, the moving bracket is likely to fail to move to the target position. In this embodiment, the Hall sensor is used to measure the magnetic field strength at the position where the detection magnet is located, and it is determined whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position. When the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position, the driving member can continue to push the movable bracket to move along the X-axis direction, so that the movable bracket can accurately move to the target position. Therefore, by providing the Hall sensor and the detection magnet, the accuracy of the movement of the movable bracket in the X-axis direction can be significantly improved.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供另一种摄像模组的拍摄方法。所述摄像模组包括光学镜头以及感光芯片。所述感光芯片位于所述光学镜头的像侧。所述光学镜头包括马达、第一透镜以及自锁组件。所述马达包括驱动件以及移动支架。所述第一透镜安装于所述移动支架。所述驱动件用于驱动所述移动支架沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动。在本申请中,所述移动支架包括第一移动支架及第二移动支架。所述光学镜头的光轴方向为X轴方向。另外,光轴指的是一条经过各个透镜的中心的轴线。所述自锁组件包括第一卡扣件和第二卡扣件。其中,所述第一卡扣件固定于所述移动支架。所述第一卡扣件开设有第一通孔。一种实施方式中, 所述第一卡扣件通过胶带或者胶水固定于所述移动支架。一种实施方式中,所述第一卡扣件与所述移动支架为一体成型结构。其中,所述第二卡扣件包括弹性件、限位块以及施力件。所述弹性件位于所述第一卡扣件远离所述移动支架的一侧。所述弹性件可以为弹片,也可以为弹簧。其中,所述限位块位于所述弹性件与所述移动支架之间。所述限位块固定于所述弹性件的一端。In a sixth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide another shooting method for a camera module. The camera module includes an optical lens and a photosensitive chip. The photosensitive chip is located on the image side of the optical lens. The optical lens includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly. The motor includes a drive member and a moving bracket. The first lens is mounted on the moving bracket. The driving member is used for driving the moving bracket to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens. In the present application, the moving support includes a first moving support and a second moving support. The optical axis direction of the optical lens is the X axis direction. In addition, the optical axis refers to an axis passing through the center of each lens. The self-locking assembly includes a first clip and a second clip. Wherein, the first fastener is fixed on the moving bracket. A first through hole is formed on the first fastener. In one embodiment, the first fastener is fixed to the moving bracket by tape or glue. In one embodiment, the first clip and the moving bracket are integrally formed. Wherein, the second snap member includes an elastic member, a limiting block and a force applying member. The elastic member is located on a side of the first latching member away from the moving bracket. The elastic member may be an elastic piece or a spring. Wherein, the limiting block is located between the elastic member and the moving bracket. The limiting block is fixed on one end of the elastic piece.
所述拍摄方法包括:The shooting method includes:
接收拍摄信号;receive shooting signals;
控制所述施力件通电,以使所述施力件向所述限位块施加作用力,以驱动所述限位块克服所述弹性件的弹力,移出所述第一通孔;Controlling the energization of the force-applying member, so that the force-applying member applies a force to the limit block, so as to drive the limit block to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member and move out of the first through hole;
控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜自固定位置沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动至目标位置;controlling the moving bracket to drive the first lens to move from a fixed position to a target position along the optical axis of the optical lens;
控制所述感光芯片将光信号转换成电信号并输出;controlling the photosensitive chip to convert optical signals into electrical signals and output them;
控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜自所述目标位置沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动至所述固定位置;controlling the moving bracket to drive the first lens to move from the target position to the fixed position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens;
控制所述施力件断电,部分所述限位块在所述弹性件的弹力下伸入所述第一通孔内。Controlling the power of the force applying member to power off, part of the limiting block protrudes into the first through hole under the elastic force of the elastic member.
可以理解的是,通过控制所述施力件的通电情况来控制所述限位块是位于所述第一通孔内,还是移出所述第一通孔,从而控制所述移动支架是处于锁紧状态,还是处于解锁状态。此时,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,安装于所述移动支架的第一透镜的稳定较佳。It can be understood that whether the limit block is located in the first through hole or moved out of the first through hole is controlled by controlling the power-on condition of the force applying member, so as to control whether the moving bracket is in the locked state. tight, or unlocked. At this time, when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the stability of the first lens mounted on the movable bracket is better.
另外,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,所述移动支架可以避免与所述光学镜头内的其他部件发生碰撞,从而降低所述移动支架的撞击风险。另外,当所述移动支架包括第一移动支架与第二移动支架时,通过锁紧第一移动支架与第二移动支架,可以避免第一移动支架与第二移动支架发生碰撞现象,从而降低第一移动支架与第二移动支架的撞击风险。所述移动支架的可靠性较佳。In addition, when the movable bracket is in a locked state, the movable bracket can avoid collision with other components in the optical lens, thereby reducing the collision risk of the movable bracket. In addition, when the movable bracket includes the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, by locking the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket, the collision between the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket can be avoided, thereby reducing the first movable bracket and the second movable bracket. Risk of collision between a mobile bracket and a second mobile bracket. The reliability of the moving bracket is better.
另外,当所述移动支架处于锁紧状态时,所述移动支架可以避免发生受迫振动。受迫振动指的是在周期性的外力作用下,其所发生的振动。In addition, when the movable bracket is in the locked state, the movable bracket can avoid forced vibration. Forced vibration refers to the vibration that occurs under the action of periodic external forces.
一种实施方式中,所述光学镜头还包括霍尔传感器以及检测磁铁,所述检测磁铁固定于所述移动支架;In one embodiment, the optical lens further includes a Hall sensor and a detection magnet, and the detection magnet is fixed to the moving bracket;
在“控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜自固定位置沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动至目标位置”之中,所述方法还包括:In "controlling the moving bracket to drive the first lens to move from a fixed position to a target position along the optical axis of the optical lens", the method further includes:
所述霍尔传感器检测检测磁铁的磁场强度;The Hall sensor detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet;
当确认出磁场强度不等于预设磁场强度时,控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜自固定位置沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动目标位置。When it is confirmed that the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength, the moving bracket is controlled to drive the first lens to move the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens from the fixed position.
可以理解的是,当移动支架沿X轴方向向目标位置移动时,移动支架容易出现未移动至目标位置。本实施方式利用霍尔传感器测量检测磁铁所处位置的磁场强度,并判断该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度是否相等。当该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度不相等时,驱动件能够继续推动移动支架沿X轴方向移动,以使移动支架准确地移动至目标位置。故而,通过设置霍尔传感器与检测磁铁,能够显著地提高移动支架沿X轴方向移动的准确度。It can be understood that, when the moving bracket moves toward the target position along the X-axis direction, the moving bracket is likely to fail to move to the target position. In this embodiment, the Hall sensor is used to measure the magnetic field strength at the position where the detection magnet is located, and it is determined whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position. When the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position, the driving member can continue to push the movable bracket to move along the X-axis direction, so that the movable bracket can accurately move to the target position. Therefore, by providing the Hall sensor and the detection magnet, the accuracy of the movement of the movable bracket in the X-axis direction can be significantly improved.
附图说明Description of drawings
为了说明本申请实施例的技术方案,下面将对本申请实施例中所需要使用的附图进行说明。In order to illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the accompanying drawings that need to be used in the embodiments of the present application will be described below.
图1是本申请实施例提供的电子设备的结构示意图;1 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2是图1所示的电子设备的部分分解示意图;Fig. 2 is a partial exploded schematic view of the electronic device shown in Fig. 1;
图3是图1所示的电子设备在A-A线处的部分剖面示意图;3 is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the electronic device shown in FIG. 1 at line A-A;
图4是图1所示的电子设备的摄像模组的结构示意图;Fig. 4 is the structural representation of the camera module of the electronic device shown in Fig. 1;
图5是图4所示的摄像模组的部分分解示意图;5 is a partially exploded schematic view of the camera module shown in FIG. 4;
图6是图5所示的光学镜头的部分分解示意图;6 is a partially exploded schematic view of the optical lens shown in FIG. 5;
图7是图6所示的镜头组件的一种实施方式的部分分解示意图;FIG. 7 is a partially exploded schematic view of an embodiment of the lens assembly shown in FIG. 6;
图8是图7所示的马达的部分分解示意图;FIG. 8 is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor shown in FIG. 7;
图9是图7所示的马达的部分分解示意图;FIG. 9 is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor shown in FIG. 7;
图10是图7所示的马达的部分分解示意图;Figure 10 is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor shown in Figure 7;
图11是图4所示的摄像模组在第一种实施方式下的部分结构示意图;11 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment;
图12是图4所示的摄像模组在第一种实施方式下的部分结构示意图;12 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment;
图13是图4所示的摄像模组在第一种实施方式下的部分结构示意图;13 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment;
图14是图13所示的自锁组件的部分分解示意图;Figure 14 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 13;
图15是图13所示的摄像模组的部分结构示意图;Fig. 15 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in Fig. 13;
图16是图14所示的自锁件的分解示意图;Figure 16 is an exploded schematic view of the self-locking member shown in Figure 14;
图17是图4所示的摄像模组在第一种实施方式下的结构的一种状态的示意图;17 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment;
图18是图17所示的部分摄像模组在B处的放大示意图;Figure 18 is an enlarged schematic view of part of the camera module shown in Figure 17 at B;
图19是图4所示的摄像模组在第一种实施方式下的结构的另一种状态下的示意图;19 is a schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 in another state of the structure of the first embodiment;
图20是图1所示的摄像模组在第一种实施方式下的拍摄方法的流程示意图;20 is a schematic flowchart of a shooting method of the camera module shown in FIG. 1 under the first embodiment;
图21是图6所示的镜头组件的另一种实施方式的部分分解示意图;FIG. 21 is a partially exploded schematic view of another embodiment of the lens assembly shown in FIG. 6;
图22是图4所示的摄像模组在第二种实施方式下的部分结构示意图;22 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the second embodiment;
图23是图22所示的自锁组件的部分分解示意图;Figure 23 is a partial exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 22;
图24是图23所示的自锁件的分解示意图;Figure 24 is an exploded schematic view of the self-locking member shown in Figure 23;
图25是图22所示的自锁组件的部分分解示意图;Figure 25 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 22;
图26是图4所示的摄像模组在第二种实施方式下的结构的一种状态的示意图;26 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the second embodiment;
图27是图26所示的部分摄像模组在C处的放大示意图;Figure 27 is an enlarged schematic view of the part of the camera module shown in Figure 26 at C;
图28是图4所示的摄像模组在第二种实施方式下的结构的另一种状态的示意图;28 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the second embodiment;
图29是图6所示的镜头组件的再一种实施方式的部分分解示意图;FIG. 29 is a partially exploded schematic view of still another embodiment of the lens assembly shown in FIG. 6;
图30是图4所示的摄像模组在第三种实施方式下的结构的一种状态的示意图;30 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the third embodiment;
图31是图30所示的自锁组件的部分分解示意图;Figure 31 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 30;
图32是图30所示的第二卡扣件的部分分解示意图;Fig. 32 is a partial exploded schematic view of the second clip shown in Fig. 30;
图33是图31所示的第二卡扣件的部分结构示意图;Fig. 33 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the second clip shown in Fig. 31;
图34是图31所示的第二卡扣件的部分结构示意图;Fig. 34 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the second clip shown in Fig. 31;
图35是图30所示的部分摄像模组在D处的放大示意图;Figure 35 is an enlarged schematic view of the part of the camera module shown in Figure 30 at D;
图36是图4所示的摄像模组在第三种实施方式下的结构的另一种状态的示意图;36 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the third embodiment;
图37是图1所示的摄像模组在第三种实施方式下的拍摄方法的流程示意图;37 is a schematic flowchart of a shooting method of the camera module shown in FIG. 1 under a third embodiment;
图38是图6所示的镜头组件的再一种实施方式的部分分解示意图;38 is a partially exploded schematic view of still another embodiment of the lens assembly shown in FIG. 6;
图39是图4所示的摄像模组在第四种实施方式下的结构的一种状态的示意图;39 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the fourth embodiment;
图40是图39所示的自锁组件的部分分解示意图;Figure 40 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 39;
图41是图40所示的第二卡扣件的部分分解示意图;Figure 41 is a partially exploded schematic view of the second clip shown in Figure 40;
图42是图39所示的自锁组件的部分结构示意图;Figure 42 is a partial structural schematic view of the self-locking assembly shown in Figure 39;
图43是图39所示的部分摄像模组在E处的放大示意图;Figure 43 is an enlarged schematic view of the part of the camera module shown in Figure 39 at E;
图44是图4所示的摄像模组在第四种实施方式下的结构的另一种状态的示意图。FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 4 under the fourth embodiment.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。The embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
请参阅图1,图1是本申请实施例提供的电子设备1的结构示意图。电子设备1可以为手机、平板电脑(tablet personal computer)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、个人数码助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、照相机、个人计算机、笔记本电脑、车载设备、可穿戴设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)眼镜、AR头盔、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)眼镜或者VR头盔、或者具有拍照及摄像功能的其他形态的设备。图1所示实施例的电子设备1以手机为例进行阐述。Please refer to FIG. 1 , which is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 1 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The electronic device 1 may be a mobile phone, a tablet personal computer, a laptop computer, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a camera, a personal computer, a notebook computer, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, Augmented reality (AR) glasses, AR helmets, virtual reality (VR) glasses or VR helmets, or other forms of equipment with photography and videography functions. The electronic device 1 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 is described by taking a mobile phone as an example.
请参阅图2,并结合图1所示,图2是图1所示的电子设备1的部分分解示意图。电子设备1包括壳体70、屏幕80、主机电路板90及摄像模组100。需要说明的是,图1、图2以及下文相关附图仅示意性的示出了电子设备1包括的一些部件,这些部件的实际形状、实际大小、实际位置和实际构造不受图1、图2以及下文各附图限定。此外,当电子设备1为一些其他形态的设备时,电子设备1也可以不包括屏幕80以及主机电路板90。Please refer to FIG. 2 in combination with FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a partial exploded schematic view of the electronic device 1 shown in FIG. 1 . The electronic device 1 includes a casing 70 , a screen 80 , a host circuit board 90 and a camera module 100 . It should be noted that FIGS. 1, 2 and the following related drawings only schematically show some components included in the electronic device 1, and the actual shapes, actual sizes, actual positions and actual structures of these components are not affected by those shown in FIGS. 1 and 1. 2 and the accompanying drawings below. In addition, when the electronic device 1 is some other device, the electronic device 1 may also not include the screen 80 and the host circuit board 90 .
为了便于描述,定义电子设备1的宽度方向为X轴。电子设备1的长度方向为Y轴。电子设备1的厚度方向为Z轴。可以理解的是,电子设备1的坐标系设置可以根据具体实际需要灵活设置。For the convenience of description, the width direction of the electronic device 1 is defined as the X axis. The longitudinal direction of the electronic device 1 is the Y axis. The thickness direction of the electronic device 1 is the Z axis. It can be understood that, the coordinate system setting of the electronic device 1 can be flexibly set according to specific actual needs.
其中,壳体70包括边框71以及后盖72。后盖72固定于边框71的一侧。一种实施方式中,后盖72通过粘胶固定连接于边框71。在另一种实施方式中,后盖72与边框71形成一体成型结构,即后盖72与边框71为一个整体结构。The housing 70 includes a frame 71 and a back cover 72 . The rear cover 72 is fixed to one side of the frame 71 . In one embodiment, the back cover 72 is fixedly connected to the frame 71 by adhesive. In another embodiment, the rear cover 72 and the frame 71 form an integral molding structure, that is, the rear cover 72 and the frame 71 are an integral structure.
在其他实施例中,壳体70也可以包括中板(图未示)。中板连接于边框71的内表面。中板与后盖72相对且间隔设置。In other embodiments, the housing 70 may also include a midplane (not shown). The middle plate is connected to the inner surface of the frame 71 . The middle plate is opposite to and spaced apart from the rear cover 72 .
请再次参阅图2,屏幕80固定于边框71的另一侧。此时,屏幕80与后盖72相对设置。屏幕80、边框71与后盖72共同围出电子设备1的内部。电子设备1的内部可用于放置电子设备1的器件,例如电池、受话器以及麦克风等。Please refer to FIG. 2 again, the screen 80 is fixed on the other side of the frame 71 . At this time, the screen 80 is disposed opposite to the rear cover 72 . The screen 80 , the frame 71 and the back cover 72 together enclose the interior of the electronic device 1 . The interior of the electronic device 1 can be used to place components of the electronic device 1 , such as a battery, a receiver, and a microphone.
在本实施例中,屏幕80可用于显示图像、文字等。屏幕80可以为平面屏,也可以为曲面屏。屏幕80包括第一盖板81和显示屏82。第一盖板81层叠于显示屏82。第一盖板81可以紧贴显示屏82设置,可主要用于对显示屏82起到保护以及防尘作用。第一盖板81的材质可以为但不仅限于为玻璃。显示屏82可以采用有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED)显示屏,有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light-emitting diode,AMOLED)显示屏,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)显示屏等。In this embodiment, the screen 80 may be used to display images, text, and the like. The screen 80 may be a flat screen or a curved screen. The screen 80 includes a first cover 81 and a display screen 82 . The first cover plate 81 is stacked on the display screen 82 . The first cover plate 81 can be disposed close to the display screen 82 , and can be mainly used for protecting and dustproofing the display screen 82 . The material of the first cover plate 81 may be, but not limited to, glass. The display screen 82 can adopt an organic light-emitting diode (organic light-emitting diode, OLED) display screen, an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode, AMOLED) display screen , quantum dot light emitting diode (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED) display, etc.
请参阅图3,并结合图2所示,图3是图1所示的电子设备1在A-A线处的部分剖面示意图。主机电路板90固定于电子设备1的内部。具体的,主机电路板90可以固定于屏幕80朝向后盖72的一侧。在其他实施例中,当壳体70包括中板时,主机电路板90可以固定于中板朝向后盖72的表面。Please refer to FIG. 3 in conjunction with FIG. 2 . FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the electronic device 1 shown in FIG. 1 at the line A-A. The host circuit board 90 is fixed inside the electronic device 1 . Specifically, the host circuit board 90 may be fixed to the side of the screen 80 facing the back cover 72 . In other embodiments, when the housing 70 includes a midplane, the host circuit board 90 may be fixed to the surface of the midplane facing the rear cover 72 .
可以理解的是,主机电路板90可以为硬质电路板,也可以为柔性电路板,也可以为软硬结合电路板。主机电路板90可以采用FR-4介质板,也可以采用罗杰斯(Rogers)介质板, 也可以采用FR-4和Rogers的混合介质板,等等。这里,FR-4是一种耐燃材料等级的代号,Rogers介质板为一种高频板。另外,主机电路板90可以用于设置芯片。例如,芯片可以为中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU)以及通用存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。It can be understood that the host circuit board 90 may be a rigid circuit board, a flexible circuit board, or a flexible-rigid circuit board. The host circuit board 90 may use an FR-4 dielectric board, a Rogers (Rogers) dielectric board, or a mixed FR-4 and Rogers dielectric board, and so on. Here, FR-4 is the code name for a flame-resistant material grade, and the Rogers dielectric board is a high-frequency board. Additionally, the host circuit board 90 may be used to house the chips. For example, the chip may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), and a universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like.
请再次参阅图3,并结合图2所示,摄像模组100固定于电子设备1的内部。具体的,摄像模组100固定于屏幕80朝向后盖72的一侧。在其他实施例中,当壳体70包括中板时,摄像模组100可以固定于中板朝向后盖72的表面。Please refer to FIG. 3 again, and with reference to FIG. 2 , the camera module 100 is fixed inside the electronic device 1 . Specifically, the camera module 100 is fixed on the side of the screen 80 facing the back cover 72 . In other embodiments, when the housing 70 includes a middle plate, the camera module 100 can be fixed on the surface of the middle plate facing the rear cover 72 .
另外,主机电路板90设置有避让空间91。避让空间91的形状不仅限于图1与图2所示意的矩形状。此时,主机电路板90的形状也不限于图1与图2所示意的“┘”型。摄像模组100位于避让空间91内。这样,在Z轴方向上,摄像模组100与主机电路板90具有重叠区域,从而避免了因摄像模组100堆叠于主机电路板90而导致电子设备1的厚度增大。在其他实施例中,主机电路板90也可以未设置避让空间91。此时,摄像模组100可以堆叠于主机电路板90,或者与主机电路板90间隔设置。In addition, the host circuit board 90 is provided with an escape space 91 . The shape of the avoidance space 91 is not limited to the rectangular shape illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 . At this time, the shape of the host circuit board 90 is not limited to the "┘" shape shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 . The camera module 100 is located in the avoidance space 91 . In this way, in the Z-axis direction, the camera module 100 and the host circuit board 90 have an overlapping area, so as to avoid an increase in the thickness of the electronic device 1 due to the camera module 100 being stacked on the host circuit board 90 . In other embodiments, the host circuit board 90 may not be provided with the avoidance space 91 . At this time, the camera module 100 may be stacked on the host circuit board 90 , or disposed at intervals from the host circuit board 90 .
在本实施例中,摄像模组100电连接于主机电路板90。具体的,摄像模组100通过主机电路板90电连接于CPU。当CPU接收到用户的指令时,CPU能够通过主机电路板90向摄像模组100发送信号,以控制摄像模组100拍摄图像或者录像。在其他实施例中,当电子设备1未设置主机电路板90时,摄像模组100也可以直接接收用户的指令,并根据用户的指令进行拍摄图像或者录像。In this embodiment, the camera module 100 is electrically connected to the host circuit board 90 . Specifically, the camera module 100 is electrically connected to the CPU through the host circuit board 90 . When the CPU receives the user's instruction, the CPU can send a signal to the camera module 100 through the host circuit board 90 to control the camera module 100 to capture images or record videos. In other embodiments, when the electronic device 1 is not provided with the host circuit board 90 , the camera module 100 can also directly receive the user's instruction, and take images or video according to the user's instruction.
请再次参阅图3,后盖72开设有通孔73。通孔73将电子设备1的内部连通至电子设备1的外部。电子设备1还包括摄像头装饰件61和第二盖板62。部分摄像头装饰件61可以固定于后盖72的内表面,部分摄像头装饰件61接触于通孔73的孔壁。第二盖板62固定连接在摄像头装饰件61的内表面。摄像头装饰件61与第二盖板62将电子设备1的内部与电子设备1的外部隔开,从而避免外界的水或者灰尘经通孔73进入电子设备1的内部。第二盖板62的材质为透明材料。例如,玻璃或者塑料。此时,电子设备1外部的环境光线能够穿过第二盖板62进入电子设备1的内部。摄像模组100采集进入电子设备1内部的环境光线。Please refer to FIG. 3 again, the rear cover 72 defines a through hole 73 . The through hole 73 communicates the inside of the electronic device 1 to the outside of the electronic device 1 . The electronic device 1 further includes a camera decoration part 61 and a second cover plate 62 . Part of the camera decorations 61 may be fixed on the inner surface of the back cover 72 , and some of the camera decorations 61 are in contact with the hole walls of the through holes 73 . The second cover plate 62 is fixedly connected to the inner surface of the camera decorative piece 61 . The camera decoration 61 and the second cover 62 separate the inside of the electronic device 1 from the outside of the electronic device 1 , so as to prevent water or dust from entering the inside of the electronic device 1 through the through hole 73 . The material of the second cover plate 62 is a transparent material. For example, glass or plastic. At this time, ambient light outside the electronic device 1 can enter the interior of the electronic device 1 through the second cover plate 62 . The camera module 100 collects ambient light entering the interior of the electronic device 1 .
可以理解的是,通孔73的形状不仅限于附图1及附图2所示意的圆形。例如,通孔73的形状也可以为椭圆形或者其他不规则图形等。It can be understood that the shape of the through hole 73 is not limited to the circle shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 . For example, the shape of the through hole 73 may also be an ellipse or other irregular shapes.
在其他实施例中,摄像模组100也可以采集穿过后盖72的环境光线。具体的,后盖72的材质为透明材料。例如,玻璃或者塑料。后盖72朝向电子设备1内部的表面部分涂覆油墨,部分未涂覆油墨。此时,未涂覆油墨的区域形成透光区域。当环境光线经该透光区域进入电子设备1的内部时,摄像模组100采集环境光线。可以理解的是,本实施例的电子设备1可以不用开设通孔73,也可以不用设置摄像头装饰件61和第二盖板62。电子设备1的整体性较佳,成本较低。In other embodiments, the camera module 100 can also collect ambient light passing through the back cover 72 . Specifically, the material of the back cover 72 is a transparent material. For example, glass or plastic. The surface of the rear cover 72 facing the inside of the electronic device 1 is partially coated with ink and partially uncoated with ink. At this time, the area where the ink is not applied forms the light-transmitting area. When ambient light enters the interior of the electronic device 1 through the light-transmitting area, the camera module 100 collects ambient light. It can be understood that, the electronic device 1 of this embodiment may not need to open the through hole 73 , nor may the camera decorative member 61 and the second cover plate 62 be provided. The electronic device 1 has better integrity and lower cost.
如图4及图5所示,图4是图1所示的电子设备1的摄像模组100的结构示意图。图5是图4所示的摄像模组100的部分分解示意图。摄像模组100包括光学镜头10、模组电路板20、感光芯片30以及滤光片40。需要说明的是,光学镜头10的光轴方向与摄像模组100的光轴方向相同。As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 , FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 100 of the electronic device 1 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is a partially exploded schematic view of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 . The camera module 100 includes an optical lens 10 , a module circuit board 20 , a photosensitive chip 30 and a filter 40 . It should be noted that the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 is the same as the optical axis direction of the camera module 100 .
其中,模组电路板20固定于光学镜头10的出光侧,也即模组电路板20位于光学镜头10的像侧。图4示意了模组电路板20与光学镜头10大致围成长方体的形状。结合图3所示,模组电路板20可以电连接于主机电路板90。这样,信号能够在主机电路板90与模组电路板20之间传输。The module circuit board 20 is fixed on the light-emitting side of the optical lens 10 , that is, the module circuit board 20 is located on the image side of the optical lens 10 . FIG. 4 illustrates that the module circuit board 20 and the optical lens 10 roughly enclose the shape of a cuboid. As shown in FIG. 3 , the module circuit board 20 can be electrically connected to the host circuit board 90 . In this way, signals can be transmitted between the host circuit board 90 and the module circuit board 20 .
其中,模组电路板20可以为硬质电路板,也可以为柔性电路板,也可以为软硬结合电路板。此外,模组电路板20可以采用FR-4介质板,也可以采用罗杰斯(Rogers)介质板,也可以采用Rogers和FR-4的混合介质板,等等。The modular circuit board 20 may be a rigid circuit board, a flexible circuit board, or a flexible-rigid circuit board. In addition, the modular circuit board 20 may use an FR-4 dielectric board, a Rogers (Rogers) dielectric board, or a mixed media board of Rogers and FR-4, and so on.
请再次参阅图3,感光芯片30固定于模组电路板20朝向光学镜头10的一侧。感光芯片30与模组电路板20电连接。这样,当感光芯片30采集环境光线之后,感光芯片30根据环境光线产生信号,并将信号经模组电路板20传输至主机电路板90。Please refer to FIG. 3 again, the photosensitive chip 30 is fixed on the side of the module circuit board 20 facing the optical lens 10 . The photosensitive chip 30 is electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 . In this way, after the photosensitive chip 30 collects the ambient light, the photosensitive chip 30 generates a signal according to the ambient light, and transmits the signal to the host circuit board 90 via the module circuit board 20 .
一种实施方式中,感光芯片30可以通过板上芯片封装(chif on board,COB)技术贴装在模组电路板20。在其他实施方式中,感光芯片30也可以通过焊球阵列封装(ball grid array,BGA)技术或者栅格阵列封装(land grid array,LGA)技术封装在模组电路板20。In one embodiment, the photosensitive chip 30 may be mounted on the module circuit board 20 through a chip on board (COB) technology. In other embodiments, the photosensitive chip 30 may also be packaged on the module circuit board 20 by a ball grid array (BGA) technology or a land grid array (LGA) technology.
在其他实施方式中,模组电路板20上还安装有电子元器件或者其他芯片(例如驱动芯片)。电子元器件或者其他芯片设于感光芯片30的周边。电子元器件或者其他芯片用于辅助感光芯片30采集环境光线,以及辅助感光芯片30对所采集的环境光线进行信号处理。In other embodiments, electronic components or other chips (eg, driver chips) are also mounted on the modular circuit board 20 . Electronic components or other chips are arranged around the photosensitive chip 30 . The electronic components or other chips are used to assist the photosensitive chip 30 to collect ambient light, and to assist the photosensitive chip 30 to perform signal processing on the collected ambient light.
在其他实施方式中,模组电路板20远离感光芯片30的一侧面设置有补强板。例如,补强板为钢板。补强板能够提高模组电路板20的强度。In other embodiments, a reinforcing plate is provided on a side of the module circuit board 20 away from the photosensitive chip 30 . For example, the reinforcing plate is a steel plate. The reinforcing plate can improve the strength of the module circuit board 20 .
在其他实施方式中,模组电路板20也可以在局部设置沉槽,此时,感光芯片30可安装于沉槽内。这样,感光芯片30与模组电路板20在X轴方向上具有重叠区域,此时,摄像模组100在X轴方向上可以设置得较薄。In other embodiments, the module circuit board 20 may also be partially provided with a sink, and in this case, the photosensitive chip 30 may be installed in the sink. In this way, the photosensitive chip 30 and the module circuit board 20 have an overlapping area in the X-axis direction, and at this time, the camera module 100 can be set thinner in the X-axis direction.
请再次参阅图3,滤光片40位于感光芯片30朝向光学镜头10的一侧。滤光片40可以用于过滤穿过光学镜头10的环境光线的杂光,并使过滤后的环境光线传播至感光芯片30,从而保证电子设备1拍摄图像具有较佳的清晰度。滤光片40可以为但不仅限于为蓝色玻璃滤光片。例如,滤光片40还可以为反射式红外滤光片,或者是双通滤光片(双通滤光片可使环境光线中的可见光和红外光同时透过,或者使环境光线中的可见光和其他特定波长的光线(例如紫外光)同时透过,或者使红外光和其他特定波长的光线(例如紫外光)同时透过。)。Please refer to FIG. 3 again, the filter 40 is located on the side of the photosensitive chip 30 facing the optical lens 10 . The filter 40 can be used to filter the stray light of ambient light passing through the optical lens 10 , and make the filtered ambient light propagate to the photosensitive chip 30 , so as to ensure that the image captured by the electronic device 1 has better clarity. The filter 40 may be, but is not limited to, a blue glass filter. For example, the filter 40 can also be a reflective infrared filter, or a double-pass filter (the double-pass filter can transmit visible light and infrared light in ambient light at the same time, or allow visible light in ambient light to pass through at the same time. It transmits light of other specific wavelengths (such as ultraviolet light) at the same time, or transmits infrared light and light of other specific wavelengths (such as ultraviolet light) at the same time.).
请参阅图6,图6是图5所示的光学镜头10的部分分解示意图。光学镜头10包括镜头组件101以及反射组件11。镜头组件101的光轴方向与光学镜头10的光轴方向相同。反射组件11固定于镜头组件101的入光侧。图5示意了反射组件11与镜头组件101大致围成长方体的形状。其中,反射组件11用于反射环境光线,以使环境光线传输至镜头组件101内。在本实施例中,反射组件11可以用于将沿Z轴方向传播的环境光线反射至沿X轴方向传播的环境光线。在其他实施例中,反射组件11可以用于将沿Z轴方向传播的环境光线反射至沿其他方向传播的环境光线。Please refer to FIG. 6 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of the optical lens 10 shown in FIG. 5 . The optical lens 10 includes a lens assembly 101 and a reflection assembly 11 . The optical axis direction of the lens assembly 101 is the same as the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 . The reflection assembly 11 is fixed on the light incident side of the lens assembly 101 . FIG. 5 illustrates the shape of the reflection assembly 11 and the lens assembly 101 roughly enclosing a rectangular parallelepiped. Wherein, the reflection component 11 is used for reflecting the ambient light, so that the ambient light is transmitted to the lens component 101 . In this embodiment, the reflection component 11 may be used to reflect the ambient light propagating along the Z-axis direction to the ambient light propagating along the X-axis direction. In other embodiments, the reflection component 11 may be used to reflect ambient light propagating along the Z-axis direction to ambient light propagating in other directions.
其中,反射组件11包括棱镜马达111及反射件112。棱镜马达111固定于镜头组件101的入光侧。反射件112位于棱镜马达111的内部。反射件112可以为三棱镜,也可以为反射镜。本实施例的反射件112以三棱镜为例进行描述。需要说明的是,下文三棱镜的标号与反射件112的标号相同。The reflecting assembly 11 includes a prism motor 111 and a reflecting member 112 . The prism motor 111 is fixed to the light incident side of the lens assembly 101 . The reflector 112 is located inside the prism motor 111 . The reflector 112 may be a triangular prism or a reflector. The reflecting member 112 in this embodiment is described by taking a triangular prism as an example. It should be noted that the reference numerals of the triangular prisms below are the same as those of the reflector 112 .
请再次参阅图6,棱镜马达111设有第一透光孔1111。第一透光孔1111将棱镜马达111的内部连通至棱镜马达111的外部。第一透光孔1111的形状不仅限于图6所示意的长方形。结合图3所示,第一透光孔1111与第二盖板62相对设置。此时,电子设备1外部的环境光线能够经第二盖板62、第一透光孔1111进入棱镜马达111的内部。Please refer to FIG. 6 again, the prism motor 111 is provided with a first light-transmitting hole 1111 . The first light-transmitting hole 1111 communicates the inside of the prism motor 111 to the outside of the prism motor 111 . The shape of the first light-transmitting hole 1111 is not limited to the rectangle shown in FIG. 6 . As shown in FIG. 3 , the first light-transmitting hole 1111 is disposed opposite to the second cover plate 62 . At this time, ambient light outside the electronic device 1 can enter the interior of the prism motor 111 through the second cover plate 62 and the first light-transmitting hole 1111 .
请再次参阅图3,棱镜马达111设有第二透光孔1112。第二透光孔1112将棱镜马达111的内部连通至棱镜马达111的外部。第二透光孔1112朝向镜头组件101。Please refer to FIG. 3 again, the prism motor 111 is provided with a second light-transmitting hole 1112 . The second light-transmitting hole 1112 communicates the inside of the prism motor 111 to the outside of the prism motor 111 . The second light-transmitting hole 1112 faces the lens assembly 101 .
另外,三棱镜112包括入光面1121、反射面1122以及出光面1123。反射面1122连接于 入光面1121与出光面1123之间。入光面1121与第一透光孔1111相对设置。出光面1123与第二透光孔1112相对设置。此时,当环境光线经第一透光孔1111进入棱镜马达111的内部时,环境光线经入光面1121进入三棱镜112内,并在三棱镜112的反射面1122处进行反射。此时,沿Z轴方向传播的环境光线被反射至沿X轴方向传播。最后,环境光线再经三棱镜112的出光面1123传出三棱镜112的外部,并经第二透光孔1112传出棱镜马达111的外部。In addition, the triangular prism 112 includes a light incident surface 1121 , a reflection surface 1122 and a light exit surface 1123 . The reflective surface 1122 is connected between the light incident surface 1121 and the light exit surface 1123. The light incident surface 1121 is disposed opposite to the first light transmission hole 1111 . The light-emitting surface 1123 is disposed opposite to the second light-transmitting hole 1112 . At this time, when ambient light enters the prism motor 111 through the first light-transmitting hole 1111 , the ambient light enters the triangular prism 112 through the light incident surface 1121 and is reflected at the reflective surface 1122 of the triangular prism 112 . At this time, ambient light propagating in the Z-axis direction is reflected to propagate in the X-axis direction. Finally, the ambient light is transmitted out of the triangular prism 112 through the light emitting surface 1123 of the triangular prism 112 and out of the prism motor 111 through the second light-transmitting hole 1112 .
可以理解的是,通过在棱镜马达111的内部设置三棱镜112,从而利用三棱镜112将沿Z轴方向传播的环境光线反射至沿X轴方向传播。这样,接收沿X轴方向传播的环境光线的摄像模组100的器件可以沿X轴方向排布。由于电子设备1在X轴方向的尺寸较大,摄像模组100内的器件在X轴方向的排布更加的灵活,更加简单。在本实施例中,摄像模组100的光轴方向为X轴方向。在其他实施例中,摄像模组100的光轴方向也可以为Y轴方向。It can be understood that by arranging the triangular prism 112 inside the prism motor 111 , the triangular prism 112 is used to reflect the ambient light propagating in the Z-axis direction to propagating in the X-axis direction. In this way, the components of the camera module 100 that receive ambient light propagating along the X-axis direction can be arranged along the X-axis direction. Since the size of the electronic device 1 in the X-axis direction is relatively large, the arrangement of the components in the camera module 100 in the X-axis direction is more flexible and simpler. In this embodiment, the optical axis direction of the camera module 100 is the X axis direction. In other embodiments, the optical axis direction of the camera module 100 may also be the Y axis direction.
请再次参阅图6,并结合图3所示,三棱镜112可以转动连接于棱镜马达111。在本实施例中,三棱镜112能够以Y轴为转动轴,在XZ平面转动。另外,三棱镜112也能够以Z轴为转动轴,在XY平面转动。可以理解的是,摄像模组100在采集环境光线的过程中容易发生抖动,此时,环境光线的传输路径容易发生偏折,从而导致摄像模组100拍摄的图像不佳。在本实施例中,当环境光线的传输路径发生偏折时,棱镜马达111能够驱动三棱镜112转动,从而利用三棱镜112来调整环境光线的传输路径,减少或者避免环境光线的传输路径发生偏折,进而保证摄像模组100具有较佳的拍摄效果。故而,反射组件11可以起到光学防抖的效果。Please refer to FIG. 6 again, and in conjunction with FIG. 3 , the triangular prism 112 is rotatably connected to the prism motor 111 . In this embodiment, the triangular prism 112 can rotate on the XZ plane with the Y axis as the rotation axis. In addition, the triangular prism 112 can also be rotated in the XY plane with the Z axis as the rotation axis. It can be understood that the camera module 100 is prone to shake during the process of collecting ambient light, and at this time, the transmission path of the ambient light is prone to deflection, resulting in poor images captured by the camera module 100 . In this embodiment, when the transmission path of the ambient light is deflected, the prism motor 111 can drive the triangular prism 112 to rotate, so that the triangular prism 112 is used to adjust the transmission path of the ambient light and reduce or avoid the deflection of the transmission path of the ambient light. Thus, it is ensured that the camera module 100 has a better shooting effect. Therefore, the reflection component 11 can play an optical anti-shake effect.
在其他实施例中,三棱镜112也可以固定连接于棱镜马达111或者也可以滑动连接于棱镜马达111。In other embodiments, the triangular prism 112 can also be fixedly connected to the prism motor 111 or can be slidably connected to the prism motor 111 .
在本实施例中,镜头组件101具有多种设置方式。下文将结合相关附图具体介绍镜头组件101的几种设置方式。In this embodiment, the lens assembly 101 has various arrangement modes. Several ways of setting the lens assembly 101 will be described in detail below with reference to the related drawings.
第一种实施方式:请参阅图7,图7是图6所示的镜头组件101的一种实施方式的部分分解示意图。镜头组件101包括外壳12、马达14、透镜15、镜头电路板16、霍尔传感器171、检测磁铁172以及自锁组件50。The first embodiment: please refer to FIG. 7 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of an embodiment of the lens assembly 101 shown in FIG. 6 . The lens assembly 101 includes a housing 12 , a motor 14 , a lens 15 , a lens circuit board 16 , a hall sensor 171 , a detection magnet 172 and a self-locking assembly 50 .
其中,外壳12包括上盖121及底板122。上盖121安装于底板122。上盖121与底板122围成大致长方体。需要说明的是,图7的上方的标记122在图7的下方已经清楚地标记所对应的结构。图7的上方标记122主要说明底板122与上盖121均属于外壳12。The housing 12 includes an upper cover 121 and a bottom plate 122 . The upper cover 121 is mounted on the bottom plate 122 . The upper cover 121 and the bottom plate 122 form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped. It should be noted that, the symbols 122 at the top of FIG. 7 have clearly marked the corresponding structures at the bottom of FIG. 7 . The upper mark 122 in FIG. 7 mainly indicates that both the bottom plate 122 and the upper cover 121 belong to the casing 12 .
另外,上盖121包括右侧板1212、上侧板1215以及相对设置的前侧板1213与后侧板1214。右侧板1212连接在前侧板1213与后侧板1214之间。上侧板1215连接在前侧板1213与后侧板1214之间。In addition, the upper cover 121 includes a right side panel 1212 , an upper side panel 1215 , and a front side panel 1213 and a rear side panel 1214 disposed opposite to each other. The right side plate 1212 is connected between the front side plate 1213 and the rear side plate 1214 . The upper side plate 1215 is connected between the front side plate 1213 and the rear side plate 1214 .
另外,右侧板1212设有第三透光孔1211。第三透光孔1211将外壳12的内部连通至外壳12的外部。第三透光孔1211的形状不仅限于图6与图7所示意的长方形。结合图3所示,第三透光孔1211与第二透光孔1112相对设置。当环境光线经第二透光孔1112传出反射组件11的外部时,环境光线经第三透光孔1211传播至镜头组件101的内部。In addition, the right side plate 1212 is provided with a third light-transmitting hole 1211 . The third light-transmitting hole 1211 communicates the inside of the housing 12 to the outside of the housing 12 . The shape of the third light-transmitting hole 1211 is not limited to the rectangle shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 . As shown in FIG. 3 , the third light-transmitting hole 1211 and the second light-transmitting hole 1112 are disposed opposite to each other. When the ambient light is transmitted to the outside of the reflection element 11 through the second light-transmitting hole 1112 , the ambient light is transmitted to the inside of the lens element 101 through the third light-transmitting hole 1211 .
请参阅图8,图8是图7所示的马达14的部分分解示意图。马达14包括基板13、导轨141、固定支架142、第一移动支架143、第二移动支架144、第一磁铁145、第一线圈146、第二磁铁147以及第二线圈148。可以理解的是,第一磁铁145与第一线圈146形成第一驱动件。第二磁铁147以及第二线圈148形成第二驱动件。第一驱动件用于驱动第一移动支架143沿X轴方向移动。第二驱动件用于驱动第二移动支架144沿X轴方向移动。在其他实施例中,驱动件的数量不仅限于本实施例所示意的两个。移动支架也不仅限于本实施例所示意 的两个。Please refer to FIG. 8 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor 14 shown in FIG. 7 . The motor 14 includes a base plate 13 , a guide rail 141 , a fixed bracket 142 , a first moving bracket 143 , a second moving bracket 144 , a first magnet 145 , a first coil 146 , a second magnet 147 and a second coil 148 . It can be understood that the first magnet 145 and the first coil 146 form a first driving member. The second magnet 147 and the second coil 148 form a second driving member. The first driving member is used to drive the first moving bracket 143 to move along the X-axis direction. The second driving member is used for driving the second moving bracket 144 to move along the X-axis direction. In other embodiments, the number of driving members is not limited to the two shown in this embodiment. The moving brackets are not limited to the two illustrated in this embodiment.
其中,基板13为板状结构。基板13设有第四透光孔131。第四透光孔131贯穿基板13相对的两个表面。结合图6所示,基板13固定于外壳12远离第三透光孔1211的一侧。基板13与外壳12大致围成长方体。结合图3所示,图3也示意了基板13固定于外壳12远离第三透光孔1211的一侧。第四透光孔131将外壳12的内部连通至外壳12的外部。另外,感光芯片30与滤光片40均位于第四透光孔131内,且滤光片40固定于第四透光孔131的孔壁。这样,当环境光线经第三透光孔1211传播至外壳12的内部时,环境光线可以经第四透光孔131依次传播至滤光片40和感光芯片30。The substrate 13 has a plate-like structure. The substrate 13 is provided with a fourth light-transmitting hole 131 . The fourth light-transmitting holes 131 penetrate through two opposite surfaces of the substrate 13 . Referring to FIG. 6 , the substrate 13 is fixed to the side of the housing 12 away from the third light-transmitting hole 1211 . The substrate 13 and the housing 12 substantially enclose a rectangular parallelepiped. With reference to FIG. 3 , FIG. 3 also illustrates that the substrate 13 is fixed to the side of the housing 12 away from the third light-transmitting hole 1211 . The fourth light-transmitting hole 131 communicates the inside of the housing 12 to the outside of the housing 12 . In addition, the photosensitive chip 30 and the light filter 40 are both located in the fourth light transmission hole 131 , and the light filter 40 is fixed on the hole wall of the fourth light transmission hole 131 . In this way, when the ambient light propagates to the inside of the housing 12 through the third light-transmitting hole 1211 , the ambient light can propagate to the filter 40 and the photosensitive chip 30 in sequence through the fourth light-transmitting hole 131 .
请再次参阅图8,基板13开设有多个第一固定孔132。第一固定孔132的数量不仅限于附图8所示意的四个。多个第一固定孔132均贯穿基板13相对的两个表面。多个第一固定孔132位于第四透光孔131的周边。Please refer to FIG. 8 again, the substrate 13 defines a plurality of first fixing holes 132 . The number of the first fixing holes 132 is not limited to the four shown in FIG. 8 . The plurality of first fixing holes 132 penetrate through two opposite surfaces of the substrate 13 . The plurality of first fixing holes 132 are located at the periphery of the fourth light-transmitting hole 131 .
另外,固定支架142开设有第二固定孔1421。第二固定孔1421贯穿固定支架142相对的两个表面。第二固定孔1421的数量与第一固定孔132的数量相同。In addition, the fixing bracket 142 defines a second fixing hole 1421 . The second fixing hole 1421 penetrates two opposite surfaces of the fixing bracket 142 . The number of the second fixing holes 1421 is the same as that of the first fixing holes 132 .
请参阅图9,图9是图7所示的马达14的部分分解示意图。多个导轨141与多个第一固定孔132一一对应地连接设置。多个导轨141与多个第二固定孔1421一一对应地连接设置。导轨141的一端固定于第一固定孔132内,另一端固定于第二固定孔1421内。此时,基板13与固定支架142相对设置,且基板13与固定支架142均相对导轨141固定连接。Please refer to FIG. 9 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor 14 shown in FIG. 7 . The plurality of guide rails 141 are connected to the plurality of first fixing holes 132 in one-to-one correspondence. The plurality of guide rails 141 are connected to the plurality of second fixing holes 1421 in one-to-one correspondence. One end of the guide rail 141 is fixed in the first fixing hole 132 , and the other end is fixed in the second fixing hole 1421 . At this time, the base plate 13 and the fixing bracket 142 are disposed opposite to each other, and both the base plate 13 and the fixing bracket 142 are fixedly connected to the guide rail 141 .
另外,固定支架142还开设有第一安装孔1422。结合图7所示,透镜15包括第二透镜152。第二透镜152安装于第一安装孔1422内。此时,第二透镜152为定焦透镜。In addition, the fixing bracket 142 also defines a first mounting hole 1422 . As shown in FIG. 7 , the lens 15 includes a second lens 152 . The second lens 152 is installed in the first installation hole 1422 . At this time, the second lens 152 is a fixed-focus lens.
请再次参阅图9,第一移动支架143位于固定支架142与基板13之间。第一移动支架143活动连接于导轨141。具体的,第一移动支架143开设有多个第一滑孔1433。第一滑孔1433的数量与导轨141的数量相同。多个导轨141一一对应地穿过多个第一滑孔1433。导轨141可以相对第一滑孔1433的孔壁滑动。Referring to FIG. 9 again, the first moving bracket 143 is located between the fixed bracket 142 and the base plate 13 . The first moving bracket 143 is movably connected to the guide rail 141 . Specifically, the first moving bracket 143 defines a plurality of first sliding holes 1433 . The number of the first sliding holes 1433 is the same as that of the guide rails 141 . The plurality of guide rails 141 pass through the plurality of first sliding holes 1433 in a one-to-one correspondence. The guide rail 141 can slide relative to the hole wall of the first sliding hole 1433 .
结合图8所示,第一移动支架143包括第一部分1431及连接第一部分1431的第二部分1432。需要说明的是,图8的上方的标记1432在图8的下方已经清楚地标记所对应的结构。图8的上方标记1432主要说明第二部分1432与第一部分1431均属于第一移动支架143。Referring to FIG. 8 , the first moving bracket 143 includes a first part 1431 and a second part 1432 connected to the first part 1431 . It should be noted that, the symbols 1432 at the top of FIG. 8 have clearly marked the corresponding structures at the bottom of FIG. 8 . The upper mark 1432 in FIG. 8 mainly indicates that both the second part 1432 and the first part 1431 belong to the first moving bracket 143 .
另外,第一部分1431设有两个第一滑孔1433。第一部分1431与第二部分1432共同围出另外两个第一滑孔1433。可以理解的是,通过将第一移动支架143设置成第一部分1431与第二部分1432,从而降低多个导轨141与第一移动支架143的装配难度。In addition, the first portion 1431 is provided with two first sliding holes 1433 . The first part 1431 and the second part 1432 together define two other first sliding holes 1433 . It can be understood that, by arranging the first moving bracket 143 into the first part 1431 and the second part 1432 , the assembly difficulty of the plurality of guide rails 141 and the first moving bracket 143 is reduced.
请再次参阅图8,第一部分1431设有第二安装孔1434。第二安装孔1434与第一安装孔1422相对设置。结合图7所述,透镜15包括第一透镜151。第一透镜151的数量为两个。第一透镜151安装于第二安装孔1434内。此时,当第一移动支架143相对导轨141滑动时,第一透镜151也可以相对导轨141移动。在其他实施例中,安装于第一移动支架143的第一透镜151的数量也可以为一个,或者大于两个。Referring to FIG. 8 again, the first portion 1431 is provided with a second mounting hole 1434 . The second mounting hole 1434 is disposed opposite to the first mounting hole 1422 . As described in conjunction with FIG. 7 , the lens 15 includes the first lens 151 . The number of the first lenses 151 is two. The first lens 151 is mounted in the second mounting hole 1434 . At this time, when the first moving bracket 143 slides relative to the guide rail 141 , the first lens 151 can also move relative to the guide rail 141 . In other embodiments, the number of the first lenses 151 mounted on the first moving bracket 143 may also be one, or more than two.
请再次参阅图8,第一部分1431设有第一安装槽1435。第一安装槽1435用于固定有第一磁铁145。结合图9所示,第一磁铁145大致占满第一安装槽1435。Please refer to FIG. 8 again, the first portion 1431 is provided with a first mounting groove 1435 . The first installation groove 1435 is used for fixing the first magnet 145 . Referring to FIG. 9 , the first magnet 145 substantially fills the first installation slot 1435 .
请再次参阅图9,第一线圈146位于外壳12(请参阅图7)的内部。第一线圈146固定于前侧板1213(请参阅图7)朝向第一部分1431的表面。第一线圈146朝向第一磁铁145。Referring again to FIG. 9 , the first coil 146 is located inside the housing 12 (please refer to FIG. 7 ). The first coil 146 is fixed to the surface of the front side plate 1213 (refer to FIG. 7 ) facing the first portion 1431 . The first coil 146 faces the first magnet 145 .
请参阅图10,图10是图7所示的马达14的部分分解示意图。第二移动支架144位于基板13与固定支架142之间。第二移动支架144活动连接于导轨141。具体的,第二移动支架144开设有多个第二滑孔1443。第二滑孔1443的数量与导轨141的数量相同。多个导轨141 一一对应地穿过多个第二滑孔1443。导轨141可以相对第二滑孔1443的孔壁滑动。可以理解的是,第二移动支架144可以与第一移动支架143同时移动,也可以与第一移动支架143不同时移动。Please refer to FIG. 10 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of the motor 14 shown in FIG. 7 . The second moving bracket 144 is located between the base plate 13 and the fixed bracket 142 . The second moving bracket 144 is movably connected to the guide rail 141 . Specifically, the second moving bracket 144 defines a plurality of second sliding holes 1443 . The number of the second sliding holes 1443 is the same as that of the guide rails 141 . The plurality of guide rails 141 pass through the plurality of second sliding holes 1443 in a one-to-one correspondence. The guide rail 141 can slide relative to the hole wall of the second sliding hole 1443 . It can be understood that, the second moving bracket 144 may move simultaneously with the first moving bracket 143 , or may not move simultaneously with the first moving bracket 143 .
结合图8所示,第二移动支架144包括第三部分1441及连接第三部分1441的第四部分1442。第三部分1441设有两个第二滑孔1443。第三部分1441与第四部分1442共同围出另外两个第二滑孔1443。可以理解的是,通过将第二移动支架144设置成第三部分1441与第四部分1442,从而降低多个导轨141与第二移动支架144的装配难度。Referring to FIG. 8 , the second moving bracket 144 includes a third part 1441 and a fourth part 1442 connected to the third part 1441 . The third portion 1441 is provided with two second sliding holes 1443 . The third portion 1441 and the fourth portion 1442 together define two other second sliding holes 1443 . It can be understood that, by arranging the second moving bracket 144 into the third part 1441 and the fourth part 1442 , the assembly difficulty of the plurality of guide rails 141 and the second moving bracket 144 is reduced.
另外,第三部分1441设有第三安装孔1444。第三安装孔1444与第二安装孔1434相对设置。结合图7所示,第三安装孔1444安装有两个第一透镜151。此时,当第二移动支架144相对导轨141滑动时,两个第一透镜151也可以相对导轨141移动。在其他实施例中,第三安装孔1444固定的第一透镜151的数量也可以为一个,或者大于两个。In addition, the third portion 1441 is provided with a third mounting hole 1444 . The third mounting hole 1444 is disposed opposite to the second mounting hole 1434 . With reference to FIG. 7 , two first lenses 151 are installed in the third installation holes 1444 . At this time, when the second moving bracket 144 slides relative to the guide rail 141 , the two first lenses 151 can also move relative to the guide rail 141 . In other embodiments, the number of the first lenses 151 fixed by the third mounting holes 1444 may also be one, or more than two.
请再次参阅图10,第三部分1441设有第二安装槽1445。第二安装槽1445用于固定有第二磁铁147。另外,第二线圈148位于外壳12(请参阅图7)的内部。第二线圈148固定于后侧板1214(请参阅图7)朝向第三部分1441的表面。第二线圈148朝向第二磁铁147。Referring to FIG. 10 again, the third portion 1441 is provided with a second mounting groove 1445 . The second installation groove 1445 is used for fixing the second magnet 147 . Additionally, the second coil 148 is located inside the housing 12 (see FIG. 7). The second coil 148 is fixed to the surface of the rear side plate 1214 (refer to FIG. 7 ) facing the third portion 1441 . The second coil 148 faces the second magnet 147 .
请参阅图11,图11是图4所示的摄像模组100在第一种实施方式下的部分结构示意图。镜头电路板16位于马达14的一侧。另外,基板13设置有凹槽133。部分镜头电路板16经凹槽133伸出,并延伸至与模组电路板20电连接。图3示意了镜头电路板16固定于外壳12的上侧板1215。镜头电路板16接触于模组电路板20。Please refer to FIG. 11 . FIG. 11 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment. The lens circuit board 16 is located on one side of the motor 14 . In addition, the substrate 13 is provided with grooves 133 . A part of the lens circuit board 16 protrudes through the groove 133 and extends to be electrically connected with the module circuit board 20 . FIG. 3 illustrates that the lens circuit board 16 is fixed to the upper side plate 1215 of the housing 12 . The lens circuit board 16 is in contact with the module circuit board 20 .
其中,镜头电路板16可以为硬质电路板,也可以为柔性电路板,也可以为软硬结合电路板。此外,镜头电路板16可以采用FR-4介质板,也可以采用罗杰斯介质板,也可以采用Rogers和FR-4的混合介质板,等等。The lens circuit board 16 may be a rigid circuit board, a flexible circuit board, or a flexible-rigid circuit board. In addition, the lens circuit board 16 may use an FR-4 dielectric board, a Rogers dielectric board, a mixed media board of Rogers and FR-4, or the like.
请再次参阅图11,第一线圈146电连接于镜头电路板16。此时,第一线圈146可以通过镜头电路板16电连接于模组电路板20。这样,当模组电路板20通过镜头电路板16对第一线圈146传输电流信号时,第一线圈146通电,第一磁铁145在第一线圈146的作用下可以产生沿X轴负方向或者X轴正方向的安培力。此时,第一磁铁145在安培力下推动第一移动支架143沿X轴负方向或者X轴正方向移动。这样,固定于第一移动支架143的第一透镜151也能够沿X轴负方向或者X轴正方向移动。Please refer to FIG. 11 again, the first coil 146 is electrically connected to the lens circuit board 16 . At this time, the first coil 146 can be electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 through the lens circuit board 16 . In this way, when the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 through the lens circuit board 16, the first coil 146 is energized, and the first magnet 145 can generate a negative direction along the X-axis or the X-axis under the action of the first coil 146. The ampere force in the positive direction of the axis. At this time, the first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move along the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the first moving bracket 143 can also move in the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction.
可以理解的是,通过改变第一线圈146上电流信号的方向,或者设置第一磁铁145的S极或者N极的位置,从而当第一线圈146通电时,第一磁铁145可以产生沿X轴负方向或者X轴正方向的安培力。此时,第一磁铁145在安培力下能够推动第一移动支架143沿X轴负方向或者X轴正方向移动。It can be understood that by changing the direction of the current signal on the first coil 146 or setting the position of the S pole or the N pole of the first magnet 145, when the first coil 146 is energized, the first magnet 145 can generate electricity along the X-axis. Ampere force in the negative or positive X-axis direction. At this time, the first magnet 145 can push the first moving bracket 143 to move along the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction under the ampere force.
请再次参阅图11,并结合图10所示,第二线圈148电连接于镜头电路板16。此时,第二线圈148可以通过镜头电路板16电连接于模组电路板20。这样,当模组电路板20通过镜头电路板16对第二线圈148传输电流信号时,第二线圈148通电,第二磁铁147可以产生沿X轴负方向或者X轴正方向的安培力。此时,第二磁铁147在安培力下推动第二移动支架144沿X轴负方向或者X轴正方向移动。这样,固定于第二移动支架144的第一透镜151也能够沿X轴负方向或者X轴正方向移动。Please refer to FIG. 11 again and in conjunction with FIG. 10 , the second coil 148 is electrically connected to the lens circuit board 16 . At this time, the second coil 148 can be electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 through the lens circuit board 16 . In this way, when the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the second coil 148 through the lens circuit board 16, the second coil 148 is energized, and the second magnet 147 can generate ampere force along the negative direction of the X axis or the positive direction of the X axis. At this time, the second magnet 147 pushes the second moving bracket 144 to move along the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the second moving bracket 144 can also move in the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction.
可以理解的是,通过改变第二线圈148上电流信号的方向,或者设置第二磁铁147的S极或者N极的位置,从而当第二线圈148通电时,第二磁铁147可以产生沿X轴负方向或者X轴正方向的安培力。此时,第二磁铁147在安培力下能够推动第二移动支架144沿X轴负方向或者X轴正方向移动。It can be understood that, by changing the direction of the current signal on the second coil 148, or setting the position of the S pole or the N pole of the second magnet 147, when the second coil 148 is energized, the second magnet 147 can generate electricity along the X axis. Ampere force in the negative or positive X-axis direction. At this time, the second magnet 147 can push the second moving bracket 144 to move along the negative X-axis direction or the positive X-axis direction under the ampere force.
在其他实施例中,镜头组件101也可以未包括镜头电路板16。此时,第一线圈146与第二线圈148可以分别通过导线电连接至模组电路板20。In other embodiments, the lens assembly 101 may also not include the lens circuit board 16 . At this time, the first coil 146 and the second coil 148 may be electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 through wires, respectively.
请参阅图12,图12是图4所示的摄像模组100在第一种实施方式下的部分结构示意图。第一移动支架143的第一部分1431设置有沉槽1436。沉槽1436的开口朝向镜头电路板16。检测磁铁172设置于沉槽1436内。这样,在Z轴方向上,检测磁铁172不会增加摄像模组100的厚度。Please refer to FIG. 12 . FIG. 12 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment. The first portion 1431 of the first moving bracket 143 is provided with a sinker 1436 . The opening of the sink groove 1436 faces the lens circuit board 16 . The detection magnet 172 is disposed in the sink 1436 . In this way, in the Z-axis direction, the detection magnet 172 does not increase the thickness of the camera module 100 .
另外,霍尔传感器171固定于镜头电路板16朝向第一移动支架143的一侧,且电连接于镜头电路板16。此时,霍尔传感器171通过镜头电路板16电连接于模组电路板20。霍尔传感器171用于检测当检测磁铁172处于不同位置处的磁场强度。In addition, the Hall sensor 171 is fixed on the side of the lens circuit board 16 facing the first moving bracket 143 , and is electrically connected to the lens circuit board 16 . At this time, the Hall sensor 171 is electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 through the lens circuit board 16 . The Hall sensor 171 is used to detect the magnetic field strength when the detection magnet 172 is at different positions.
另外,第二移动支架144也可以设置沉槽。沉槽内设置有检测磁铁。镜头电路板16设置有霍尔传感器。霍尔传感器用于检测第二移动支架144上的检测磁铁的磁场强度。In addition, the second moving bracket 144 may also be provided with a sink. A detection magnet is arranged in the sink. The lens circuit board 16 is provided with a Hall sensor. The Hall sensor is used to detect the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet on the second moving bracket 144 .
可以理解的是,当用户需要对摄像模组100进行对焦时,镜头电路板16对第一线圈146传输电流信号。第一磁铁145在安培力下推动第一移动支架143相对导轨141沿X轴正方向或者X轴负方向移动。此时,第一移动支架143容易出现未移动至目标位置。本实施方式利用霍尔传感器171测量检测磁铁172所处位置的磁场强度,并判断该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度是否相等。当该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度不相等时,霍尔传感器171通过镜头电路板16向模组电路板20反馈。此时,模组电路板20能够向第一线圈146提供补偿电流信号,从而使得第一移动支架143准确地移动至目标位置。这样,通过设置霍尔传感器171与检测磁铁172,能够显著提高第一移动支架143移动的准确度,也即显著提高摄像模组100的对焦的准确度,进而使得摄像模组100拍摄的图像的效果较佳。It can be understood that when the user needs to focus the camera module 100 , the lens circuit board 16 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 . The first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move relative to the guide rail 141 along the positive X-axis direction or the negative X-axis direction under the ampere force. At this time, it is easy for the first moving bracket 143 not to move to the target position. In this embodiment, the Hall sensor 171 is used to measure the magnetic field strength at the position where the detection magnet 172 is located, and determine whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position. When the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position, the Hall sensor 171 feeds back to the module circuit board 20 through the lens circuit board 16 . At this time, the module circuit board 20 can provide the compensation current signal to the first coil 146 , so that the first moving bracket 143 can be accurately moved to the target position. In this way, by arranging the Hall sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172, the moving accuracy of the first moving bracket 143 can be significantly improved, that is, the focusing accuracy of the camera module 100 can be significantly improved, thereby making the image captured by the camera module 100 more accurate. The effect is better.
可以理解的是,第二移动支架144上的霍尔传感器与检测磁铁的使用原理与第一移动支架143上的霍尔传感器171与检测磁铁172的使用原理相同。这里不再赘述。It can be understood that the use principle of the Hall sensor and the detection magnet on the second moving bracket 144 is the same as that of the Hall sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 on the first moving bracket 143 . I won't go into details here.
请参阅图13,图13是图4所示的摄像模组100在第一种实施方式下的部分结构示意图。自锁组件50位于外壳12(请参阅图7)的内部,且自锁组件50设置于底板122。在本实施例中,部分自锁组件50靠近第一移动支架143设置。自锁组件50用于在通电的情况下锁紧第一移动支架143。自锁组件50的通电的情况可以根据第一移动支架143是否相对移动决定。例如,当第一移动支架143未相对移动时,自锁组件50未通电。当第一移动支架143相对移动时,自锁组件50通电。另外,当第一移动支架143未相对移动时,第一移动支架143处于目标位置。目标位置可以为第一移动支架143的对焦位置,也可以为摄像模组100未启动拍摄时第一移动支架143的一个固定位置。Please refer to FIG. 13 . FIG. 13 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the first embodiment. The self-locking component 50 is located inside the housing 12 (refer to FIG. 7 ), and the self-locking component 50 is disposed on the bottom plate 122 . In this embodiment, part of the self-locking assembly 50 is disposed close to the first moving bracket 143 . The self-locking assembly 50 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143 when the power is turned on. The power-on condition of the self-locking assembly 50 can be determined according to whether the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively. For example, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the self-locking assembly 50 is not powered on. When the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively, the self-locking assembly 50 is powered on. In addition, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the first moving bracket 143 is in the target position. The target position may be the focus position of the first moving bracket 143 , or may be a fixed position of the first moving bracket 143 when the camera module 100 does not start shooting.
在本实施方式中,自锁组件50通过对第一移动支架143施加沿Y轴方向的压力,以锁紧第一移动支架143。关于自锁组件50的结构以及锁紧原理,下文将结合相关附图具体介绍。这里不再赘述。In this embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 locks the first movable bracket 143 by applying pressure along the Y-axis direction to the first movable bracket 143 . The structure and locking principle of the self-locking assembly 50 will be described in detail below with reference to the relevant drawings. I won't go into details here.
可以理解的是,当第一移动支架143相对导轨141移动至目标位置时,通过自锁组件50锁紧第一移动支架143,从而使得第一移动支架143上的第一透镜151的稳定较佳,也即第一移动支架143上的第一透镜151不容易因外界的抖动或者振动而发生移动,从而当用户在拍摄照片时,拍摄的图像不容易出现变形或模糊。特别是,当用户在运动过程中拍照时,摄像模组100拍摄的图像的效果也较佳。It can be understood that when the first moving bracket 143 moves to the target position relative to the guide rail 141 , the first moving bracket 143 is locked by the self-locking component 50 , so that the stability of the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is better. , that is, the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is not easily moved due to external shaking or vibration, so that when the user takes a photo, the captured image is not easily deformed or blurred. In particular, when the user takes a photo during exercise, the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is also better.
另外,当移动至目标位置的第一移动支架143被锁紧时,第一移动支架143既可以避免与摄像模组100内的其他部件发生碰撞,从而降低第一移动支架143撞击风险,又可以避免发生受迫振动。可以理解的是,受迫振动指的是在周期性的外力作用下,其所发生的振动。In addition, when the first moving bracket 143 moved to the target position is locked, the first moving bracket 143 can not only avoid collision with other components in the camera module 100 , thereby reducing the impact risk of the first moving bracket 143 , and can Avoid forced vibration. It can be understood that forced vibration refers to the vibration that occurs under the action of periodic external forces.
在其他实施例中,部分自锁组件50也可以靠近第二移动支架144设置。自锁组件50能够用于在通电的情况下锁紧第二移动支架144。In other embodiments, part of the self-locking assembly 50 may also be disposed near the second moving bracket 144 . The self-locking assembly 50 can be used to lock the second moving bracket 144 when energized.
在其他实施例中,自锁组件50为两套。一套靠近第一移动支架143设置,另一套靠近第二移动支架144设置。此时,自锁组件50既能够用于在通电的情况下锁紧第一移动支架143,又能够在通电的情况下锁紧第二移动支架144。In other embodiments, there are two sets of self-locking assemblies 50 . One set is arranged near the first moving bracket 143 , and the other set is arranged near the second moving bracket 144 . At this time, the self-locking assembly 50 can be used not only to lock the first moving bracket 143 under the condition of electrification, but also to lock the second moving bracket 144 under the condition of electrification.
请参阅图14,图14是图13所示的自锁组件50的部分分解示意图。自锁组件50包括第一电路板51、连接器52、自锁件53以及施力件54。Please refer to FIG. 14 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 13 . The self-locking assembly 50 includes a first circuit board 51 , a connector 52 , a self-locking member 53 and a force applying member 54 .
其中,第一电路板51可以为硬质电路板,也可以为柔性电路板,也可以为软硬结合电路板。另外,第一电路板51包括间隔设置的第一引脚511以及第二引脚512。The first circuit board 51 may be a rigid circuit board, a flexible circuit board, or a flexible-rigid circuit board. In addition, the first circuit board 51 includes first pins 511 and second pins 512 arranged at intervals.
请参阅图15,图15是图13所示的摄像模组100的部分结构示意图。第一电路板51固定于底板122。第一电路板51位于底板122的周缘。结合图13所示,部分第一电路板51位于基板13与第二移动支架144之间,也即第一电路板51与第二移动支架144间隔设置。此时,基板13与第二移动支架144之间的空间能够被有效地利用,从而显著地提高空间利用率。另外,基板13靠近底板122的端部开设有连通孔134。连通孔134将基板13靠近第二移动支架144的一侧连通至基板13远离第二移动支架144的一侧。部分第一电路板51经连通孔134穿过基板13,并电连接于模组电路板20。这样,信号能够经模组电路板20传输至第一电路板51。Please refer to FIG. 15 . FIG. 15 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 13 . The first circuit board 51 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 . The first circuit board 51 is located on the periphery of the bottom plate 122 . Referring to FIG. 13 , a part of the first circuit board 51 is located between the substrate 13 and the second movable bracket 144 , that is, the first circuit board 51 and the second movable bracket 144 are arranged at intervals. At this time, the space between the substrate 13 and the second moving bracket 144 can be effectively utilized, thereby significantly improving the space utilization rate. In addition, the end of the base plate 13 close to the bottom plate 122 is provided with a communication hole 134 . The communication hole 134 communicates the side of the base plate 13 close to the second moving bracket 144 to the side of the base plate 13 far away from the second moving support 144 . Part of the first circuit board 51 passes through the substrate 13 through the communication hole 134 and is electrically connected to the module circuit board 20 . In this way, the signal can be transmitted to the first circuit board 51 via the module circuit board 20 .
请再次参阅图14,连接器52包括固定座521、连接件522以及导电片523。Please refer to FIG. 14 again, the connector 52 includes a fixing base 521 , a connecting member 522 and a conductive sheet 523 .
其中,固定座521的材质可以采用绝缘材料。例如,固定座521的材质为塑料。结合图15所示,固定座521固定于第一电路板51。在其他实施例中,固定座521部分固定于第一电路板51,部分固定于底板122。The material of the fixing seat 521 may be an insulating material. For example, the material of the fixing base 521 is plastic. As shown in FIG. 15 , the fixing base 521 is fixed to the first circuit board 51 . In other embodiments, the fixing base 521 is partly fixed to the first circuit board 51 and partly fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
另外,导电片523的材质为导电材料。例如,导电片523为钢片、铝片或者铜片。导电片523通过连接件522固定于固定座521。In addition, the material of the conductive sheet 523 is a conductive material. For example, the conductive sheet 523 is a steel sheet, an aluminum sheet or a copper sheet. The conductive sheet 523 is fixed to the fixing base 521 through the connecting member 522 .
请再次参阅图14,连接件522为导电柱。固定座521与导电片523上分别开设有第一通孔524。结合图15所示,连接件522依次穿过固定座521与导电片523上的第一通孔524,并固定于第一通孔524内。这样,导电片523通过连接件522固定于固定座521。在其他实施例中,连接件522也可以其他的紧固件,例如,销钉或者螺钉。Please refer to FIG. 14 again, the connecting member 522 is a conductive post. The fixing base 521 and the conductive sheet 523 are respectively provided with first through holes 524 . As shown in FIG. 15 , the connecting member 522 passes through the first through hole 524 on the fixing base 521 and the conductive sheet 523 in sequence, and is fixed in the first through hole 524 . In this way, the conductive sheet 523 is fixed to the fixing base 521 through the connecting member 522 . In other embodiments, the connector 522 may also be other fasteners, such as pins or screws.
在本实施方式中,连接件522的材质为导电材料。当连接件522的一端穿过固定座521的通孔524时,连接件522的一端电连接于第一电路板51的第一引脚511。In this embodiment, the material of the connecting member 522 is a conductive material. When one end of the connecting member 522 passes through the through hole 524 of the fixing base 521 , one end of the connecting member 522 is electrically connected to the first pin 511 of the first circuit board 51 .
在其他实施例中,连接器52也可以为其他结构的连接器。连接器能够电连接于第一电路板51的第一引脚511。具体的本实施例不做限定。In other embodiments, the connector 52 may also be a connector of other structures. The connector can be electrically connected to the first pins 511 of the first circuit board 51 . The specific embodiment is not limited.
请参阅图16,图16是图14所示的自锁件53的分解示意图。自锁件53包括底座531、转轴532、转动件533、弹性件534以及限位块535。可以理解的是,弹性件534可以为弹簧或者弹片。本实施例的弹性件534以弹簧为例进行描述。Please refer to FIG. 16 , which is an exploded schematic view of the self-locking member 53 shown in FIG. 14 . The self-locking member 53 includes a base 531 , a rotating shaft 532 , a rotating member 533 , an elastic member 534 and a limiting block 535 . It can be understood that the elastic member 534 can be a spring or an elastic sheet. The elastic member 534 in this embodiment is described by taking a spring as an example.
其中,底座531包括固定部5311及限位部5312。限位部5312连接于固定部5311的一侧,且位于固定部5311的周缘。此时,底座531大致呈“┘”型。固定部5311与限位部5312可以为一体成型结构。图16通过虚线示意性地区分了固定部5311与限位部5312。The base 531 includes a fixing portion 5311 and a limiting portion 5312 . The limiting portion 5312 is connected to one side of the fixing portion 5311 and located at the periphery of the fixing portion 5311 . At this time, the base 531 is roughly in a "┘" shape. The fixing portion 5311 and the limiting portion 5312 can be integrally formed. FIG. 16 schematically distinguishes the fixing portion 5311 and the limiting portion 5312 by dotted lines.
另外,固定部5311开设有第二通孔5313。第二通孔5313贯穿固定部5311的相对两个表面。第二通孔5313与第二引脚512(请参阅图14)正对设置。In addition, the fixing portion 5311 defines a second through hole 5313 . The second through holes 5313 penetrate through opposite surfaces of the fixing portion 5311 . The second through holes 5313 are disposed opposite to the second pins 512 (refer to FIG. 14 ).
结合图15所示,底座531与连接器52间隔设置。部分固定部5311固定于底板122,部分固定部5311固定于第一电路板51。在其他实施例中,固定部5311也可以全部固定于第一 电路板51。结合图13所示,底座531与第一移动支架143间隔设置。As shown in FIG. 15 , the base 531 and the connector 52 are arranged at intervals. Part of the fixing part 5311 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 , and part of the fixing part 5311 is fixed to the first circuit board 51 . In other embodiments, all the fixing parts 5311 may be fixed to the first circuit board 51. As shown in FIG. 13 , the base 531 and the first moving bracket 143 are arranged at intervals.
请再次参阅15与图16,转轴532的一端穿过固定部5311的第二通孔5313。转轴532相对第二通孔5313的孔壁固定连接。也即转轴532的一端固定于底座531。另外,转轴532的材质为导电材料。例如,铜、铝、银、金或者铝合金等。穿过固定部5311的第二通孔5313的转轴532电连接于第二引脚512(请参阅图14)。Please refer to FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 again, one end of the rotating shaft 532 passes through the second through hole 5313 of the fixing portion 5311 . The rotating shaft 532 is fixedly connected to the hole wall of the second through hole 5313 . That is, one end of the rotating shaft 532 is fixed to the base 531 . In addition, the material of the rotating shaft 532 is a conductive material. For example, copper, aluminum, silver, gold or aluminum alloy, etc. The shaft 532 passing through the second through hole 5313 of the fixing portion 5311 is electrically connected to the second pin 512 (please refer to FIG. 14 ).
请再次参阅图16,转动件533包括中部5331、第一端部5332以及第二端部5333。第一端部5332与第二端部5333分别连接于中部5331的两端。第一端部5332与第二端部5333均朝中部5331的同一侧弯折。Referring to FIG. 16 again, the rotating member 533 includes a middle portion 5331 , a first end portion 5332 and a second end portion 5333 . The first end portion 5332 and the second end portion 5333 are respectively connected to two ends of the middle portion 5331 . Both the first end portion 5332 and the second end portion 5333 are bent toward the same side of the middle portion 5331 .
另外,转动件533的中部5331设置有两个凸部5334。两个凸部5334的凸出方向与第一端部5332及第二端部5333的弯折方向相反。在其他实施例中,凸部5334的数量也可以为一个,或者大于两个。此外,两个凸部5334均开设有第三通孔5335。第三通孔5335贯穿凸部5334相对的两个表面。In addition, the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 is provided with two convex portions 5334 . The protruding directions of the two protruding portions 5334 are opposite to the bending directions of the first end portion 5332 and the second end portion 5333 . In other embodiments, the number of protrusions 5334 may also be one, or more than two. In addition, a third through hole 5335 is defined in each of the two protruding portions 5334 . The third through hole 5335 penetrates two opposite surfaces of the convex portion 5334 .
结合图15所示,转轴532的另一端依次穿过两个凸部5334上的第三通孔5335,并相对第三通孔5335的孔壁转动。这样,转动件533通过转轴532转动连接于固定部5311。15 , the other end of the rotating shaft 532 passes through the third through holes 5335 on the two convex portions 5334 in sequence, and rotates relative to the hole walls of the third through holes 5335 . In this way, the rotating member 533 is rotatably connected to the fixing portion 5311 through the rotating shaft 532 .
另外,转动件533的材质为导电材料。例如,铜、铝、银、金或者铝合金等。转动件533与转轴532电连接。In addition, the material of the rotating member 533 is a conductive material. For example, copper, aluminum, silver, gold or aluminum alloy, etc. The rotating member 533 is electrically connected to the rotating shaft 532 .
请再次参阅图15,弹性件534的一端固定于底座531的限位部5312,另一端固定于转动件533的第二端部5333。此时,弹性件534位于转动件533远离连接器52的一侧。Referring to FIG. 15 again, one end of the elastic member 534 is fixed to the limiting portion 5312 of the base 531 , and the other end is fixed to the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the elastic member 534 is located on the side of the rotating member 533 away from the connector 52 .
另外,限位块535固定于转动件533的第二端部5333远离弹性件534的一侧。此时,限位块535与弹性件534相对设置。其中,限位块414的材质可以为高分子材料。例如,热塑性聚氨酯弹性体橡胶(thermoplastic polyurethanes,TPU)、热塑性弹性体(thermoplastic elastomer,TPE)、热塑性橡胶材料(thermoplastic rubber material,TPR)。在其他实施例中,限位块414的材质也可以为金属材料。In addition, the limiting block 535 is fixed on the side of the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 away from the elastic member 534 . At this time, the limiting block 535 is disposed opposite to the elastic member 534 . The material of the limiting block 414 may be a polymer material. For example, thermoplastic polyurethane elastomer (thermoplastic polyurethanes, TPU), thermoplastic elastomer (thermoplastic elastomer, TPE), thermoplastic rubber material (thermoplastic rubber material, TPR). In other embodiments, the material of the limiting block 414 may also be a metal material.
在本实施例中,限位块535通过胶带或者胶水固定于转动件533的第二端部5333。在其他实施例中,限位块535也可以与转动件533的第二端部5333为一体成型结构。In this embodiment, the limiting block 535 is fixed to the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 by tape or glue. In other embodiments, the limiting block 535 can also be integrally formed with the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
请再次参阅图15,施力件54的一端固定于连接器52的导电片523,另一端固定于转动件533的第一端部5332。在本实施例中,通过在导电片523与转动件533的第一端部5332上设置钩部。此时,将施力件54的两端分别固定在导电片523与第一端部5332上的钩部上。这样,施力件54与导电片523及转动件533的连接更加稳定。Referring to FIG. 15 again, one end of the force applying member 54 is fixed to the conductive sheet 523 of the connector 52 , and the other end is fixed to the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . In this embodiment, hooks are provided on the conductive sheet 523 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, both ends of the force applying member 54 are respectively fixed on the hooks on the conductive sheet 523 and the first end portion 5332 . In this way, the connection between the force applying member 54 and the conductive sheet 523 and the rotating member 533 is more stable.
另外,施力件54为形状记忆合金(shape memory alloy,SMA)。这样,第一电路板51、连接件522、导电片523、施力件54、转轴532以及转动件533之间形成电流通路。可以理解的是,电流通路指的是电流能够在第一电路板51、连接件522、导电片523、施力件54、转轴532以及转动件533之间传输的回路。In addition, the force applying member 54 is a shape memory alloy (SMA). In this way, a current path is formed between the first circuit board 51 , the connecting member 522 , the conductive sheet 523 , the force applying member 54 , the rotating shaft 532 and the rotating member 533 . It can be understood that the current path refers to a loop through which current can be transmitted among the first circuit board 51 , the connecting member 522 , the conductive sheet 523 , the force applying member 54 , the rotating shaft 532 and the rotating member 533 .
可以理解的是,施力件54用于在通电时对转动件533施加作用力。施力件54的通电情况可以根据第一移动支架143是否相对移动决定。例如,当第一移动支架143未相对移动时,施力件54未通电。当第一移动支架143相对移动时,施力件54通电。另外,当第一移动支架143未相对移动时,第一移动支架143处于目标位置。It can be understood that the force-applying member 54 is used to exert a force on the rotating member 533 when the power is turned on. The power-on state of the force applying member 54 can be determined according to whether the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively. For example, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the force applying member 54 is not energized. When the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively, the force applying member 54 is energized. In addition, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the first moving bracket 143 is in the target position.
另外,当施力件54通电时,电流信号作用在施力件54上,施力件54收缩。此时,施力件54产生收缩力。这样,收缩状态的施力件54能够对转动件533的第一端部5332施加作用力。其中,作用力为施力件54通电时产生的收缩力。作用力的方向为Y轴的负方向。这样,当第一端部5332受到的拉力大于弹性件534的弹力时,转动件533相对转轴532转动,转动 件533的第二端部5333压缩弹性件534,转动件533带动限位块535相对转轴532转动。In addition, when the force applying member 54 is energized, the current signal acts on the force applying member 54, and the force applying member 54 contracts. At this time, the urging member 54 generates a contraction force. In this way, the force applying member 54 in the retracted state can exert a force on the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 . The acting force is the contraction force generated when the force applying member 54 is energized. The direction of the force is the negative direction of the Y axis. In this way, when the pulling force on the first end 5332 is greater than the elastic force of the elastic member 534, the rotating member 533 rotates relative to the rotating shaft 532, the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 compresses the elastic member 534, and the rotating member 533 drives the limiting block 535 to rotate relative to the rotating member 533. The shaft 532 rotates.
在本实施方式中,自锁组件50具有两种状态。一种是锁紧状态。一种是解锁状态。下面将结合相关附图具体介绍这两种状态。In this embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 has two states. One is the locked state. One is the unlocked state. The two states will be described in detail below with reference to the relevant drawings.
锁紧状态:请参阅图17及图18,图17是图4所示的摄像模组100在第一种实施方式下的结构的一种状态的示意图。图18是图17所示的部分摄像模组100在B处的放大示意图。当第一移动支架143移动至目标位置时,模组电路板20未向第一电路板51传输电流信号,施力件54未通电,施力件54未产生收缩,施力件54未对转动件533的第一端部5332施加拉力。此时,由于弹性件534处于压缩状态,转动件533的第一端部5332在弹性件534的弹力下,抵靠在底座531的限位部5312。此外,转动件533的第二端部5333在弹性件534的弹力下,带动限位块535转动,以使限位块535与第一移动支架143接触,限位块535与第一移动支架143之间能够产生静摩擦力。可以理解的是,限位块535对第一移动支架143施加沿Y轴负方向的压力。此时,当第一移动支架143沿X轴方向有运动趋势时,限位块535与第一移动支架143之间产生静摩擦力。其中,静摩擦力能够阻止第一移动支架143沿X轴方向滑动。这样,第一移动支架143被自锁组件50锁紧。Locked state: please refer to FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 . FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment. FIG. 18 is an enlarged schematic view of part of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 17 at B. FIG. When the first moving bracket 143 moves to the target position, the module circuit board 20 does not transmit a current signal to the first circuit board 51 , the force applying member 54 is not energized, the force applying member 54 does not shrink, and the force applying member 54 does not rotate. The first end 5332 of the piece 533 exerts a pulling force. At this time, since the elastic member 534 is in a compressed state, the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 abuts against the limiting portion 5312 of the base 531 under the elastic force of the elastic member 534 . In addition, the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 drives the limit block 535 to rotate under the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , so that the limit block 535 contacts the first moving bracket 143 , and the limit block 535 contacts the first moving bracket 143 Static friction can be generated between them. It can be understood that the limiting block 535 exerts a pressure along the negative direction of the Y-axis on the first moving bracket 143 . At this time, when the first moving bracket 143 tends to move along the X-axis direction, a static friction force is generated between the limiting block 535 and the first moving bracket 143 . The static friction force can prevent the first moving bracket 143 from sliding along the X-axis direction. In this way, the first moving bracket 143 is locked by the self-locking assembly 50 .
一种实施方式中,自锁组件50的锁紧状态可以应用于摄像模组100对焦完成的场景中,或者摄像模组100处于未拍摄图像及录像的场景中。In one embodiment, the locking state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scene where the camera module 100 is focused, or the camera module 100 is in a scene where no images or videos are taken.
解锁状态:请参阅图19,并结合图17,图19是图4所示的摄像模组100在第一种实施方式下的结构的另一种状态下的示意图。当第一移动支架143相对目标位置开始移动时,模组电路板20向第一电路板51传输电流信号,第一电路板51、连接件522、导电片523、施力件54、转轴532以及转动件533之间形成回路。施力件54通电,施力件54收缩。施力件54产生收缩力。这样,收缩状态的施力件54能够对转动件533的第一端部5332施加拉力,其中,拉力的方向为Y轴的负方向。当第一端部5332受到的拉力大于弹性件534的弹力时,转动件533的第二端部5333压缩弹性件534,转动件533相对转轴532转动。这样,转动件533的第一端部5332与底座531的限位部5312分开。另外,转动件533带动限位块535转动,以使限位块535与第一移动支架143分开。第一移动支架143处于解锁状态。Unlocked state: please refer to FIG. 19, in conjunction with FIG. 17, FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in another state of the structure of the first embodiment. When the first moving bracket 143 starts to move relative to the target position, the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first circuit board 51 . A loop is formed between the rotating members 533 . When the force applying member 54 is energized, the force applying member 54 contracts. The force-applying member 54 generates a contraction force. In this way, the force-applying member 54 in the retracted state can exert a pulling force on the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 , wherein the direction of the pulling force is the negative direction of the Y-axis. When the tensile force on the first end portion 5332 is greater than the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 compresses the elastic member 534 , and the rotating member 533 rotates relative to the rotating shaft 532 . In this way, the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 is separated from the limiting portion 5312 of the base 531 . In addition, the rotating member 533 drives the limiting block 535 to rotate, so that the limiting block 535 is separated from the first moving bracket 143 . The first moving bracket 143 is in an unlocked state.
在一种场景下,自锁组件50的解锁状态可以应用于摄像模组100在启动对焦的场景中。In one scenario, the unlocked state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scenario in which the camera module 100 starts focusing.
上文具体介绍了本实施方式的第一种实施方式的自锁组件50。下文将结合上文各个附图描述本实施方式的自锁组件50的几个设置效果。The self-locking assembly 50 of the first embodiment of the present embodiment is described in detail above. Several setting effects of the self-locking assembly 50 of this embodiment will be described below with reference to the above figures.
在本实施例中,施力件54施加于转动件533的作用力的方向与限位块535施加于第一移动支架143的压力的方向相同。此时,施力件54与第一移动支架143位于转动件533的同一侧。施力件54的延伸方向能够与第一移动支架143在Y轴的延伸方向具有重叠区域。这样,当施力件54的长度较大程度地增加时,施力件54也不会增大镜头组件101在Y轴方向的长度。另外,当施力件54的长度较大程度增加时,施力件54在通电下的收缩长度也较大,此时,施力件54拉动转动件533转动的角度也较大,限位块535与第一移动支架143分开的距离也较大。这样,当第一移动支架143沿X轴方向移动时,不容易与限位块535发生干涉。In this embodiment, the direction of the force applied by the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 is the same as the direction of the pressure applied by the limiting block 535 to the first moving bracket 143 . At this time, the force applying member 54 and the first moving bracket 143 are located on the same side of the rotating member 533 . The extending direction of the force applying member 54 can have an overlapping area with the extending direction of the first moving bracket 143 in the Y-axis. In this way, when the length of the force applying member 54 is greatly increased, the force applying member 54 will not increase the length of the lens assembly 101 in the Y-axis direction. In addition, when the length of the force-applying member 54 is greatly increased, the retracted length of the force-applying member 54 under power-on is also relatively large. The distance between 535 and the first moving bracket 143 is also larger. In this way, when the first moving bracket 143 moves along the X-axis direction, it is not easy to interfere with the limiting block 535 .
在其他实施例中,施力件54施加于转动件533的作用力的方向与限位块535施加于第一移动支架143的压力的方向也可以不同。In other embodiments, the direction of the force applied by the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 and the direction of the pressure applied by the limiting block 535 to the first moving bracket 143 may also be different.
在本实施例中,限位块535与转动件533的连接位置为第一位置。本实施方式的第一位置位于转动件533的第二端部5333。施力件54与转动件533的连接位置(也即施力件54对转动件533的施力位置)为第二位置。本实施方式的第二位置位于转动件533的第一端部5332。转动件533的转动位置位于第一位置与第二位置之间。此时,限位块535与施力件54位于转 轴532的两侧,限位块535与施力件54在运动中不容易相互干涉,保证自锁组件50的可靠性。In this embodiment, the connection position of the limiting block 535 and the rotating member 533 is the first position. The first position in this embodiment is located at the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 . The connection position of the force applying member 54 and the rotating member 533 (that is, the force applying position of the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 ) is the second position. The second position in this embodiment is located at the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . The rotational position of the rotating member 533 is between the first position and the second position. At this time, the limit block 535 and the force applying member 54 are located on both sides of the rotating shaft 532, and the limit block 535 and the force applying member 54 are not easy to interfere with each other during movement, so as to ensure the reliability of the self-locking assembly 50.
在其他实施例中,第一位置与第二位置也可以位于转动件533的同一侧。例如,转动件533的第一端部5332通过转轴532转动连接于底座531。施力件54对转动件533的中部5331进行施力。限位块535依然固定于转动件533的第二端部5333。In other embodiments, the first position and the second position may also be located on the same side of the rotating member 533 . For example, the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 is rotatably connected to the base 531 through the rotating shaft 532 . The force applying member 54 applies force to the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 . The limiting block 535 is still fixed to the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
在本实施例中,弹性件534位于转动件533远离限位块535的一侧。此时,弹性件534远离第一移动支架143设置。此时,当第一移动支架143沿X轴方向移动中,弹性件534不容易与第一移动支架143发生干涉,从而保证自锁组件50的可靠性。In this embodiment, the elastic member 534 is located on the side of the rotating member 533 away from the limiting block 535 . At this time, the elastic member 534 is disposed away from the first moving bracket 143 . At this time, when the first moving bracket 143 moves along the X-axis direction, the elastic member 534 is not likely to interfere with the first moving bracket 143 , thereby ensuring the reliability of the self-locking assembly 50 .
另外,弹性件534与限位块535相对设置。此时,弹性件534远离施力件54设置。此时,当施力件54对转动件533施加拉力时,弹性件534不容易与施力件54发生干涉,从而保证自锁组件50的可靠性。In addition, the elastic member 534 is disposed opposite to the limiting block 535 . At this time, the elastic member 534 is disposed away from the force-applying member 54 . At this time, when the force applying member 54 exerts a pulling force on the rotating member 533 , the elastic member 534 is not likely to interfere with the force applying member 54 , thereby ensuring the reliability of the self-locking assembly 50 .
在其他实施方式中,弹性件534位于转动件533靠近第一移动支架143的一侧。In other embodiments, the elastic member 534 is located on the side of the rotating member 533 close to the first moving bracket 143 .
在其他实施方式中,弹性件534也可以与施力件54位于转动件533的转动位置的同一侧。In other embodiments, the elastic member 534 and the force applying member 54 may also be located on the same side of the rotational position of the rotating member 533 .
在本实施方式中,转轴532既能够用于使转动件533相对底座531转动,又能够作为电流通路的一部分。转轴532具有“一物多用”的效果。另外,转动件533既能够用于带动限位块535转动,又能够作为电流通路的一部分。转动件533也具有“一物多用”的效果。In this embodiment, the rotating shaft 532 can not only be used to rotate the rotating member 533 relative to the base 531, but also can be used as a part of the current path. The rotating shaft 532 has the effect of "multi-purpose for one thing". In addition, the rotating member 533 can not only be used to drive the limiting block 535 to rotate, but also can be used as a part of the current path. The rotating member 533 also has the effect of "multi-purpose".
在本实施方式中,第一位置与转动件533的转动位置的距离为第一距离。第二位置与转动件533的转动位置的距离为第二距离。第一距离大于第二距离。此时,当施力件54在通电下,施力件54拉动转动件533转动的角度较大,限位块535与第一移动支架143分开的距离也较大。这样,当第一移动支架143沿X轴方向移动时,不容易与限位块535发生干涉。In this embodiment, the distance between the first position and the rotational position of the rotating member 533 is the first distance. The distance between the second position and the rotating position of the rotating member 533 is the second distance. The first distance is greater than the second distance. At this time, when the force applying member 54 is energized, the angle by which the force applying member 54 pulls the rotating member 533 to rotate is relatively large, and the distance between the limiting block 535 and the first moving bracket 143 is relatively large. In this way, when the first moving bracket 143 moves along the X-axis direction, it is not easy to interfere with the limiting block 535 .
上文具体介绍了一种摄像模组100的结构。下文将结合上文的摄像模组100的结构(请参阅图1至图19)介绍一种摄像模组100的拍摄方法。The structure of a camera module 100 is described in detail above. Hereinafter, a photographing method of the camera module 100 will be introduced in conjunction with the structure of the camera module 100 (please refer to FIG. 1 to FIG. 19 ).
请参阅图20,图20是图1所示的摄像模组100在第一种实施方式下的拍摄方法的流程示意图。摄像模组100的拍摄方法包括:Please refer to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of a photographing method of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 1 in the first embodiment. The shooting method of the camera module 100 includes:
S100接收拍摄信号。可以理解的是,拍摄信号可以是在用户按压屏幕10时,屏幕10产生的信号。此外,拍摄信号也可以是在用户按压屏幕10时,屏幕10产生触控信号,并将触控信号发送给主机电路板90,主机电路板90上的芯片对触控信号进行处理所形成的信号。The S100 receives the shooting signal. It can be understood that the shooting signal may be a signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 . In addition, the shooting signal may also be a signal formed by the touch signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 and sent to the host circuit board 90 , where the chip on the host circuit board 90 processes the touch signal. .
在本实施方式中,模组电路板20可以用于接收拍摄信号。In this embodiment, the module circuit board 20 may be used to receive a shooting signal.
S200控制施力件54通电,以使施力件54对转动件533施加作用力,以驱动转动件533克服弹性件534的弹力,带动限位块535转动,并离开第一移动支架143。可以理解的是,本实施方式以自锁组件50用于锁紧第一移动支架143为例进行描述,在其他实施方式中,自锁组件50也可以用于锁紧第二移动支架144。另外,当自锁组件50为两套时,一套自锁组件50用于锁紧第一移动支架143,另一套用于锁紧第二移动支架144。S200 controls the force applying member 54 to be energized, so that the force applying member 54 exerts a force on the rotating member 533 to drive the rotating member 533 to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , drive the limiting block 535 to rotate, and leave the first moving bracket 143 . It can be understood that this embodiment is described by taking the self-locking assembly 50 for locking the first moving bracket 143 as an example. In other embodiments, the self-locking assembly 50 can also be used for locking the second moving support 144 . In addition, when there are two sets of self-locking components 50 , one set of self-locking components 50 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143 , and the other set is used to lock the second moving bracket 144 .
具体的,本实施例的施力件54为SMA。当模组电路板20接收拍摄信号之后,模组电路板20控制施力件54通电。此时,电流信号作用在施力件54上,施力件54收缩。施力件54产生收缩力。这样,收缩状态的施力件54能够对转动件533的第一端部5332施加拉力。当第一端部5332受到的拉力大于弹性件534的弹力时,转动件533克服弹性件534的弹力,转动件533的第二端部5333压缩弹性件534,转动件533相对转轴532转动。这样,限位块535也相对转轴532转动。限位块535与第一移动支架143分开。Specifically, the force applying member 54 in this embodiment is an SMA. After the module circuit board 20 receives the shooting signal, the module circuit board 20 controls the force applying member 54 to energize. At this time, the current signal acts on the force applying member 54, and the force applying member 54 contracts. The force-applying member 54 generates a contraction force. In this way, the force-applying member 54 in the retracted state can exert a pulling force on the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 . When the tensile force on the first end 5332 is greater than the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , the rotating member 533 overcomes the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 compresses the elastic member 534 , and the rotating member 533 rotates relative to the rotating shaft 532 . In this way, the limiting block 535 also rotates relative to the rotating shaft 532 . The limiting block 535 is separated from the first moving bracket 143 .
S300控制第一移动支架143带动第一透镜151沿光学镜头10的光轴方向移动。S300 controls the first moving bracket 143 to drive the first lens 151 to move along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
可以理解的是,由于光学镜头10的光轴方向为X轴方向,第一移动支架143能够带动第一透镜151沿X轴正方向或者X轴负方向的移动。第一透镜151的移动距离可根据用户的对焦需求而设置。It can be understood that, since the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 is the X axis direction, the first moving bracket 143 can drive the first lens 151 to move along the X axis positive direction or the X axis negative direction. The moving distance of the first lens 151 can be set according to the user's focusing requirement.
在本实施方式中,模组电路板20通过镜头电路板16对第一线圈146传输电流信号时,第一线圈146通电,第一磁铁145在第一线圈146的作用下可以产生沿X轴负方向的安培力。此时,第一磁铁145在安培力下推动第一移动支架143沿X轴负方向移动。这样,固定于第一移动支架143的第一透镜151也能够沿X轴负方向移动。In this embodiment, when the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 through the lens circuit board 16, the first coil 146 is energized, and the first magnet 145 can generate a negative force along the X-axis under the action of the first coil 146. direction of ampere force. At this time, the first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move in the negative direction of the X-axis under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the first moving bracket 143 can also move in the negative direction of the X-axis.
S400当第一移动支架143移动至目标位置时,控制施力件54断电,转动件533在弹性件534的弹力下带动限位块535转动,以使限位块535压紧第一移动支架143。S400 When the first moving bracket 143 moves to the target position, the force applying member 54 is controlled to be powered off, and the rotating member 533 drives the limit block 535 to rotate under the elastic force of the elastic member 534, so that the limit block 535 presses the first moving bracket 143.
具体的,当第一移动支架143移动至目标位置时,模组电路板20控制施力件54断电。电流信号未作用在施力件54时,施力件54未产生收缩,施力件54未对转动件533的第一端部5332施加拉力。此时,由于弹性件534处于压缩状态,转动件533的第二端部5333在弹性件534的弹力下,带动限位块535转动,以使限位块535与第一移动支架143接触,限位块535与第一移动支架143之间产生静摩擦力。这样,限位块535能够压紧第一移动支架143。Specifically, when the first moving bracket 143 moves to the target position, the module circuit board 20 controls the force applying member 54 to be powered off. When the current signal does not act on the force applying member 54 , the force applying member 54 does not shrink, and the force applying member 54 does not exert a pulling force on the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, since the elastic member 534 is in a compressed state, the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 drives the limiting block 535 to rotate under the elastic force of the elastic member 534, so that the limiting block 535 contacts the first moving bracket 143, limiting the Static frictional force is generated between the position block 535 and the first moving bracket 143 . In this way, the limiting block 535 can press the first moving bracket 143 .
S500控制感光芯片30将光信号转换成电信号并输出。S500 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to convert optical signals into electrical signals and output them.
具体的,模组电路板20控制感光芯片30采集穿过光学镜头10的环境光线。将采集的环境光线转换成电信号,并将电信号输出至主机电路板90。Specifically, the module circuit board 20 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to collect ambient light passing through the optical lens 10 . The collected ambient light is converted into electrical signals, and the electrical signals are output to the host circuit board 90 .
在本实施方式中,通过自锁组件50将第一移动支架143进行锁紧,从而使得第一移动支架143上的第一透镜151的稳定较佳,也即第一移动支架143上的第一透镜151不容易因外界的抖动或者振动而发生移动,从而当用户在拍摄照片时,拍摄的图像不容易出现变形或模糊。特别是,当用户在运动过程中拍照时,摄像模组100拍摄的图像的效果也较佳。In this embodiment, the first moving bracket 143 is locked by the self-locking component 50, so that the stability of the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is better, that is, the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is better The lens 151 is not easily moved due to external shaking or vibration, so that when the user is taking a photo, the captured image is not easily deformed or blurred. In particular, when the user takes a photo during exercise, the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is also better.
一种实施方式中,在“控制第一移动支架143带动第一透镜151沿光学镜头10的光轴方向移动”之后,方法还包括:In one embodiment, after "controlling the first moving bracket 143 to drive the first lens 151 to move along the optical axis of the optical lens 10", the method further includes:
霍尔传感器171检测检测磁铁172的磁场强度。The Hall sensor 171 detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet 172 .
当确认出磁场强度不等于预设磁场强度时,控制第一移动支架143带动第一透镜151沿光学镜头10的光轴方向移动至目标位置。When it is confirmed that the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength, the first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
可以理解的是,当用户需要对摄像模组100进行对焦时,镜头电路板16对第一线圈146传输电流信号。第一磁铁145在安培力下推动第一移动支架143相对导轨141沿X轴正方向或者X轴负方向移动。此时,第一移动支架143容易出现未移动至目标位置。本实施方式利用霍尔传感器171检测检测磁铁172的磁场强度,并判断该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度是否相等。当该磁场强度与目标位置处的预设磁场强度不相等时,霍尔传感器171通过镜头电路板16向模组电路板20反馈。此时,模组电路板20能够向第一线圈146提供补偿电流信号,从而使得第一移动支架143移动至目标位置。这样,通过霍尔传感器171与检测磁铁172能够提高摄像模组100的对焦的准确度,从而使得摄像模组100拍摄的图像的效果较佳。It can be understood that when the user needs to focus the camera module 100 , the lens circuit board 16 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 . The first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move relative to the guide rail 141 along the positive X-axis direction or the negative X-axis direction under the ampere force. At this time, it is easy for the first moving bracket 143 not to move to the target position. In this embodiment, the Hall sensor 171 is used to detect the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet 172, and it is determined whether the magnetic field strength is equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position. When the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength at the target position, the Hall sensor 171 feeds back to the module circuit board 20 through the lens circuit board 16 . At this time, the module circuit board 20 can provide the compensation current signal to the first coil 146 , so that the first moving bracket 143 is moved to the target position. In this way, the focusing accuracy of the camera module 100 can be improved by the Hall sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 , so that the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is better.
上文具体介绍了一种镜头组件101。下文将结合相关附图具体介绍另一种镜头组件101的设置方式。A lens assembly 101 is introduced in detail above. Hereinafter, another setting manner of the lens assembly 101 will be described in detail with reference to the related drawings.
第二种实施方式中,与第一种实施方式相同的技术内容不再赘述:请参阅图21,图21是图6所示的镜头组件101的另一种实施方式的部分分解示意图。镜头组件101包括外壳12、马达14、透镜15、镜头电路板16、霍尔传感器171、检测磁铁172以及自锁组件50。其中, 外壳12、马达14、透镜15、镜头电路板16、霍尔传感器171、检测磁铁172的设置方式可以参阅第一种实施方式的外壳12、马达14、透镜15、镜头电路板16、霍尔传感器171、检测磁铁172的设置方式。这里不再赘述。In the second embodiment, the same technical content as the first embodiment will not be repeated: please refer to FIG. 21 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of another embodiment of the lens assembly 101 shown in FIG. 6 . The lens assembly 101 includes a housing 12 , a motor 14 , a lens 15 , a lens circuit board 16 , a hall sensor 171 , a detection magnet 172 and a self-locking assembly 50 . The arrangement of the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 171 , and the detection magnet 172 may refer to the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 172 in the first embodiment. The arrangement of the sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172. I won't go into details here.
请参阅图22,图22是图4所示的摄像模组100在第二种实施方式下的部分结构示意图。自锁组件50靠近第一移动支架143设置,且部分自锁组件50位于第一移动支架143与底板122之间。自锁组件50用于在通电的情况下锁紧第一移动支架143。在本实施例中,自锁组件50通过对第一移动支架143施加沿Z轴方向的压力,以锁紧第一移动支架143。相较于第一种实施方式的自锁组件50沿Y轴方向对第一移动支架143压力,本实施例的自锁组件50能够有效地利用第一移动支架143与底板122之间的空间,提高镜头组件101的空间利用率。Please refer to FIG. 22 . FIG. 22 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in the second embodiment. The self-locking assembly 50 is disposed close to the first moving bracket 143 , and a part of the self-locking assembly 50 is located between the first moving bracket 143 and the bottom plate 122 . The self-locking assembly 50 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143 when the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 locks the first movable bracket 143 by applying pressure along the Z-axis direction to the first movable bracket 143 . Compared with the self-locking assembly 50 of the first embodiment pressing the first moving bracket 143 along the Y-axis direction, the self-locking assembly 50 of this embodiment can effectively utilize the space between the first moving bracket 143 and the bottom plate 122 , The space utilization of the lens assembly 101 is improved.
在其他实施例中,部分自锁组件50也可以靠近第二移动支架144设置。自锁组件50能够用于在通电的情况下锁紧第二移动支架144。In other embodiments, part of the self-locking assembly 50 may also be disposed near the second moving bracket 144 . The self-locking assembly 50 can be used to lock the second moving bracket 144 when energized.
在其他实施例中,自锁组件50为两套。一套靠近第一移动支架143设置,另一套靠近第二移动支架144设置。此时,自锁组件50既能够用于在通电的情况下锁紧第一移动支架143,又能够在通电的情况下锁紧第二移动支架144。In other embodiments, there are two sets of self-locking assemblies 50 . One set is arranged near the first moving bracket 143 , and the other set is arranged near the second moving bracket 144 . At this time, the self-locking assembly 50 can be used not only to lock the first moving bracket 143 under the condition of electrification, but also to lock the second moving bracket 144 under the condition of electrification.
请参阅图23,图23是图22所示的自锁组件50的部分分解示意图。自锁组件50包括第一电路板51、自锁件53以及施力件54。Please refer to FIG. 23 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 22 . The self-locking assembly 50 includes a first circuit board 51 , a self-locking member 53 and a force applying member 54 .
其中,第一电路板51的设置方式可以参阅第一种实施方式的第一电路板51的设置方式。这里不再赘述。与第一种实施方式的第一电路板51不同的是,本实施方式的第一电路板51在Y轴方向的尺寸较短。第一电路板51的第一引脚511与第二引脚512可以相互靠近设置。当然,在其他实施方式中,第一引脚511与第二引脚512也可以分开设置。The arrangement of the first circuit board 51 may refer to the arrangement of the first circuit board 51 in the first embodiment. I won't go into details here. Different from the first circuit board 51 of the first embodiment, the size of the first circuit board 51 of the present embodiment in the Y-axis direction is short. The first pins 511 and the second pins 512 of the first circuit board 51 may be disposed close to each other. Of course, in other embodiments, the first pin 511 and the second pin 512 may also be provided separately.
请参阅图24,图24是图23所示的自锁件53的分解示意图。自锁件53包括底座531、转轴532、转动件533、弹性件534以及限位块535。Please refer to FIG. 24 , which is an exploded schematic view of the self-locking member 53 shown in FIG. 23 . The self-locking member 53 includes a base 531 , a rotating shaft 532 , a rotating member 533 , an elastic member 534 and a limiting block 535 .
其中,底座531包括第一固定部5311、连接部5312以及第二固定部5313。连接部5312位于第一固定部5311的一侧,且连接于第一固定部5311的周缘。第二固定部5313连接于连接部5312远离第一固定部5311的一侧。第二固定部5313与第一固定部5311相对设置。此时,部分连接部5312连接在第一固定部5311与第二固定部5313之间。在本实施方式中,第一固定部5311、连接部5312以及第二固定部5313为一体成型结构。图24通过虚线示意性地区分了第一固定部5311、连接部5312以及第二固定部5313。The base 531 includes a first fixing portion 5311 , a connecting portion 5312 and a second fixing portion 5313 . The connecting portion 5312 is located on one side of the first fixing portion 5311 and connected to the periphery of the first fixing portion 5311 . The second fixing portion 5313 is connected to the side of the connecting portion 5312 away from the first fixing portion 5311 . The second fixing portion 5313 is disposed opposite to the first fixing portion 5311 . At this time, part of the connecting portion 5312 is connected between the first fixing portion 5311 and the second fixing portion 5313 . In this embodiment, the first fixing portion 5311 , the connecting portion 5312 and the second fixing portion 5313 are integrally formed. FIG. 24 schematically distinguishes the first fixing part 5311 , the connecting part 5312 and the second fixing part 5313 by dotted lines.
结合图22所示,第一固定部5311固定于底板122。此时,底座531固定于底板122。底座531与第一移动支架143间隔设置。在其他实施例中,部分第一固定部5311固定于第一电路板51,部分第一固定部5311固定于底板122。As shown in FIG. 22 , the first fixing portion 5311 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 . At this time, the base 531 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 . The base 531 is spaced apart from the first moving bracket 143 . In other embodiments, some of the first fixing parts 5311 are fixed to the first circuit board 51 , and some of the first fixing parts 5311 are fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
请再次参阅24,连接部5312开设有第一通孔5314。第一通孔5314贯穿连接部5312的相对两个表面。Please refer to 24 again, the connecting portion 5312 defines a first through hole 5314 . The first through holes 5314 penetrate through opposite surfaces of the connecting portion 5312 .
另外,转轴532包括主轴5321及套环5322。套环5322的半径大于主轴5321的半径。结合图23所示,主轴5321的一端穿过连接部5312的第一通孔5314。主轴5321相对第一通孔5314的孔壁固定连接。另外,套环5322套设于主轴5321。套环5322转动连接于主轴5321。In addition, the rotating shaft 532 includes a main shaft 5321 and a collar 5322 . The radius of the collar 5322 is larger than the radius of the main shaft 5321 . With reference to FIG. 23 , one end of the main shaft 5321 passes through the first through hole 5314 of the connecting portion 5312 . The main shaft 5321 is fixedly connected to the hole wall of the first through hole 5314 . In addition, the collar 5322 is sleeved on the main shaft 5321 . The collar 5322 is rotatably connected to the main shaft 5321 .
请再次参阅图24,转动件533包括中部5331、第一端部5332以及第二端部5333。第一端部5332与第二端部5333分别连接于中部5331的两端。在本实施方式中,转动件533的中部5331为弧形。转动件533的中部5331的形状与套环5322的外表面的形状相适配。在其他实施方式中,转动件533的中部5331也可以为其他形状。Please refer to FIG. 24 again, the rotating member 533 includes a middle portion 5331 , a first end portion 5332 and a second end portion 5333 . The first end portion 5332 and the second end portion 5333 are respectively connected to two ends of the middle portion 5331 . In this embodiment, the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 is arc-shaped. The shape of the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 is adapted to the shape of the outer surface of the collar 5322 . In other embodiments, the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 may also have other shapes.
结合图23所示,转动件533的中部5331固定于套环5322。此时,转动件533的中部5331 可以随着套环5322相对主轴5321转动而转动。此时,转动件533通过转轴532转动连接于底座531。另外,转动件533的第一端部5332与第二端部5333位于套环5322的两侧。转动件533的第一端部5332位于第二固定部5313远离第一固定部5311的一侧。As shown in FIG. 23 , the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 is fixed to the collar 5322 . At this time, the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 can rotate as the collar 5322 rotates relative to the main shaft 5321 . At this time, the rotating member 533 is rotatably connected to the base 531 through the rotating shaft 532 . In addition, the first end 5332 and the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 are located on both sides of the collar 5322 . The first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 is located on the side of the second fixing portion 5313 away from the first fixing portion 5311 .
另外,转动件533的材质为磁性材料。例如,转动件533为磁铁或者磁钢。In addition, the material of the rotating member 533 is a magnetic material. For example, the rotating member 533 is a magnet or a magnetic steel.
请再次参阅图23及图24,弹性件534的一端固定于底座531的第一固定部5311,另一端固定于转动件533的第二端部5333。可以理解的是,弹性件534可以为弹簧或者弹片。本实施例的弹性件534以弹簧为例。Please refer to FIGS. 23 and 24 again, one end of the elastic member 534 is fixed to the first fixing portion 5311 of the base 531 , and the other end is fixed to the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 . It can be understood that the elastic member 534 can be a spring or an elastic sheet. The elastic member 534 in this embodiment is a spring as an example.
另外,限位块535固定于转动件533的第一端部5332远离第二固定部5313的一侧。限位块535位于转动件533与第一移动支架143(请参阅图22)之间。限位块535材质可以参阅第一种实施方式的限位块535的材质。这里不再赘述。In addition, the limiting block 535 is fixed to a side of the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 away from the second fixing portion 5313 . The limiting block 535 is located between the rotating member 533 and the first moving bracket 143 (please refer to FIG. 22 ). For the material of the limiting block 535, reference may be made to the material of the limiting block 535 in the first embodiment. I won't go into details here.
请参阅图25,并结合图23所示,图25是图22所示的自锁组件50的部分分解示意图。施力件54包括磁性件541及缠绕于磁性件541表面的线圈542。另外,底座531的第一固定部5311与第二固定部5313均开设有第二通孔5315。Please refer to FIG. 25 in conjunction with FIG. 23 . FIG. 25 is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 22 . The force applying member 54 includes a magnetic member 541 and a coil 542 wound on the surface of the magnetic member 541 . In addition, both the first fixing portion 5311 and the second fixing portion 5313 of the base 531 are provided with a second through hole 5315 .
其中,磁性件541的一端穿过第一固定部5311的第二通孔5315,并相对第二通孔5315的孔壁固定连接。磁性件541的另一端穿过第二固定部5313的第二通孔5315,并朝向转动件533的第一端部5332。这样,磁性件541与底座531的连接稳定性更佳。One end of the magnetic member 541 passes through the second through hole 5315 of the first fixing portion 5311 and is fixedly connected to the hole wall of the second through hole 5315 . The other end of the magnetic member 541 passes through the second through hole 5315 of the second fixing portion 5313 and faces the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 . In this way, the connection stability between the magnetic member 541 and the base 531 is better.
另外,线圈542位于第一固定部5311与第二固定部5313之间。线圈542的输入端电连接于第一电路板51的第一引脚511。线圈542的输出端电连接于第一电路板51的第二引脚512。此时,第一电路板51与线圈542形成电流通路。In addition, the coil 542 is located between the first fixing portion 5311 and the second fixing portion 5313 . The input end of the coil 542 is electrically connected to the first pin 511 of the first circuit board 51 . The output end of the coil 542 is electrically connected to the second pin 512 of the first circuit board 51 . At this time, the first circuit board 51 and the coil 542 form a current path.
可以理解的是,施力件54用于在线圈542通电时对转动件533施加作用力。线圈542的通电情况可以根据第一移动支架143是否相对移动决定。例如,当第一移动支架143未相对移动时,线圈542未通电。当第一移动支架143相对移动时,线圈542通电。另外,当第一移动支架143未相对移动时,第一移动支架143处于目标位置。It can be understood that the force applying member 54 is used for applying force to the rotating member 533 when the coil 542 is energized. The energization condition of the coil 542 can be determined according to whether the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively. For example, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the coil 542 is not energized. When the first moving bracket 143 relatively moves, the coil 542 is energized. In addition, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the first moving bracket 143 is in the target position.
具体的,当线圈542通电时,电流信号作用在线圈542,线圈542产生磁场。此时,由于转动件533的材料为磁性材料,施力件54与转动件533的第一端部5332之间产生磁吸力。施力件54用于在通电时对转动件533施加作用力。其中,该作用力为施力件54与转动件533之间的磁吸力。当施力件54与转动件533的第一端部5332之间的磁吸力大于弹性件534的弹力时,转动件533的第二端部5333拉伸弹性件534,转动件533的中部5331随着套环5322相对主轴5321转动而转动。这样,固定于转动件533的第一端部5332的限位块535也随着套环5322相对主轴5321转动。Specifically, when the coil 542 is energized, the current signal acts on the coil 542, and the coil 542 generates a magnetic field. At this time, since the material of the rotating member 533 is a magnetic material, a magnetic attraction force is generated between the force applying member 54 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . The force applying member 54 is used for applying force to the rotating member 533 when the power is turned on. The acting force is the magnetic attraction force between the force applying member 54 and the rotating member 533 . When the magnetic attraction force between the force applying member 54 and the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 is greater than the elastic force of the elastic member 534, the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 stretches the elastic member 534, and the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 follows the elastic force of the elastic member 534. The collar 5322 rotates relative to the main shaft 5321. In this way, the limiting block 535 fixed to the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 also rotates relative to the main shaft 5321 along with the collar 5322 .
在本实施方式中,自锁组件50具有两种状态。一种是锁紧状态。一种是解锁状态。下面将结合相关附图具体介绍这两种状态。In this embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 has two states. One is the locked state. One is the unlocked state. The two states will be described in detail below with reference to the relevant drawings.
锁紧状态:请参阅图26及图27,图26是图4所示的摄像模组100在第二种实施方式下的结构的一种状态的示意图。图27是图26所示的部分摄像模组100在C处的放大示意图。当第一移动支架143移动至目标位置时,模组电路板20未向第一电路板51传输电流信号,线圈542未通电。另外,由于弹性件534处于拉伸状态,弹性件534对转动件533的第二端部5333施加有沿Z轴负方向的弹力。此时,限位块535在弹性件534的弹力下与第一移动支架143接触,并与第一移动支架143之间产生静摩擦力。可以理解的是,限位块535对第一移动支架143施加沿Z轴正方向的压力。此时,当第一移动支架143沿X轴方向有运动趋势时,限位块535与第一移动支架143之间产生静摩擦力。其中,静摩擦力能够阻止第一移动支架143沿X轴方向滑动。这样,第一移动支架143被自锁组件50锁紧。Locked state: Please refer to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 . FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in the second embodiment. FIG. 27 is an enlarged schematic view of part of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 26 at C. FIG. When the first moving bracket 143 moves to the target position, the module circuit board 20 does not transmit a current signal to the first circuit board 51 and the coil 542 is not energized. In addition, since the elastic member 534 is in a stretched state, the elastic member 534 applies an elastic force along the negative direction of the Z-axis to the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the limiting block 535 is in contact with the first moving bracket 143 under the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , and a static friction force is generated between the limiting block 535 and the first moving bracket 143 . It can be understood that the limiting block 535 exerts a pressure along the positive direction of the Z-axis on the first moving bracket 143 . At this time, when the first moving bracket 143 tends to move along the X-axis direction, a static friction force is generated between the limiting block 535 and the first moving bracket 143 . The static friction force can prevent the first moving bracket 143 from sliding along the X-axis direction. In this way, the first moving bracket 143 is locked by the self-locking assembly 50 .
一种实施方式中,自锁组件50的锁紧状态可以应用于摄像模组100对焦完成的场景中,或者摄像模组100处于未拍摄图像及录像的场景中。In one embodiment, the locking state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scene where the camera module 100 is focused, or the camera module 100 is in a scene where no images or videos are taken.
解锁状态:请参阅图28,并结合图26所示,图28是图4所示的摄像模组100在第二种实施方式下的结构的另一种状态的示意图。当第一移动支架143相对目标位置开始移动时,模组电路板20向第一电路板51传输电流信号,线圈542通电,线圈542产生磁场。此时,由于转动件533的材质为磁性材料,施力件54与转动件533的第一端部5332之间产生磁吸力。此时,转动件533的第一端部5332受到沿Z轴负方向的拉力。另外,由于弹性件534处于拉伸状态,弹性件534对转动件533的第二端部5333施加有沿Z轴负方向的拉力。此时,转动件533的第一端部5332受到有沿Z轴正方向的弹力。可以理解的是,当施力件54与转动件533的第一端部5332之间的磁吸力大于弹性件534的弹力时,转动件533的第二端部5333拉伸弹性件534,转动件533的中部5331随着套环5322相对主轴5321转动而转动。此时,转动件533的第一端部5332转动至与磁性件541接触。转动件533带动限位块535转动,以使限位块535与第一移动支架143分开。第一移动支架143处于解锁状态。Unlocked state: please refer to FIG. 28, in conjunction with FIG. 26, FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the second embodiment. When the first moving bracket 143 starts to move relative to the target position, the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first circuit board 51 , the coil 542 is energized, and the coil 542 generates a magnetic field. At this time, since the material of the rotating member 533 is a magnetic material, a magnetic attraction force is generated between the force applying member 54 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 is subjected to a pulling force along the negative direction of the Z-axis. In addition, since the elastic member 534 is in a stretched state, the elastic member 534 exerts a pulling force along the negative direction of the Z axis on the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 receives an elastic force along the positive direction of the Z-axis. It can be understood that when the magnetic attraction force between the force applying member 54 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 is greater than the elastic force of the elastic member 534, the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 stretches the elastic member 534, and the rotating member The middle portion 5331 of 533 rotates as the collar 5322 rotates relative to the main shaft 5321 . At this time, the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 is rotated to contact the magnetic member 541 . The rotating member 533 drives the limiting block 535 to rotate, so that the limiting block 535 is separated from the first moving bracket 143 . The first moving bracket 143 is in an unlocked state.
在一种场景下,自锁组件50的解锁状态可以应用于摄像模组100在启动对焦的场景中。In one scenario, the unlocked state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scenario in which the camera module 100 starts focusing.
上文具体介绍了本实施方式的第二种实施方式的自锁组件50。下文将结合上文各个附图描述本实施方式的自锁组件50的几个设置效果。The self-locking assembly 50 of the second embodiment of the present embodiment is described in detail above. Several setting effects of the self-locking assembly 50 of this embodiment will be described below with reference to the above figures.
在本实施方式中,施力件54施加于转动件533的作用力的方向与限位块535施加于第一移动支架143的压力的方向相反。此时,施力件54与第一移动支架143位于转动件533的不同侧。当第一移动支架143沿X轴方向移动时,第一移动支架143不容易与施力件54相互干涉。另外,施力件54产生的磁场不容易影响第一移动支架143沿X轴方向移动。In this embodiment, the direction of the force applied by the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 is opposite to the direction of the pressure applied by the limiting block 535 to the first moving bracket 143 . At this time, the force applying member 54 and the first moving bracket 143 are located on different sides of the rotating member 533 . When the first moving bracket 143 moves along the X-axis direction, the first moving bracket 143 is less likely to interfere with the force applying member 54 . In addition, the magnetic field generated by the force-applying member 54 cannot easily affect the movement of the first moving bracket 143 along the X-axis direction.
在其他实施方式中,施力件54施加于转动件533的作用力的方向与限位块535施加于第一移动支架143的压力的方向相同。In other embodiments, the direction of the force applied by the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 is the same as the direction of the pressure applied by the limiting block 535 to the first moving bracket 143 .
在本实施例中,限位块535与转动件533的连接位置为第一位置。本实施方式的第一位置位于转动件533的第一端部5332。施力件54与转动件533的连接位置(也即施力件54对转动件533的施力位置)为第二位置。本实施方式的第二位置也位于转动件533的第一端部5332。第一位置与第二位置均位于转动件533的转动位置的同一侧。此时,自锁组件50的结构较紧凑。施力件54对限位块535的施力距离较短。In this embodiment, the connection position of the limiting block 535 and the rotating member 533 is the first position. The first position in this embodiment is located at the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 . The connection position of the force applying member 54 and the rotating member 533 (that is, the force applying position of the force applying member 54 to the rotating member 533 ) is the second position. The second position of this embodiment is also located at the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . Both the first position and the second position are located on the same side of the rotating position of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the structure of the self-locking assembly 50 is relatively compact. The force-applying distance of the force-applying member 54 to the limiting block 535 is relatively short.
在其他实施例中,第一位置与第二位置也可以位于转动件533的不同侧。例如,第一位置位于转动件533的第一端部5332。第二位置位于转动件533的第二端部5333。In other embodiments, the first position and the second position may also be located on different sides of the rotating member 533 . For example, the first position is at the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . The second position is located at the second end 5333 of the rotating member 533 .
在本实施例中,弹性件534与施力件54位于转动件533的同一侧。此时,当第一移动支架143在移动过程中,弹性件534不容易与第一移动支架143相互碰撞或者相互干涉。In this embodiment, the elastic member 534 and the force applying member 54 are located on the same side of the rotating member 533 . At this time, when the first moving bracket 143 is moving, the elastic member 534 is not likely to collide with or interfere with each other with the first moving bracket 143 .
另外,弹性件534与施力件54位于转动件533的转动位置的两边。此时,施力件54在对转动件533施力时,弹性件534不容易与施力件54相互干涉。In addition, the elastic member 534 and the force-applying member 54 are located on both sides of the rotating position of the rotating member 533 . At this time, when the urging member 54 urges the rotating member 533 , the elastic member 534 and the urging member 54 cannot easily interfere with each other.
在其他实施例中,弹性件534位于转动件533靠近第一移动支架143的一侧。In other embodiments, the elastic member 534 is located on the side of the rotating member 533 close to the first moving bracket 143 .
在其他实施例中,弹性件534也可以与施力件54位于转动件533的转动位置的同一侧。In other embodiments, the elastic member 534 and the force applying member 54 may also be located on the same side of the rotation position of the rotating member 533 .
上文具体介绍了一种摄像模组100的结构。下文将结合上文的摄像模组100的结构(请参阅图21至图28)介绍一种摄像模组100的拍摄方法。The structure of a camera module 100 is described in detail above. Hereinafter, a photographing method of the camera module 100 will be introduced in conjunction with the structure of the camera module 100 (please refer to FIG. 21 to FIG. 28 ).
摄像模组100的拍摄方法包括;The shooting method of the camera module 100 includes;
接收拍摄信号。可以理解的是,拍摄信号可以是在用户按压屏幕10时,屏幕10产生的信号。此外,拍摄信号也可以是在用户按压屏幕10时,屏幕10产生触控信号,并将触控信号发送给主机电路板90,主机电路板90上的芯片对触控信号进行处理所形成的信号。Receive the shooting signal. It can be understood that the shooting signal may be a signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 . In addition, the shooting signal may also be a signal formed by the touch signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 and sent to the host circuit board 90 , where the chip on the host circuit board 90 processes the touch signal. .
在本实施方式中,模组电路板20可以用于接收拍摄信号。In this embodiment, the module circuit board 20 may be used to receive a shooting signal.
控制施力件54通电,以使施力件54对转动件533施加作用力,以驱动转动件533克服弹性件534的弹力,带动限位块535转动,并离开第一移动支架143。可以理解的是,本实施方式以自锁组件50用于锁紧第一移动支架143为例进行描述,在其他实施方式中,自锁组件50也可以用于锁紧第二移动支架144。另外,当自锁组件50为两套时,一套自锁组件50用于锁紧第一移动支架143,另一套用于锁紧第二移动支架144。The force applying member 54 is controlled to be energized, so that the force applying member 54 exerts a force on the rotating member 533 to drive the rotating member 533 to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , drive the limiting block 535 to rotate, and leave the first moving bracket 143 . It can be understood that this embodiment is described by taking the self-locking assembly 50 for locking the first moving bracket 143 as an example. In other embodiments, the self-locking assembly 50 can also be used for locking the second moving support 144 . In addition, when there are two sets of self-locking components 50 , one set of self-locking components 50 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143 , and the other set is used to lock the second moving bracket 144 .
具体的,施力件54包括磁性件541及缠绕于磁性件541表面的线圈542。当模组电路板20接收拍摄信号之后,模组电路板20控制线圈542通电。此时,线圈542产生磁场。由于转动件533的材质为磁性材料,施力件54与转动件533的第一端部5332之间产生磁吸力。此时,转动件533的第一端部5332受到沿Z轴负方向的拉力。另外,由于弹性件534处于拉伸状态,弹性件534对转动件533的第二端部5333施加有沿Z轴负方向的拉力。此时,转动件533的第一端部5332受到有沿Z轴正方向的弹力。可以理解的是,当施力件54与转动件533的第一端部5332之间的磁吸力大于弹性件534的弹力时,转动件533克服弹性件534的弹力,转动件533的第二端部5333拉伸弹性件534,转动件533的中部5331随着套环5322相对主轴5321转动而转动。此时,转动件533的第一端部5332转动至与磁性件541接触。这样,转动件533带动限位块535转动,以使限位块535与第一移动支架143分开。Specifically, the force applying member 54 includes a magnetic member 541 and a coil 542 wound on the surface of the magnetic member 541 . After the module circuit board 20 receives the shooting signal, the module circuit board 20 controls the coil 542 to energize. At this time, the coil 542 generates a magnetic field. Since the material of the rotating member 533 is a magnetic material, a magnetic attraction force is generated between the force applying member 54 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 is subjected to a pulling force along the negative direction of the Z-axis. In addition, since the elastic member 534 is in a stretched state, the elastic member 534 exerts a pulling force along the negative direction of the Z axis on the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the first end portion 5332 of the rotating member 533 receives an elastic force along the positive direction of the Z-axis. It can be understood that when the magnetic attraction force between the force applying member 54 and the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 is greater than the elastic force of the elastic member 534, the rotating member 533 overcomes the elastic force of the elastic member 534, and the second end of the rotating member 533 overcomes the elastic force of the elastic member 534. The portion 5333 stretches the elastic member 534, and the middle portion 5331 of the rotating member 533 rotates as the collar 5322 rotates relative to the main shaft 5321. At this time, the first end 5332 of the rotating member 533 is rotated to contact the magnetic member 541 . In this way, the rotating member 533 drives the limiting block 535 to rotate, so that the limiting block 535 is separated from the first moving bracket 143 .
控制第一移动支架143带动第一透镜151沿光学镜头10的光轴方向移动。The first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move along the direction of the optical axis of the optical lens 10 .
可以理解的是,由于光学镜头10的光轴方向为X轴方向,第一移动支架143能够带动第一透镜151沿X轴正方向或者X轴负方向的移动。第一透镜151的移动距离可根据用户的对焦需求而设置。It can be understood that, since the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 is the X axis direction, the first moving bracket 143 can drive the first lens 151 to move along the X axis positive direction or the X axis negative direction. The moving distance of the first lens 151 can be set according to the user's focusing requirement.
在本实施方式中,模组电路板20通过镜头电路板16对第一线圈146传输电流信号时,第一线圈146通电,第一磁铁145在第一线圈146的作用下可以产生沿X轴负方向的安培力。此时,第一磁铁145在安培力下推动第一移动支架143沿X轴负方向移动。这样,固定于第一移动支架143的第一透镜151也能够沿X轴负方向移动。In this embodiment, when the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 through the lens circuit board 16, the first coil 146 is energized, and the first magnet 145 can generate a negative force along the X-axis under the action of the first coil 146. direction of ampere force. At this time, the first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move in the negative direction of the X-axis under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the first moving bracket 143 can also move in the negative direction of the X-axis.
当第一移动支架143移动至目标位置时,控制施力件54断电,转动件533在弹性件534的弹力下带动限位块535转动,以使限位块535压紧第一移动支架143。When the first moving bracket 143 moves to the target position, the control force application member 54 is powered off, and the rotating member 533 drives the limit block 535 to rotate under the elastic force of the elastic member 534, so that the limit block 535 presses the first moving bracket 143 .
具体的,当第一移动支架143移动至目标位置时,模组电路板20控制线圈542断电。此时,线圈542未通电。线圈542未产生磁场。此外,由于弹性件534处于拉伸状态,弹性件534对转动件533的第二端部5333施加有沿Z轴负方向的弹力。此时,限位块535在弹性件534的弹力下与第一移动支架143接触,并与第一移动支架143之间产生静摩擦力。这样,限位块535能够压紧第一移动支架143。Specifically, when the first moving bracket 143 moves to the target position, the module circuit board 20 controls the coil 542 to power off. At this time, the coil 542 is not energized. Coil 542 produces no magnetic field. In addition, since the elastic member 534 is in a stretched state, the elastic member 534 applies an elastic force along the negative direction of the Z-axis to the second end portion 5333 of the rotating member 533 . At this time, the limiting block 535 is in contact with the first moving bracket 143 under the elastic force of the elastic member 534 , and a static friction force is generated between the limiting block 535 and the first moving bracket 143 . In this way, the limiting block 535 can press the first moving bracket 143 .
控制感光芯片30将光信号转换成电信号并输出。The photosensitive chip 30 is controlled to convert the optical signal into an electrical signal and output it.
具体的,模组电路板20控制感光芯片30采集穿过光学镜头10的环境光线。将采集的环境光线转换成电信号,并将电信号输出至主机电路板90。Specifically, the module circuit board 20 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to collect ambient light passing through the optical lens 10 . The collected ambient light is converted into electrical signals, and the electrical signals are output to the host circuit board 90 .
在本实施方式中,通过自锁组件50将第一移动支架143进行锁紧,从而使得第一移动支架143上的第一透镜151的稳定较佳,也即第一移动支架143上的第一透镜151不容易因外界的抖动或者振动而发生移动,从而当用户在拍摄照片时,拍摄的图像不容易出现变形或模糊。特别是,当用户在运动过程中拍照时,摄像模组100拍摄的图像的效果也较佳。In this embodiment, the first moving bracket 143 is locked by the self-locking component 50, so that the stability of the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is better, that is, the first lens 151 on the first moving bracket 143 is better The lens 151 is not easily moved due to external shaking or vibration, so that when the user is taking a photo, the captured image is not easily deformed or blurred. In particular, when the user takes a photo during exercise, the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is also better.
在其他实施例中,第二移动支架144处也可以设置有自锁组件50。此时,自锁组件50也能够对第二移动支架144实行上述步骤。具体的这里不再赘述。In other embodiments, the second moving bracket 144 may also be provided with a self-locking assembly 50 . At this time, the self-locking assembly 50 can also perform the above steps on the second moving bracket 144 . The details are not repeated here.
一种实施方式中,在“控制第一移动支架143带动第一透镜151沿光学镜头10的光轴方 向移动”之后,方法还包括:In one embodiment, after "controlling the first moving bracket 143 to drive the first lens 151 to move in the direction of the optical axis of the optical lens 10", the method further includes:
霍尔传感器171检测检测磁铁172的磁场强度。The Hall sensor 171 detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet 172 .
当确认出磁场强度不等于预设磁场强度时,控制第一移动支架143带动第一透镜151沿光学镜头的光轴方向移动至目标位置。When it is confirmed that the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength, the first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
可以理解的是,通过霍尔传感器171与检测磁铁172能够提高摄像模组100的对焦的准确度,从而使得摄像模组100拍摄的图像的效果较佳。It can be understood that the focusing accuracy of the camera module 100 can be improved by the Hall sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 , so that the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is better.
上文具体介绍了两一种镜头组件101的设置方式。下文将结合相关附图具体介绍再一种镜头组件101的设置方式。The above has specifically introduced two ways of setting the lens assembly 101 . Hereinafter, another setting manner of the lens assembly 101 will be described in detail with reference to the related drawings.
第三种实施方式中,与第一种实施方式及第二种实施方式的相同的技术内容不再赘述:请参阅图29,图29是图6所示的镜头组件101的再一种实施方式的部分分解示意图。镜头组件101包括外壳12、马达14、透镜15、镜头电路板16、霍尔传感器171、检测磁铁172以及自锁组件50。其中,外壳12、马达14、透镜15、镜头电路板16、霍尔传感器171、检测磁铁172的设置方式可以参阅第一种实施方式的外壳12、马达14、透镜15、镜头电路板16、霍尔传感器171、检测磁铁172的设置方式。这里不再赘述。In the third embodiment, the same technical content as the first embodiment and the second embodiment will not be repeated. Please refer to FIG. 29 , which is another embodiment of the lens assembly 101 shown in FIG. 6 . Partially exploded schematic diagram of . The lens assembly 101 includes a housing 12 , a motor 14 , a lens 15 , a lens circuit board 16 , a hall sensor 171 , a detection magnet 172 and a self-locking assembly 50 . The arrangement of the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 171 , and the detection magnet 172 may refer to the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 172 in the first embodiment. The arrangement of the sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172. I won't go into details here.
请参阅图30,图30是图4所示的摄像模组100在第三种实施方式下的结构的一种状态的示意图。自锁组件50靠近第二移动支架144设置。自锁组件50用于在通电的情况下锁紧第二移动支架144。自锁组件50的通电的情况可以根据第二移动支架144是否相对移动决定。例如,当第二移动支架144未相对移动时,自锁组件50未通电。当第二移动支架144相对移动时,自锁组件50通电。另外,当第二移动支架144未相对移动时,第二移动支架144处于固定位置。固定位置为摄像模组100未启动拍摄时第二移动支架144的一个位置。Please refer to FIG. 30 . FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in the third embodiment. The self-locking assembly 50 is disposed adjacent to the second moving bracket 144 . The self-locking assembly 50 is used to lock the second moving bracket 144 when the power is turned on. The power-on condition of the self-locking assembly 50 can be determined according to whether the second moving bracket 144 moves relatively. For example, when the second moving bracket 144 is not relatively moved, the self-locking assembly 50 is not powered. When the second moving bracket 144 moves relatively, the self-locking assembly 50 is powered on. In addition, when the second moving bracket 144 is not relatively moved, the second moving bracket 144 is in a fixed position. The fixed position is a position of the second moving bracket 144 when the camera module 100 does not start shooting.
在本实施例中,自锁组件50用于在通电的情况下锁紧第二移动支架144的第四部分1442。可以理解的是,相较于第一种实施方式与第二种实施方式的自锁组件50,本实施方式的自锁组件50是对处于固定位置的第二移动支架144进行锁紧。该位置可根据需求灵活设置。In the present embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 is used to lock the fourth part 1442 of the second moving bracket 144 under the condition of electrification. It can be understood that, compared with the self-locking assembly 50 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 of this embodiment locks the second moving bracket 144 in a fixed position. The location can be flexibly set according to needs.
在其他实施例中,自锁组件50也可以用于在通电的情况下锁紧第二移动支架144的第三部分1441。In other embodiments, the self-locking assembly 50 can also be used to lock the third portion 1441 of the second moving bracket 144 when powered on.
在其他实施例中,部分自锁组件50也可以靠近第一移动支架143设置。自锁组件50可以用于在通电的情况下,锁紧第一移动支架143。In other embodiments, part of the self-locking assembly 50 may also be disposed near the first moving bracket 143 . The self-locking assembly 50 can be used to lock the first moving bracket 143 when the power is turned on.
在其他实施例中,自锁组件50为两套。一套靠近第一移动支架143设置,另一套靠近第二移动支架144设置。此时,自锁组件50既能够用于在通电的情况下锁紧第一移动支架143,又能够在通电的情况下锁紧第二移动支架144。In other embodiments, there are two sets of self-locking assemblies 50 . One set is arranged near the first moving bracket 143 , and the other set is arranged near the second moving bracket 144 . At this time, the self-locking assembly 50 can be used not only to lock the first moving bracket 143 under the condition of electrification, but also to lock the second moving bracket 144 under the condition of electrification.
请参阅图31,图31是图30所示的自锁组件50的部分分解示意图。自锁组件50包括第一电路板51、第一卡扣件52以及第二卡扣件53。Please refer to FIG. 31 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 30 . The self-locking assembly 50 includes a first circuit board 51 , a first fastener 52 and a second fastener 53 .
其中,第一电路板51的设置方式可以参阅第二种实施方式的第一电路板51的设置方式。这里不再赘述。第一电路板51包括第一引脚511与第二引脚512。The arrangement of the first circuit board 51 may refer to the arrangement of the first circuit board 51 in the second embodiment. I won't go into details here. The first circuit board 51 includes a first lead 511 and a second lead 512 .
其中,第一卡扣件52为板状结构。第一卡扣件52开设有第一通孔521。第一通孔521贯穿第一卡扣件52相对的两个表面。结合图30所示,部分第一卡扣件52固定于第二移动支架144的第四部分1442,部分第一卡扣件52朝基板13的方向伸出。在本实施方式中,第一卡扣件52可以通过胶水或者胶带固定于第二移动支架144的第四部分1442。在其他实施方式中,第一卡扣件52也可以与第二移动支架144的第四部分1442为一体成型结构。Wherein, the first fastener 52 is a plate-like structure. The first fastener 52 defines a first through hole 521 . The first through hole 521 penetrates through two opposite surfaces of the first clip 52 . Referring to FIG. 30 , part of the first fastener 52 is fixed to the fourth part 1442 of the second moving bracket 144 , and part of the first fastener 52 protrudes toward the substrate 13 . In this embodiment, the first snap member 52 can be fixed to the fourth portion 1442 of the second moving bracket 144 by glue or adhesive tape. In other embodiments, the first snap member 52 may also be integrally formed with the fourth portion 1442 of the second moving bracket 144 .
请参阅图32,图32是图30所示的第二卡扣件53的部分分解示意图。第二卡扣件53包 括底座531、施力件532、弹性件533、滑动块534以及限位块535。可以理解的是,弹性件533可以为弹簧或者弹片。本实施例的弹性件533以弹簧为例。Please refer to FIG. 32 . FIG. 32 is a partially exploded schematic view of the second fastener 53 shown in FIG. 30 . The second latching member 53 includes a base 531 , a force applying member 532 , an elastic member 533 , a sliding block 534 and a limiting block 535 . It can be understood that the elastic member 533 may be a spring or an elastic sheet. The elastic member 533 in this embodiment is a spring as an example.
其中,底座531包括固定部5311、连接部5312、第一限位部5313以及第二限位部5314。连接部5312位于固定部5311的一侧,且连接于固定部5311的周缘。第一限位部5313以及第二限位部5314均连接于连接部5312。第一限位部5313以及第二限位部5314与固定部5311位于连接部5312的同一侧。第一限位部5313与第二限位部5314相对设置。在本实施方式中,固定部5311、连接部5312、第一限位部5313以及第二限位部5314为一体成型结构。图32通过虚线示意性地区分了固定部5311、连接部5312、第一限位部5313以及第二限位部5314。在其他实施方式中,固定部5311、连接部5312、第一限位部5313以及第二限位部5314也可以通过胶带或者胶水粘接。The base 531 includes a fixing portion 5311 , a connecting portion 5312 , a first limiting portion 5313 and a second limiting portion 5314 . The connecting portion 5312 is located on one side of the fixing portion 5311 and is connected to the periphery of the fixing portion 5311 . The first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 are both connected to the connecting portion 5312 . The first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 and the fixing portion 5311 are located on the same side of the connecting portion 5312 . The first limiting portion 5313 is disposed opposite to the second limiting portion 5314 . In this embodiment, the fixing portion 5311 , the connecting portion 5312 , the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 are integrally formed. FIG. 32 schematically distinguishes the fixing portion 5311 , the connecting portion 5312 , the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 by dotted lines. In other embodiments, the fixing portion 5311 , the connecting portion 5312 , the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 may also be bonded by adhesive tape or glue.
结合图30所示,连接部5312固定于底板122。此时,底座531固定于底板122。在其他实施例中,部分连接部5312固定于第一电路板51,部分连接部5312固定于底板122。As shown in FIG. 30 , the connecting portion 5312 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 . At this time, the base 531 is fixed to the bottom plate 122 . In other embodiments, some of the connecting portions 5312 are fixed to the first circuit board 51 , and some of the connecting portions 5312 are fixed to the bottom plate 122 .
请再次参阅32,固定部5311开设有第二通孔5315。第二通孔5315贯穿固定部5311的相对两个表面。Please refer to 32 again, the fixing portion 5311 defines a second through hole 5315 . The second through holes 5315 penetrate through opposite surfaces of the fixing portion 5311 .
另外,施力件532的设置方式可以参阅第二种实施方式的施力件54的设置方式。施力件532包括磁性件5321及缠绕于磁性件5321表面的线圈5322。In addition, for the arrangement of the force-applying member 532, reference may be made to the arrangement of the force-applying member 54 in the second embodiment. The force applying member 532 includes a magnetic member 5321 and a coil 5322 wound on the surface of the magnetic member 5321 .
请参阅图33,图33是图31所示的第二卡扣件53的部分结构示意图。磁性件5321的一端穿过固定部5311的第二通孔5315(请参阅图32),并固定连接于第二通孔5315的孔壁。线圈5322位于固定部5311靠近第一限位部5313以及第二限位部5314的一侧。结合图31所示,线圈5322的输入端电连接于第一电路板51的第一引脚511。线圈5322的输出端电连接于第一电路板51的第二引脚512。此时,第一电路板51与线圈5322形成电流通路。Please refer to FIG. 33 . FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the second fastener 53 shown in FIG. 31 . One end of the magnetic member 5321 passes through the second through hole 5315 of the fixing portion 5311 (please refer to FIG. 32 ), and is fixedly connected to the hole wall of the second through hole 5315 . The coil 5322 is located on the side of the fixing portion 5311 close to the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 . As shown in FIG. 31 , the input end of the coil 5322 is electrically connected to the first pin 511 of the first circuit board 51 . The output end of the coil 5322 is electrically connected to the second pin 512 of the first circuit board 51 . At this time, the first circuit board 51 and the coil 5322 form a current path.
请参阅图34,并结合图33所示,图34是图31所示的第二卡扣件53的部分结构示意图。弹性件533套设施力件532,也即施力件532位于弹性件533的内部。此时,施力件532能够有效地利用弹性件533的内部空间,提高自锁组件50的空间利用率。另外,弹性件533的一端固定于底座531的固定部5311。此时,弹性件533位于第一卡扣件52远离第二移动支架144(请参阅图30)的一侧。在其他实施例中,弹性件533未套设施力件532,弹性件533与施力件532间隔设置。Please refer to FIG. 34 in conjunction with FIG. 33 . FIG. 34 is a partial structural diagram of the second fastener 53 shown in FIG. 31 . The elastic member 533 sets the force member 532 , that is, the force application member 532 is located inside the elastic member 533 . At this time, the force-applying member 532 can effectively utilize the inner space of the elastic member 533 to improve the space utilization rate of the self-locking assembly 50 . In addition, one end of the elastic member 533 is fixed to the fixing portion 5311 of the base 531 . At this time, the elastic member 533 is located on the side of the first locking member 52 away from the second moving bracket 144 (please refer to FIG. 30 ). In other embodiments, the elastic member 533 is not provided with the force member 532 , and the elastic member 533 and the force application member 532 are arranged at intervals.
另外,滑动块534固定于弹性件533远离固定部5311的一端。此时,磁性件5321的一端朝向滑动块534。另外,滑动块534滑动连接于第一限位部5313与第二限位部5314之间。滑动块534的材质为磁性材料。例如,滑动块534为磁铁或者磁钢。In addition, the sliding block 534 is fixed to the end of the elastic member 533 away from the fixing portion 5311 . At this time, one end of the magnetic member 5321 faces the sliding block 534 . In addition, the sliding block 534 is slidably connected between the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 . The material of the sliding block 534 is a magnetic material. For example, the sliding block 534 is a magnet or magnetic steel.
另外,限位块535连接于滑动块534远离弹性件533的一侧。此时,限位块535位于弹性件533与第一移动支架143(请参阅图30)之间。限位块535的材质可以与滑动块534的材质不同,也可以相同。例如,当限位块535的材质与滑动块534的材质不同时,限位块535的材质可以参阅第一种实施方式的限位块535的材质。In addition, the limiting block 535 is connected to a side of the sliding block 534 away from the elastic member 533 . At this time, the limiting block 535 is located between the elastic member 533 and the first moving bracket 143 (please refer to FIG. 30 ). The material of the limiting block 535 may be different from the material of the sliding block 534, or may be the same. For example, when the material of the limiting block 535 is different from the material of the sliding block 534, the material of the limiting block 535 can refer to the material of the limiting block 535 of the first embodiment.
在本实施方式中,限位块535通过胶水或者胶带固定于滑动块534远离弹性件533的一侧。在其他实施方式中,滑动块534与限位块535也可以为一体成型结构。In this embodiment, the limiting block 535 is fixed to the side of the sliding block 534 away from the elastic member 533 by glue or tape. In other embodiments, the sliding block 534 and the limiting block 535 may also be integrally formed.
可以理解的是,限位块535用于在线圈5322通电的情况下锁紧第二移动支架144。线圈5322的通电的情况可以根据第二移动支架144是否相对移动决定。例如,当第二移动支架144未相对移动时,线圈5322未通电。当第二移动支架144相对移动时,线圈5322通电。另外,当第二移动支架144未相对移动时,第二移动支架144处于目标位置。It can be understood that the limiting block 535 is used to lock the second moving bracket 144 when the coil 5322 is powered on. The energization of the coil 5322 can be determined according to whether the second moving bracket 144 is relatively moved. For example, when the second moving bracket 144 is not relatively moving, the coil 5322 is not energized. When the second moving bracket 144 is relatively moved, the coil 5322 is energized. In addition, when the second moving bracket 144 is not relatively moved, the second moving bracket 144 is in the target position.
在本实施方式中,自锁组件50具有两种状态。一种是锁紧状态。一种是解锁状态。下面 将结合相关附图具体介绍这两种状态。In this embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 has two states. One is the locked state. One is the unlocked state. The two states will be described in detail below with reference to the relevant drawings.
锁紧状态:请参阅图35,图35是图30所示的部分摄像模组100在D处的放大示意图。当第二移动支架144移动至固定位置时,模组电路板20未向第一电路板51传输电信号。此时,线圈5322未通电(请参阅图33)。线圈5322未产生磁场。另外,由于弹性件533处于压缩状态,弹性件533对滑动块534施加有沿Y轴负方向的弹力。此时,滑动块534被挤压在弹性件533与第一限位部5313的顶部以及第二限位部5314的顶部之间。这样,限位块535在滑动块534的支撑力下,部分限位块535位于第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521内。由于第一通孔521的孔壁可以限制限位块535移动,第二移动支架144处于锁紧状态。Locked state: please refer to FIG. 35 , which is an enlarged schematic view of part of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 30 at D. When the second moving bracket 144 moves to the fixed position, the module circuit board 20 does not transmit electrical signals to the first circuit board 51 . At this point, the coil 5322 is not energized (see Figure 33). Coil 5322 produces no magnetic field. In addition, since the elastic member 533 is in a compressed state, the elastic member 533 applies an elastic force along the negative direction of the Y-axis to the sliding block 534 . At this time, the sliding block 534 is squeezed between the elastic member 533 and the top of the first limiting portion 5313 and the top of the second limiting portion 5314 . In this way, under the support force of the sliding block 534 , part of the limiting block 535 is located in the first through hole 521 of the first locking member 52 . Since the hole wall of the first through hole 521 can limit the movement of the limiting block 535, the second moving bracket 144 is in a locked state.
可以理解的是,通过将限位块535挤压在第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521内,可以使得限位块535的稳定性更佳,也即限位块535不容易从第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521内移出。It can be understood that by squeezing the limiting block 535 into the first through hole 521 of the first snap member 52, the stability of the limiting block 535 can be improved, that is, the limiting block 535 is not easily removed from the first through hole 521. A latch 52 is moved out of the first through hole 521 .
一种实施方式中,自锁组件50的锁紧状态可以应用于摄像模组100处于未使用状态的场景中。In one embodiment, the locking state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scene where the camera module 100 is not in use.
在其他实施例中,弹性件533也可以处于自然状态。此时,部分限位块535也可以位于第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521内。In other embodiments, the elastic member 533 may also be in a natural state. At this time, part of the limiting block 535 may also be located in the first through hole 521 of the first clip 52 .
解锁状态:请参阅图36,图36是图4所示的摄像模组100在第三种实施方式下的结构的另一种状态的示意图。当第二移动支架144需要自固定位置沿X轴方向移动时,模组电路板20向第一电路板51传输电信号,线圈5322(请参阅图33)通电,线圈5322产生磁场。此时,由于滑动块534的材质为磁性材料,施力件532与滑动块534之间产生磁吸力。此时,滑动块534受到施力件532施加的作用力,该作用力为施力件532与滑动块534之间的磁吸力。另外,由于弹性件533处于压缩状态,弹性件533对滑动块534施加有沿Y轴负方向的弹力。当滑动块534受到磁吸力大于滑动块534受到沿Y轴负方向的弹力时,滑动块534在拉力的作用下,相对第一限位部5313与第二限位部5314沿Y轴的正方向滑动。此时,限位块535在滑动块534的拉力下,克服弹性件533的弹力,移出第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521。第二移动支架144处于解锁状态。Unlocked state: please refer to FIG. 36 , FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the third embodiment. When the second moving bracket 144 needs to move along the X-axis from the fixed position, the module circuit board 20 transmits electrical signals to the first circuit board 51 , the coil 5322 (refer to FIG. 33 ) is energized, and the coil 5322 generates a magnetic field. At this time, since the material of the sliding block 534 is a magnetic material, a magnetic attraction force is generated between the force applying member 532 and the sliding block 534 . At this time, the sliding block 534 is subjected to the force exerted by the force applying member 532 , and the force is the magnetic attraction force between the force applying member 532 and the sliding block 534 . In addition, since the elastic member 533 is in a compressed state, the elastic member 533 applies an elastic force along the negative direction of the Y-axis to the sliding block 534 . When the magnetic attraction force of the sliding block 534 is greater than the elastic force of the sliding block 534 along the negative direction of the Y-axis, the sliding block 534 will be in the positive direction of the Y-axis relative to the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 under the action of the pulling force. slide. At this time, under the pulling force of the sliding block 534 , the limiting block 535 overcomes the elastic force of the elastic member 533 and moves out of the first through hole 521 of the first locking member 52 . The second moving bracket 144 is in an unlocked state.
在一种场景下,自锁组件50的解锁状态可以应用于摄像模组100开始使用的场景中。In one scenario, the unlocked state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to the scenario in which the camera module 100 starts to be used.
在其他实施方式中,本实施方式的第二卡扣件53的结构也可以采用第一种实施方式的连接器52、自锁件53以及施力件54所构成的结构。In other embodiments, the structure of the second latching member 53 of the present embodiment may also adopt the structure composed of the connector 52 , the self-locking member 53 and the force-applying member 54 of the first embodiment.
在其他实施方式中,本实施方式的第二卡扣件53的结构也可以采用第二种实施方式的自锁件53以及施力件54所构成的结构。In other embodiments, the structure of the second latching member 53 of the present embodiment may also adopt the structure composed of the self-locking member 53 and the force applying member 54 of the second embodiment.
在其他实施方式中,第一种实施方式的连接器52、自锁件53以及施力件54所构成的结构也可以采用本实施方式的第二卡扣件53的结构。In other embodiments, the structure constituted by the connector 52 , the self-locking member 53 and the force applying member 54 in the first embodiment may also adopt the structure of the second latching member 53 in this embodiment.
在其他实施方式中,第二种实施方式的自锁件53以及施力件54所构成的结构也可以采用本实施方式的第二卡扣件53的结构。In other embodiments, the structure formed by the self-locking member 53 and the force-applying member 54 of the second embodiment may also adopt the structure of the second locking member 53 of the present embodiment.
上文具体介绍了一种摄像模组100的结构。下文将结合上文的摄像模组100的结构(请参阅图1至图12以及图29至图36)介绍另一种摄像模组100的拍摄方法。The structure of a camera module 100 is described in detail above. Hereinafter, another photographing method of the camera module 100 will be described in conjunction with the structure of the camera module 100 (please refer to FIGS. 1 to 12 and FIGS. 29 to 36 ).
请参阅图37,图37是图1所示的摄像模组100在第三种实施方式下的拍摄方法的流程示意图。摄像模组100的拍摄方法包括:Please refer to FIG. 37 . FIG. 37 is a schematic flowchart of a photographing method of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 1 in the third embodiment. The shooting method of the camera module 100 includes:
S100接收拍摄信号。可以理解的是,拍摄信号可以是在用户按压屏幕10时,屏幕10产生的信号。此外,拍摄信号也可以是在用户按压屏幕10时,屏幕10产生触控信号,并将触控信号发送给主机电路板90,主机电路板90上的芯片对触控信号进行处理所形成的信号。The S100 receives the shooting signal. It can be understood that the shooting signal may be a signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 . In addition, the shooting signal may also be a signal formed by the touch signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 and sent to the host circuit board 90 , where the chip on the host circuit board 90 processes the touch signal. .
在本实施方式中,模组电路板20可以用于接收拍摄信号。In this embodiment, the module circuit board 20 may be used to receive a shooting signal.
S200控制施力件532通电,以使施力件532向限位块535施加作用力,以驱动限位块535克服弹性件533的弹力,移出第一通孔521。S200 controls the force application member 532 to be energized, so that the force application member 532 applies a force to the limit block 535 to drive the limit block 535 to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member 533 and move out of the first through hole 521 .
在本实施方式中,施力件532包括磁性件5321及缠绕于磁性件5321表面的线圈5322。当模组电路板20接收拍摄信号之后,模组电路板20控制线圈5322通电。线圈5322产生磁场。此外,由于滑动块534的材质为磁性材料,施力件532与滑动块534之间产生磁吸力。此时,滑动块534受到沿Y轴正方向的拉力。另外,由于弹性件533处于压缩状态,弹性件533对滑动块534施加有沿Y轴负方向的弹力。当滑动块534受到沿Y轴正方向的拉力大于滑动块534受到沿Y轴负方向的弹力时,滑动块534在拉力的作用下,相对第一限位部5313与第二限位部5314沿Y轴的正方向滑动。限位块535在滑动块534的拉力下,克服弹性件533的弹力,移出第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521。In this embodiment, the force applying member 532 includes a magnetic member 5321 and a coil 5322 wound on the surface of the magnetic member 5321 . After the module circuit board 20 receives the shooting signal, the module circuit board 20 controls the coil 5322 to energize. Coil 5322 generates a magnetic field. In addition, since the material of the sliding block 534 is a magnetic material, a magnetic attraction force is generated between the force applying member 532 and the sliding block 534 . At this time, the sliding block 534 is pulled along the positive direction of the Y-axis. In addition, since the elastic member 533 is in a compressed state, the elastic member 533 applies an elastic force along the negative direction of the Y-axis to the sliding block 534 . When the pulling force of the sliding block 534 in the positive direction of the Y-axis is greater than the elastic force of the sliding block 534 in the negative direction of the Y-axis, under the action of the pulling force, the sliding block 534 is relatively opposite to the first limiting portion 5313 and the second limiting portion 5314 along the Sliding in the positive direction of the Y-axis. Under the pulling force of the sliding block 534 , the limiting block 535 overcomes the elastic force of the elastic member 533 and moves out of the first through hole 521 of the first locking member 52 .
S300控制第二移动支架144带动第一透镜151自固定位置沿光学镜头10的光轴方向移动至目标位置。S300 controls the second moving bracket 144 to drive the first lens 151 to move from the fixed position to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
具体的,模组电路板20通过镜头电路板16对第二线圈148传输电流信号。第二线圈148通电,第二磁铁147可以产生沿X轴负方向的安培力。此时,第二磁铁147在安培力下推动第二移动支架144沿X轴负方向移动。这样,固定于第二移动支架144的第一透镜151也能够沿X轴负方向移动。Specifically, the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the second coil 148 through the lens circuit board 16 . The second coil 148 is energized, and the second magnet 147 can generate an ampere force in the negative direction of the X-axis. At this time, the second magnet 147 pushes the second moving bracket 144 to move in the negative direction of the X-axis under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the second moving bracket 144 can also move in the negative direction of the X-axis.
可以理解的是,固定位置指的是第二移动支架144在移动行程范围内的一个位置。该位置可根据需求灵活设置。目标位置指的是第二移动支架144在移动行程范围内的任意位置。It can be understood that the fixed position refers to a position of the second moving bracket 144 within the moving range. The location can be flexibly set according to needs. The target position refers to any position of the second moving bracket 144 within the moving stroke range.
S400控制感光芯片30将光信号转换成电信号并输出。S400 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to convert optical signals into electrical signals and output them.
具体的,模组电路板20控制感光芯片30采集穿过光学镜头10的环境光线。将采集的环境光线转换成电信号,并将电信号输出至主机电路板90。Specifically, the module circuit board 20 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to collect ambient light passing through the optical lens 10 . The collected ambient light is converted into electrical signals, and the electrical signals are output to the host circuit board 90 .
S500控制第二移动支架144带动第一透镜151自目标位置沿光学镜头10的光轴方向移动至所述固定位置。S500 controls the second moving bracket 144 to drive the first lens 151 to move from the target position to the fixed position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
具体的,模组电路板20通过镜头电路板16对第二线圈148传输电流信号。第二线圈148通电,第二磁铁147可以产生沿X轴正方向的安培力。此时,第二磁铁147在安培力下推动第二移动支架144沿X轴正方向移动。这样,固定于第二移动支架144的第一透镜151也能够沿X轴正方向移动。Specifically, the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the second coil 148 through the lens circuit board 16 . When the second coil 148 is energized, the second magnet 147 can generate an ampere force along the positive direction of the X-axis. At this time, the second magnet 147 pushes the second moving bracket 144 to move in the positive direction of the X-axis under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the second moving bracket 144 can also move in the positive direction of the X-axis.
可以理解的是,通过改变第二线圈148上电流信号的方向,或者设置第二磁铁147的S极或者N极的位置,从而当第二线圈148通电时,第二磁铁147可以产生沿X轴正方向的安培力。此时,第二磁铁147在安培力下能够推动第二移动支架144沿X轴正方向移动。It can be understood that, by changing the direction of the current signal on the second coil 148, or setting the position of the S pole or the N pole of the second magnet 147, when the second coil 148 is energized, the second magnet 147 can generate electricity along the X axis. Ampere force in the positive direction. At this time, the second magnet 147 can push the second moving bracket 144 to move in the positive direction of the X-axis under the ampere force.
S600控制施力件532断电,部分限位块535在弹性件533的弹力下伸入第一通孔521内。S600 controls the power of the force-applying member 532 to be powered off, and part of the limiting block 535 extends into the first through hole 521 under the elastic force of the elastic member 533 .
具体的,当第一移动支架143移动至固定位置之后,模组电路板20控制线圈5322断电。此时,线圈5322未通电。线圈5322未产生磁场。由于弹性件533处于压缩状态,弹性件533对滑动块534施加有沿Y轴负方向的弹力。此时,滑动块534被挤压在弹性件533与第一限位部5313的顶部以及第二限位部5314的顶部之间。这样,限位块535在滑动块534的支撑力下,伸进第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521内。这样,第一通孔521的孔壁可以限制限位块535移动。Specifically, after the first moving bracket 143 is moved to the fixed position, the module circuit board 20 controls the coil 5322 to be powered off. At this time, the coil 5322 is not energized. Coil 5322 produces no magnetic field. Since the elastic member 533 is in a compressed state, the elastic member 533 exerts an elastic force along the negative direction of the Y-axis on the sliding block 534 . At this time, the sliding block 534 is squeezed between the elastic member 533 and the top of the first limiting portion 5313 and the top of the second limiting portion 5314 . In this way, the limiting block 535 extends into the first through hole 521 of the first latching member 52 under the supporting force of the sliding block 534 . In this way, the hole wall of the first through hole 521 can limit the movement of the limiting block 535 .
一种实施方式中,在“控制第二移动支架144带动第一透镜151自固定位置沿光学镜头10的光轴方向移动至目标位置,光学镜头10采集环境光线”之中,方法还包括:In one embodiment, in "controlling the second moving bracket 144 to drive the first lens 151 to move from a fixed position to a target position along the optical axis of the optical lens 10, and the optical lens 10 to collect ambient light", the method further includes:
霍尔传感器171检测检测磁铁172的磁场强度。The Hall sensor 171 detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet 172 .
当确认出磁场强度不等于预设磁场强度时,控制第一移动支架143带动第一透镜151沿光学镜头的光轴方向移动至目标位置。When it is confirmed that the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength, the first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
可以理解的是,通过霍尔传感器171与检测磁铁172能够提高摄像模组100的拍摄的准确度,从而使得摄像模组100拍摄的图像的效果较佳。It can be understood that, the Hall sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 can improve the shooting accuracy of the camera module 100 , so that the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is better.
下文将结合相关附图具体介绍再一种镜头组件101的设置方式。Hereinafter, another setting manner of the lens assembly 101 will be described in detail with reference to the related drawings.
第四种实施方式,与第一种实施方式至第三种实施方式的相同的技术内容不再赘述:请参阅图38,图38是图6所示的镜头组件101的再一种实施方式的部分分解示意图。镜头组件101包括外壳12、马达14、透镜15、镜头电路板16、霍尔传感器171、检测磁铁172以及自锁组件50。其中,外壳12、马达14、透镜15、镜头电路板16、霍尔传感器171、检测磁铁172的设置方式可以参阅第一种实施方式的外壳12、马达14、透镜15、镜头电路板16、霍尔传感器171、检测磁铁172的设置方式。这里不再赘述。In the fourth embodiment, the same technical contents as those in the first embodiment to the third embodiment will not be repeated: please refer to FIG. 38 , which is another embodiment of the lens assembly 101 shown in FIG. 6 . Partially exploded schematic. The lens assembly 101 includes a housing 12 , a motor 14 , a lens 15 , a lens circuit board 16 , a hall sensor 171 , a detection magnet 172 and a self-locking assembly 50 . The arrangement of the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 171 , and the detection magnet 172 may refer to the housing 12 , the motor 14 , the lens 15 , the lens circuit board 16 , the Hall sensor 172 in the first embodiment. The arrangement of the sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172. I won't go into details here.
请参阅图39,图39是图4所示的摄像模组100在第四种实施方式下的结构的一种状态的示意图。自锁组件50靠近第一移动支架143设置。自锁组件50用于在通电的情况下锁紧第一移动支架143。自锁组件50的通电的情况可以根据第一移动支架143是否相对移动决定。例如,当第一移动支架143未相对移动时,自锁组件50未通电。当第一移动支架143相对移动时,自锁组件50通电。另外,当第一移动支架143未相对移动时,第一移动支架143处于固定位置。固定位置为摄像模组100未启动拍摄时第一移动支架143的一个位置。Please refer to FIG. 39 . FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of a state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 in the fourth embodiment. The self-locking assembly 50 is disposed close to the first moving bracket 143 . The self-locking assembly 50 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143 when the power is turned on. The power-on condition of the self-locking assembly 50 can be determined according to whether the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively. For example, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the self-locking assembly 50 is not powered on. When the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively, the self-locking assembly 50 is powered on. In addition, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the first moving bracket 143 is in a fixed position. The fixed position is a position of the first moving bracket 143 when the camera module 100 does not start shooting.
自锁组件50用于当第一移动支架143相对导轨141移动至固定位置时,锁紧第一移动支架143。可以理解的是,与第三种实施方式相同,本实施方式的自锁组件50是对处于固定位置的第一移动支架143进行锁紧。固定位置是指第一移动支架143在移动行程范围内的一个位置。该位置可根据需求灵活设置。The self-locking assembly 50 is used for locking the first moving support 143 when the first moving support 143 moves to a fixed position relative to the guide rail 141 . It can be understood that, like the third embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 of this embodiment locks the first moving bracket 143 in a fixed position. The fixed position refers to a position of the first moving bracket 143 within the moving stroke range. The location can be flexibly set according to needs.
在其他实施例中,部分自锁组件50也可以靠近第二移动支架144设置。自锁组件50可以用于在第二移动支架144移动至固定位置时,锁紧第二移动支架144。In other embodiments, part of the self-locking assembly 50 may also be disposed near the second moving bracket 144 . The self-locking assembly 50 can be used to lock the second moving bracket 144 when the second moving bracket 144 moves to a fixed position.
在其他实施例中,自锁组件50为两套。一套靠近第一移动支架143设置,用于当第一移动支架143相对导轨141移动至固定位置时,锁紧第一移动支架143。另一套靠近第二移动支架144设置,用于在第二移动支架144移动至固定位置时,锁紧第二移动支架144。In other embodiments, there are two sets of self-locking assemblies 50 . A set is disposed close to the first moving bracket 143 for locking the first moving bracket 143 when the first moving bracket 143 moves to a fixed position relative to the guide rail 141 . Another set is disposed close to the second moving bracket 144 for locking the second moving bracket 144 when the second moving bracket 144 moves to a fixed position.
请参阅图40,图40是图39所示的自锁组件50的部分分解示意图。自锁组件50包括第一电路板51、第一卡扣件52以及第二卡扣件53。Please refer to FIG. 40 , which is a partially exploded schematic view of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 39 . The self-locking assembly 50 includes a first circuit board 51 , a first fastener 52 and a second fastener 53 .
其中,第一电路板51的设置方式可以参阅第一种实施方式的第一电路板51的设置方式。这里不再赘述。第一电路板51包括第一引脚511和第二引脚512。The arrangement of the first circuit board 51 may refer to the arrangement of the first circuit board 51 in the first embodiment. I won't go into details here. The first circuit board 51 includes first pins 511 and second pins 512 .
其中,第一卡扣件52为板状结构。第一卡扣件52开设有第一通孔521。第一通孔521贯穿第一卡扣件52相对的两个表面。结合图39所示,部分第一卡扣件52固定于第一移动支架143。Wherein, the first fastener 52 is a plate-like structure. The first fastener 52 defines a first through hole 521 . The first through hole 521 penetrates through two opposite surfaces of the first clip 52 . As shown in FIG. 39 , a part of the first latching member 52 is fixed to the first moving bracket 143 .
请参阅图41,图41是图40所示的第二卡扣件53的部分分解示意图。第二卡扣件53包括弹性件531、施力件532以及限位块533。本实施例的弹性件531以弹片为例进行描述。Please refer to FIG. 41 , FIG. 41 is a partially exploded schematic view of the second fastener 53 shown in FIG. 40 . The second latching member 53 includes an elastic member 531 , a force applying member 532 and a limiting block 533 . The elastic member 531 in this embodiment is described by taking an elastic piece as an example.
其中,弹性件531包括第一固定部5311、连接部5312以及第二固定部5313。连接部5312连接于第一固定部5311与第二固定部5313之间。第二固定部5313与第一固定部5311相对设置。此时,弹性件531大致呈“C”型。在本实施方式中,连接部5312呈弧形。弹性件531的弹性更佳。在其他实施方式中,连接部5312也可以呈条形或者其他形状。The elastic member 531 includes a first fixing portion 5311 , a connecting portion 5312 and a second fixing portion 5313 . The connecting portion 5312 is connected between the first fixing portion 5311 and the second fixing portion 5313 . The second fixing portion 5313 is disposed opposite to the first fixing portion 5311 . At this time, the elastic member 531 is approximately in a "C" shape. In this embodiment, the connecting portion 5312 is arc-shaped. The elasticity of the elastic member 531 is better. In other embodiments, the connecting portion 5312 may also be in the shape of a bar or other shapes.
在本实施方式中,连接部5312与第二固定部5313的材质均为导电材料。In this embodiment, the materials of the connecting portion 5312 and the second fixing portion 5313 are both conductive materials.
请再次参阅图41,第一固定部5311包括第一导电段5314、绝缘段5315以及第二导电段5316。绝缘段5315的一端连接于第一导电段5314,另一端连接于第二导电段5316。第二导电段5316连接于连接部5312。在本实施例中,绝缘段5315位于第一导电段5314与第二导电段5316的同一侧。在其他实施例中,绝缘段5315也可以位于第一导电段5314与第二导电段5316之间。Referring to FIG. 41 again, the first fixing portion 5311 includes a first conductive segment 5314 , an insulating segment 5315 and a second conductive segment 5316 . One end of the insulating segment 5315 is connected to the first conductive segment 5314 , and the other end is connected to the second conductive segment 5316 . The second conductive segment 5316 is connected to the connecting portion 5312 . In this embodiment, the insulating segment 5315 is located on the same side of the first conductive segment 5314 and the second conductive segment 5316 . In other embodiments, the insulating segment 5315 may also be located between the first conductive segment 5314 and the second conductive segment 5316 .
请参阅图42,图42是图39所示的自锁组件50的部分结构示意图。弹性件531的第一固定部5311固定于第一电路板51。弹性件531位于第一卡扣件52(请参阅图39)远离第一移动支架143(请参阅图39)的一侧。Please refer to FIG. 42 . FIG. 42 is a partial structural diagram of the self-locking assembly 50 shown in FIG. 39 . The first fixing portion 5311 of the elastic member 531 is fixed to the first circuit board 51 . The elastic member 531 is located on the side of the first locking member 52 (refer to FIG. 39 ) away from the first moving bracket 143 (refer to FIG. 39 ).
另外,限位块533固定于第二固定部5313远离第一固定部5311的一侧。此时,限位块533位于第一移动支架143与弹性件531的第二固定部5313之间。限位块533的材质可以与第二固定部5313的材质相同,也可以不同。当限位块533的材质与第二固定部5313的材质不相同,限位块533的材质也可以采用第一种实施方式的限位块535的材质。In addition, the limiting block 533 is fixed to the side of the second fixing portion 5313 away from the first fixing portion 5311 . At this time, the limiting block 533 is located between the first moving bracket 143 and the second fixing portion 5313 of the elastic member 531 . The material of the limiting block 533 may be the same as that of the second fixing portion 5313, or may be different. When the material of the limiting block 533 is different from the material of the second fixing portion 5313 , the material of the limiting block 533 can also be the material of the limiting block 535 of the first embodiment.
在本实施方式中,限位块533通过胶水或者胶带固定于第二固定部5313远离第一固定部5311的一侧。在其他实施方式中,限位块533与第二固定部5313也可以为一体成型结构。In this embodiment, the limiting block 533 is fixed to the side of the second fixing portion 5313 away from the first fixing portion 5311 by glue or tape. In other embodiments, the limiting block 533 and the second fixing portion 5313 may also be integrally formed.
此外,第一导电段5314电连接于第一电路板51的第一引脚511。第二导电段5316电连接于第一电路板51的第二引脚512。In addition, the first conductive segment 5314 is electrically connected to the first pin 511 of the first circuit board 51 . The second conductive segment 5316 is electrically connected to the second pin 512 of the first circuit board 51 .
另外,施力件532为SMA。施力件532的一端连接于第一导电段5314,另一端连接于第二固定部5313。这样,第一电路板51、第一导电段5314、施力件532、第二固定部5313、连接部5312以及第二导电段5316形成电流通路。In addition, the biasing member 532 is SMA. One end of the force applying member 532 is connected to the first conductive segment 5314 , and the other end is connected to the second fixing portion 5313 . In this way, the first circuit board 51 , the first conductive segment 5314 , the force applying member 532 , the second fixing portion 5313 , the connecting portion 5312 and the second conductive segment 5316 form a current path.
可以理解的是,限位块533用于在施力件532通电的情况下锁紧第一移动支架143。施力件532的通电的情况可以根据第一移动支架143是否相对移动决定。例如,当第一移动支架143未相对移动时,施力件532未通电。当第一移动支架143相对移动时,施力件532通电。另外,当第一移动支架143未相对移动时,第一移动支架143处于固定位置。It can be understood that the limiting block 533 is used to lock the first moving bracket 143 when the force applying member 532 is powered on. The energization of the force-applying member 532 can be determined according to whether the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively. For example, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the force applying member 532 is not powered on. When the first moving bracket 143 moves relatively, the force applying member 532 is energized. In addition, when the first moving bracket 143 is not relatively moved, the first moving bracket 143 is in a fixed position.
具体的,当电流信号作用在施力件532时,施力件532收缩。此时,施力件532产生收缩力。这样,收缩状态的施力件532能够对第二固定部5313施加拉力。当第二固定部5313受到的拉力大于连接部5312的弹力时,连接部5312弯曲。这样,第二固定部5313带动限位块533移动。Specifically, when the current signal acts on the force applying member 532, the force applying member 532 contracts. At this time, the force applying member 532 generates a contraction force. In this way, the urging member 532 in the contracted state can apply a pulling force to the second fixing portion 5313 . When the pulling force received by the second fixing portion 5313 is greater than the elastic force of the connecting portion 5312, the connecting portion 5312 is bent. In this way, the second fixing portion 5313 drives the limiting block 533 to move.
在本实施方式中,自锁组件50具有两种状态。一种是锁紧状态。一种是解锁状态。下面将结合相关附图具体介绍这两种状态。In this embodiment, the self-locking assembly 50 has two states. One is the locked state. One is the unlocked state. The two states will be described in detail below with reference to the relevant drawings.
锁紧状态:请参阅图43,图43是图39所示的部分摄像模组100在E处的放大示意图。当第一移动支架143移动至固定位置时,模组电路板20未向第一电路板51传输电流信号,施力件532未通电。施力件532未产生收缩。施力件532未对第二固定部5313施加拉力。此时,部分限位块533位于第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521内。第一通孔521的孔壁可以限制限位块533移动。此时,第一移动支架143处于锁紧状态。Locked state: please refer to FIG. 43 , which is an enlarged schematic view of part of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 39 at E. When the first moving bracket 143 moves to the fixed position, the module circuit board 20 does not transmit a current signal to the first circuit board 51 , and the force applying member 532 is not energized. The force applying member 532 does not shrink. The force applying member 532 does not exert a pulling force on the second fixing portion 5313 . At this time, part of the limiting block 533 is located in the first through hole 521 of the first fastener 52 . The hole wall of the first through hole 521 can limit the movement of the limiting block 533 . At this time, the first moving bracket 143 is in a locked state.
一种实施方式中,自锁组件50的锁紧状态可以应用于摄像模组100处于未使用状态的场景中。In one embodiment, the locking state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to a scene where the camera module 100 is not in use.
解锁状态:请参阅图44,图44是图4所示的摄像模组100在第四种实施方式下的结构的另一种状态的示意图。当第一移动支架143需要自固定位置沿X轴方向移动时,模组电路板20向第一电路板51传输电流信号,施力件532通电。施力件532收缩。此时,施力件532产生收缩力。这样,收缩状态的施力件532能够对第二固定部5313施加拉力。当第二固定部5313受到的拉力大于连接部5312的弹力时,连接部5312弯曲。这样,第二固定部5313带 动限位块533移动。此时,限位块533自第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521内移出。这样,第一移动支架143处于解锁状态。Unlocked state: please refer to FIG. 44 , FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of another state of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 4 under the fourth embodiment. When the first moving bracket 143 needs to move from the fixed position along the X-axis direction, the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first circuit board 51 , and the force applying member 532 is energized. The force applying member 532 contracts. At this time, the force applying member 532 generates a contraction force. In this way, the urging member 532 in the contracted state can apply a pulling force to the second fixing portion 5313 . When the pulling force received by the second fixing portion 5313 is greater than the elastic force of the connecting portion 5312, the connecting portion 5312 is bent. In this way, the second fixing portion 5313 drives the limiting block 533 to move. At this time, the limiting block 533 is moved out from the first through hole 521 of the first fastener 52 . In this way, the first moving bracket 143 is in an unlocked state.
在一种场景下,自锁组件50的解锁状态可以应用于摄像模组100开始使用的场景中。In one scenario, the unlocked state of the self-locking assembly 50 can be applied to the scenario in which the camera module 100 starts to be used.
在其他实施方式中,本实施方式的第二卡扣件53的结构也可以采用第一种实施方式的连接器52、自锁件53以及施力件54所构成的结构。In other embodiments, the structure of the second latching member 53 of the present embodiment may also adopt the structure composed of the connector 52 , the self-locking member 53 and the force-applying member 54 of the first embodiment.
在其他实施方式中,本实施方式的第二卡扣件53的结构也可以采用第二种实施方式的自锁件53以及施力件54所构成的结构。In other embodiments, the structure of the second latching member 53 of the present embodiment may also adopt the structure composed of the self-locking member 53 and the force applying member 54 of the second embodiment.
在其他实施方式中,第一种实施方式的连接器52、自锁件53以及施力件54所构成的结构也可以采用本实施方式的第二卡扣件53的结构。In other embodiments, the structure constituted by the connector 52 , the self-locking member 53 and the force applying member 54 in the first embodiment may also adopt the structure of the second latching member 53 in this embodiment.
在其他实施方式中,第二种实施方式的自锁件53以及施力件54所构成的结构也可以采用本实施方式的第二卡扣件53的结构。In other embodiments, the structure formed by the self-locking member 53 and the force-applying member 54 of the second embodiment may also adopt the structure of the second locking member 53 of the present embodiment.
上文具体介绍了一种摄像模组100的结构。下文将结合上文的摄像模组100的结构(请参阅图38至图44)介绍另一种摄像模组100的拍摄方法。The structure of a camera module 100 is described in detail above. Hereinafter, another photographing method of the camera module 100 will be introduced in conjunction with the structure of the camera module 100 (please refer to FIG. 38 to FIG. 44 ).
摄像模组100的拍摄方法包括:The shooting method of the camera module 100 includes:
接收拍摄信号。可以理解的是,拍摄信号可以是在用户按压屏幕10时,屏幕10产生的信号。此外,拍摄信号也可以是在用户按压屏幕10时,屏幕10产生触控信号,并将触控信号发送给主机电路板90,主机电路板90上的芯片对触控信号进行处理所形成的信号。Receive the shooting signal. It can be understood that the shooting signal may be a signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 . In addition, the shooting signal may also be a signal formed by the touch signal generated by the screen 10 when the user presses the screen 10 and sent to the host circuit board 90 , where the chip on the host circuit board 90 processes the touch signal. .
在本实施方式中,模组电路板20可以用于接收拍摄信号。In this embodiment, the module circuit board 20 may be used to receive a shooting signal.
控制施力件532通电,以使施力件532向限位块535施加作用力,以驱动限位块535克服弹性件533的弹力,移出第一通孔521。The force applying member 532 is controlled to be energized, so that the force applying member 532 exerts a force on the limiting block 535 to drive the limiting block 535 to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member 533 and move out of the first through hole 521 .
在本实施方式中,施力件532为SMA。当模组电路板20接收拍摄信号之后,模组电路板20控制施力件532通电。此时,施力件532收缩。施力件532产生收缩力。这样,收缩状态的施力件532能够对第二固定部5313施加拉力。当第二固定部5313受到的拉力大于连接部5312的弹力时,连接部5312弯曲。这样,第二固定部5313带动限位块533移动。此时,限位块533自第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521内移出。In this embodiment, the biasing member 532 is an SMA. After the module circuit board 20 receives the shooting signal, the module circuit board 20 controls the force applying member 532 to energize. At this time, the force applying member 532 contracts. The force-applying member 532 generates a contraction force. In this way, the urging member 532 in the contracted state can apply a pulling force to the second fixing portion 5313 . When the pulling force received by the second fixing portion 5313 is greater than the elastic force of the connecting portion 5312, the connecting portion 5312 is bent. In this way, the second fixing portion 5313 drives the limiting block 533 to move. At this time, the limiting block 533 is moved out from the first through hole 521 of the first fastener 52 .
控制第一移动支架143带动第一透镜151自固定位置沿光学镜头10的光轴方向移动至目标位置。The first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move from the fixed position to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
可以理解的是,固定位置指的是第一移动支架143在移动行程范围内的一个位置。该位置可根据需求灵活设置。目标位置指的是第一移动支架143在移动行程范围内的任意位置。It can be understood that the fixed position refers to a position of the first moving bracket 143 within the moving stroke range. The location can be flexibly set according to needs. The target position refers to any position of the first moving bracket 143 within the moving stroke range.
具体的,模组电路板20通过镜头电路板16对第一线圈146传输电流信号。第一线圈146通电,第一磁铁145在第一线圈146的作用下可以产生沿X轴负方向磁铁145在安培力下推动第一移动支架143沿X轴负方向移动。这样,固定于第一移动支架143的第一透镜151也能够沿X轴负方向移动。Specifically, the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 through the lens circuit board 16 . The first coil 146 is energized, and under the action of the first coil 146, the first magnet 145 can generate the magnet 145 in the negative direction of the X axis to push the first moving bracket 143 to move in the negative direction of the X axis under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the first moving bracket 143 can also move in the negative direction of the X-axis.
控制感光芯片30将光信号转换成电信号并输出。The photosensitive chip 30 is controlled to convert the optical signal into an electrical signal and output it.
具体的,模组电路板20控制感光芯片30采集穿过光学镜头10的环境光线。将采集的环境光线转换成电信号,并将电信号输出至主机电路板90。Specifically, the module circuit board 20 controls the photosensitive chip 30 to collect ambient light passing through the optical lens 10 . The collected ambient light is converted into electrical signals, and the electrical signals are output to the host circuit board 90 .
控制第二移动支架144带动第一透镜151自目标位置沿光学镜头10的光轴方向移动至所述固定位置。The second moving bracket 144 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move from the target position to the fixed position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens 10 .
具体的,模组电路板20通过镜头电路板16对第一线圈146传输电流信号。第一线圈146通电,第一磁铁145在第一线圈146的作用下可以产生沿X轴正方向的安培力。此时,第一 磁铁145在安培力下推动第一移动支架143沿X轴正方向移动。这样,固定于第一移动支架143的第一透镜151也能够沿X轴正方向移动。Specifically, the module circuit board 20 transmits a current signal to the first coil 146 through the lens circuit board 16 . The first coil 146 is energized, and the first magnet 145 can generate an ampere force along the positive direction of the X-axis under the action of the first coil 146 . At this time, the first magnet 145 pushes the first moving bracket 143 to move in the positive direction of the X-axis under the ampere force. In this way, the first lens 151 fixed to the first moving bracket 143 can also move in the positive direction of the X-axis.
可以理解的是,通过改变第一线圈146上电流信号的方向,或者设置第一磁铁145的S极或者N极的位置,从而当第一线圈146通电时,第一磁铁145可以产生沿X轴正方向的安培力。此时,第一磁铁145在安培力下能够推动第一移动支架143沿X轴正方向移动。It can be understood that by changing the direction of the current signal on the first coil 146 or setting the position of the S pole or the N pole of the first magnet 145, when the first coil 146 is energized, the first magnet 145 can generate electricity along the X-axis. Ampere force in the positive direction. At this time, the first magnet 145 can push the first moving bracket 143 to move in the positive direction of the X-axis under the ampere force.
控制施力件532断电,部分限位块535在弹性件533的弹力下伸入第一通孔521内。When the power of the force applying member 532 is controlled, part of the limiting block 535 extends into the first through hole 521 under the elastic force of the elastic member 533 .
具体的,当第一移动支架143移动至固定位置之后,模组电路板20控制施力件532断电。此时施力件532未通电,电流信号未作用在施力件532。施力件532未产生收缩。此时,限位块533在连接部5312的弹力下伸进第一卡扣件52的第一通孔521内。第一通孔521的孔壁可以限制限位块533移动。Specifically, after the first moving bracket 143 moves to the fixed position, the module circuit board 20 controls the force applying member 532 to power off. At this time, the force applying member 532 is not energized, and the current signal does not act on the force applying member 532 . The force applying member 532 does not shrink. At this time, the limiting block 533 protrudes into the first through hole 521 of the first fastener 52 under the elastic force of the connecting portion 5312 . The hole wall of the first through hole 521 can limit the movement of the limiting block 533 .
一种实施方式中,在“控制第一移动支架143带动第一透镜151自固定位置沿光学镜头10的光轴方向移动至目标位置,光学镜头10采集环境光线”之中,方法还包括:In one embodiment, in "controlling the first moving bracket 143 to drive the first lens 151 to move from a fixed position to a target position along the optical axis of the optical lens 10, and the optical lens 10 to collect ambient light", the method further includes:
霍尔传感器171检测检测磁铁172的磁场强度。The Hall sensor 171 detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet 172 .
当确认出磁场强度不等于预设磁场强度时,控制第一移动支架143带动第一透镜151沿光学镜头的光轴方向移动至目标位置。When it is confirmed that the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength, the first moving bracket 143 is controlled to drive the first lens 151 to move to the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
可以理解的是,通过霍尔传感器171与检测磁铁172能够提高摄像模组100的拍摄的准确度,从而使得摄像模组100拍摄的图像的效果较佳。It can be understood that, the Hall sensor 171 and the detection magnet 172 can improve the shooting accuracy of the camera module 100 , so that the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is better.
可以理解的是,上文结合附图具体介绍了四种摄像模组100。每种摄像模组100均设置有自锁组件50。可以理解的是,当摄像模组100的第一透镜151移动至目标位置时,通过自锁组件50锁紧马达,从而使得马达14上的第一透镜151的稳定较佳,也即马达14上的第一透镜151不容易因外界的抖动或者振动而发生移动,从而当用户在拍摄照片时,拍摄的图像不容易出现变形或模糊。特别是,当用户在运动过程中拍照时,摄像模组100拍摄的图像的效果也较佳。故而,本申请的摄像模组100拍摄的图像的效果也较佳。It can be understood that, the above four types of camera modules 100 are specifically introduced in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. Each camera module 100 is provided with a self-locking assembly 50 . It can be understood that when the first lens 151 of the camera module 100 moves to the target position, the motor is locked by the self-locking component 50, so that the stability of the first lens 151 on the motor 14 is better, that is, the The first lens 151 is not easily moved due to external shaking or vibration, so that when the user is taking a photo, the captured image is not easily deformed or blurred. In particular, when the user takes a photo during exercise, the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 is also better. Therefore, the effect of the image captured by the camera module 100 of the present application is also better.
以上,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in the present application, and should cover within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (28)

  1. 一种光学镜头,其特征在于,包括马达、第一透镜以及自锁组件;所述马达包括驱动件以及移动支架,所述第一透镜安装于所述移动支架,所述驱动件用于驱动所述移动支架沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动;An optical lens, characterized in that it includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly; the motor includes a driving member and a moving bracket, the first lens is mounted on the moving bracket, and the driving member is used to drive the the moving bracket moves along the optical axis direction of the optical lens;
    所述自锁组件包括底座、转动件、施力件、弹性件以及限位块;所述底座与所述移动支架间隔设置,所述转动件转动连接于所述底座,所述弹性件的一端连接于所述转动件,另一端连接于所述底座,所述限位块位于所述转动件与所述移动支架之间,所述限位块固定于所述转动件,所述施力件用于在通电时对所述转动件施加作用力;The self-locking assembly includes a base, a rotating member, a force-applying member, an elastic member and a limit block; the base is arranged at intervals from the moving bracket, the rotating member is rotatably connected to the base, and one end of the elastic member is is connected to the rotating member, the other end is connected to the base, the limiting block is located between the rotating member and the moving bracket, the limiting block is fixed to the rotating member, and the force applying member for applying a force to the rotating member when energized;
    所述施力件未通电时,所述限位块在所述弹性件的弹力下与所述移动支架接触,所述限位块与所述移动支架之间能够产生静摩擦力;When the force-applying member is not energized, the limit block is in contact with the moving bracket under the elastic force of the elastic member, and a static friction force can be generated between the limit block and the moving bracket;
    所述施力件通电时,驱动所述转动件克服所述弹性件的弹力,并带动所述限位块转动,以使所述限位块与所述移动支架分开。When the force applying member is energized, the rotating member is driven to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member, and drives the limiting block to rotate, so as to separate the limiting block from the moving bracket.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述限位块与所述转动件的连接位置为第一位置,所述施力件对所述转动件的施力位置为第二位置,所述转动件的转动位置位于所述第一位置与所述第二位置之间。The optical lens according to claim 1, wherein the connecting position of the limiting block and the rotating member is a first position, and the force applying position of the force applying member to the rotating member is a second position , the rotational position of the rotating member is located between the first position and the second position.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述施力件为形状记忆合金,所述作用力的方向与所述限位块施加于所述移动支架的压力相同。The optical lens according to claim 2, wherein the force applying member is a shape memory alloy, and the direction of the force is the same as the pressure applied by the limiting block to the moving bracket.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述转动件的材质为导电材料,所述自锁组件还包括第一电路板、连接器以及转轴;The optical lens according to claim 3, wherein the material of the rotating member is a conductive material, and the self-locking assembly further comprises a first circuit board, a connector and a rotating shaft;
    所述第一电路板与所述移动支架间隔设置,所述第一电路板包括间隔设置的第一引脚与第二引脚;The first circuit board and the moving bracket are arranged at intervals, and the first circuit board includes first pins and second pins arranged at intervals;
    所述连接器固定于所述第一电路板,且所述连接器电连接于所述第一引脚,所述施力件的一端固定于所述连接器,另一端固定于所述转动件;The connector is fixed on the first circuit board, and the connector is electrically connected to the first pin, one end of the force applying member is fixed on the connector, and the other end is fixed on the rotating member ;
    所述转轴的一端固定于所述底座,另一端转动连接于所述转动件,所述转轴电连接于所述第二引脚。One end of the rotating shaft is fixed to the base, the other end is rotatably connected to the rotating member, and the rotating shaft is electrically connected to the second pin.
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述弹性件位于所述转动件远离所述限位块的一侧,且所述弹性件与所述限位块相对设置。The optical lens according to claim 3, wherein the elastic member is located on a side of the rotating member away from the limiting block, and the elastic member is disposed opposite to the limiting block.
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述限位块与所述转动件的连接位置为第一位置,所述施力件对所述转动件的施力位置为第二位置,所述第一位置与所述第二位置位于所述转动件的转动位置的同一侧。The optical lens according to claim 1, wherein the connecting position of the limiting block and the rotating member is a first position, and the force applying position of the force applying member to the rotating member is a second position , the first position and the second position are located on the same side of the rotation position of the rotating member.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述转动件的材质为磁性材料;所述施力件包括磁性件及缠绕于所述磁性件表面的线圈,所述磁性件的一端固定于所述底座,另一端朝向所述转动件,所述作用力的方向与所述限位块施加于所述移动支架的压力相反。The optical lens according to claim 6, wherein the material of the rotating member is a magnetic material; the force applying member comprises a magnetic member and a coil wound on the surface of the magnetic member, and one end of the magnetic member is fixed On the base, the other end faces the rotating member, and the direction of the acting force is opposite to the pressure exerted by the limiting block on the moving bracket.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述弹性件与所述施力件位于所述转动件的同一侧,且所述弹性件与所述施力件位于所述转动件的转动位置的两边。The optical lens according to claim 7, wherein the elastic member and the force-applying member are located on the same side of the rotating member, and the elastic member and the force-applying member are located at the same side of the rotating member. Rotate both sides of the position.
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述马达还包括基板、固定支架及导轨,所述固定支架与所述基板相对设置,所述导轨的一端固定于所述基板,另一端固定于所述固定支架;所述移动支架位于所述基板与所述固定支架之间,且活动连接于所述导轨,所述光学镜头还包括第二透镜,所述第二透镜安装于所述固定支架,所述第二透镜位于所述第一透镜的物侧。The optical lens according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the motor further comprises a base plate, a fixing bracket and a guide rail, the fixing bracket is arranged opposite to the base plate, and one end of the guide rail is fixed on the base plate. The other end of the base plate is fixed to the fixed bracket; the movable bracket is located between the base plate and the fixed bracket, and is movably connected to the guide rail, the optical lens further includes a second lens, the first lens Two lenses are mounted on the fixing bracket, and the second lens is located on the object side of the first lens.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述光学镜头还包括外壳,所述基板与所述固定支架位于所述外壳的内部,且固定于所述外壳;The optical lens according to claim 9, wherein the optical lens further comprises a casing, the base plate and the fixing bracket are located inside the casing and are fixed to the casing;
    所述移动支架包括间隔设置的第一移动支架以及第二移动支架,所述驱动件包括第一磁铁、第一线圈、第二磁铁以及第二线圈;所述第一磁铁固定于所述第一移动支架,所述第一线圈固定于所述外壳的内侧,且朝向所述第一磁铁;所述第二磁铁固定于所述第二移动支架,所述第二线圈固定于所述外壳的内侧,且朝向所述第二磁铁。The moving support includes a first moving support and a second moving support spaced apart, the driving member includes a first magnet, a first coil, a second magnet and a second coil; the first magnet is fixed to the first a moving bracket, the first coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing and faces the first magnet; the second magnet is fixed on the second moving bracket, and the second coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing , and faces the second magnet.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述光学镜头还包括镜头电路板,所述镜头电路板电连接于所述第一线圈与所述第二线圈。The optical lens according to claim 10, wherein the optical lens further comprises a lens circuit board, and the lens circuit board is electrically connected to the first coil and the second coil.
  12. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述光学镜头还包括霍尔传感器及检测磁铁,所述检测磁铁固定于所述移动支架,所述霍尔传感器用于检测当所述检测磁铁处于不同位置处的磁场强度。The optical lens according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the optical lens further comprises a Hall sensor and a detection magnet, the detection magnet is fixed on the moving bracket, and the Hall sensor is used for for detecting the magnetic field strength when the detection magnet is at different positions.
  13. 根据权利要求1至12中任一项所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述光学镜头还包括棱镜马达以及反射件;所述反射件转动连接于所述棱镜马达,所述反射件用于反射环境光线,以使环境光线传播至所述第一透镜。The optical lens according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the optical lens further comprises a prism motor and a reflection member; the reflection member is rotatably connected to the prism motor, and the reflection member is used for The ambient light is reflected to propagate the ambient light to the first lens.
  14. 一种光学镜头,其特征在于,包括马达、第一透镜以及自锁组件;所述马达包括驱动件以及移动支架,所述第一透镜安装于所述移动支架,所述驱动件用于驱动所述移动支架沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动;An optical lens, characterized in that it includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly; the motor includes a driving member and a moving bracket, the first lens is mounted on the moving bracket, and the driving member is used to drive the the moving bracket moves along the optical axis direction of the optical lens;
    所述自锁组件包括第一卡扣件和第二卡扣件;所述第一卡扣件固定于所述移动支架,所述第一卡扣件开设有第一通孔;所述第二卡扣件包括弹性件、限位块以及施力件,所述弹性件位于所述第一卡扣件远离所述移动支架的一侧,所述限位块位于所述弹性件与所述移动支架之间,所述限位块固定于所述弹性件的一端,所述施力件用于在通电时对所述限位块施加作用力;The self-locking assembly includes a first buckle piece and a second buckle piece; the first buckle piece is fixed to the moving bracket, and the first buckle piece is provided with a first through hole; the second buckle piece is provided with a first through hole. The clip includes an elastic piece, a limit block and a force applying piece, the elastic piece is located on the side of the first clip away from the moving bracket, and the limit block is located between the elastic piece and the moving bracket Between the brackets, the limiting block is fixed on one end of the elastic member, and the force applying member is used to exert a force on the limiting block when the power is turned on;
    所述施力件未通电时,部分所述限位块位于所述第一通孔内;When the force-applying member is not energized, some of the limiting blocks are located in the first through hole;
    所述施力件通电时,驱动所述限位块克服所述弹性件的弹力,并移出所述第一通孔。When the force applying member is energized, the limiting block is driven to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member and move out of the first through hole.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述第二卡扣件还包括底座以及滑动块;所述弹性件远离所述限位块的一端固定于所述底座;The optical lens according to claim 14, wherein the second snap member further comprises a base and a sliding block; an end of the elastic member away from the limiting block is fixed to the base;
    所述滑动块连接于所述弹性件与所述限位块之间,所述滑动块滑动连接于所述底座,所 述滑动块的材质为磁性材料;The sliding block is connected between the elastic member and the limiting block, the sliding block is slidably connected to the base, and the material of the sliding block is a magnetic material;
    所述施力件包括磁性件及缠绕于所述磁性件表面的线圈,所述磁性件的一端固定于所述底座,另一端朝向所述滑动块。The force-applying member includes a magnetic member and a coil wound on the surface of the magnetic member, one end of the magnetic member is fixed on the base, and the other end faces the sliding block.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述弹性件套设所述施力件。The optical lens according to claim 15, wherein the elastic member is sleeved with the force-applying member.
  17. 根据权利要求15或16所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述施力件未通电时,所述弹性件对所述滑动块施加弹力。The optical lens according to claim 15 or 16, wherein when the force applying member is not energized, the elastic member applies elastic force to the sliding block.
  18. 根据权利要求14所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述弹性件包括第一固定部、连接部以及第二固定部,所述连接部连接于所述第一固定部与所述第二固定部之间,所述第二固定部与所述第一固定部相对设置,所述限位块固定于所述第二固定部远离所述第一固定部的一侧;The optical lens according to claim 14, wherein the elastic member comprises a first fixing part, a connecting part and a second fixing part, and the connecting part is connected to the first fixing part and the second fixing part the second fixing part is arranged opposite to the first fixing part, and the limiting block is fixed on the side of the second fixing part away from the first fixing part;
    所述施力件为形状记忆合金,所述施力件的一端连接于所述第一固定部,另一端连接于所述第二固定部。The force applying member is a shape memory alloy, one end of the force applying member is connected to the first fixing portion, and the other end is connected to the second fixing portion.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述第二固定部与所述连接部的材质为导电材料;所述自锁组件还包括第一电路板,所述第一电路板包括间隔设置的第一引脚与第二引脚;The optical lens according to claim 18, wherein the material of the second fixing portion and the connecting portion is a conductive material; the self-locking assembly further comprises a first circuit board, and the first circuit board comprises The first pin and the second pin of the interval setting;
    所述第一固定部包括第一导电段、绝缘段以及第二导电段,所述绝缘段的一端连接于所述第一导电段,另一端连接于所述第二导电段,所述第一导电段连接于所述施力件的一端,所述第二导电段连接于所述连接部,所述第一导电段电连接于所述第一引脚,所述第二导电段电连接于所述第二引脚。The first fixing part includes a first conductive segment, an insulating segment and a second conductive segment. One end of the insulating segment is connected to the first conductive segment, and the other end is connected to the second conductive segment. The conductive segment is connected to one end of the force applying member, the second conductive segment is connected to the connecting portion, the first conductive segment is electrically connected to the first pin, and the second conductive segment is electrically connected to the the second pin.
  20. 根据权利要求14至19中任一项所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述马达还包括基板、固定支架及导轨,所述固定支架与所述基板相对设置,所述导轨的一端固定于所述基板,另一端固定于所述固定支架;所述移动支架位于所述基板与所述固定支架之间,且活动连接于所述导轨,所述光学镜头还包括第二透镜,所述第二透镜安装于所述固定支架,所述第二透镜位于所述第一透镜的物侧。The optical lens according to any one of claims 14 to 19, wherein the motor further comprises a base plate, a fixing bracket and a guide rail, the fixing bracket is arranged opposite to the base plate, and one end of the guide rail is fixed on the base plate. The other end of the base plate is fixed to the fixed bracket; the movable bracket is located between the base plate and the fixed bracket, and is movably connected to the guide rail, the optical lens further includes a second lens, the first lens Two lenses are mounted on the fixing bracket, and the second lens is located on the object side of the first lens.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述光学镜头还包括外壳,所述基板与所述固定支架位于所述外壳的内部,且固定于所述外壳;The optical lens according to claim 20, wherein the optical lens further comprises a casing, the base plate and the fixing bracket are located inside the casing and are fixed to the casing;
    所述移动支架包括间隔设置的第一移动支架以及第二移动支架,所述驱动件包括第一磁铁、第一线圈、第二磁铁以及第二线圈;所述第一磁铁固定于所述第一移动支架,所述第一线圈固定于所述外壳的内侧,且朝向所述第一磁铁;所述第二磁铁固定于所述第二移动支架,所述第二线圈固定于所述外壳的内侧,且朝向所述第二磁铁。The moving support includes a first moving support and a second moving support spaced apart, the driving member includes a first magnet, a first coil, a second magnet and a second coil; the first magnet is fixed to the first a moving bracket, the first coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing and faces the first magnet; the second magnet is fixed on the second moving bracket, and the second coil is fixed on the inner side of the casing , and faces the second magnet.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述光学镜头还包括镜头电路板,所述镜头电路板电连接于所述第一线圈与所述第二线圈。The optical lens according to claim 21, wherein the optical lens further comprises a lens circuit board, and the lens circuit board is electrically connected to the first coil and the second coil.
  23. 根据权利要求14至19中任一项所述的光学镜头,其特征在于,所述光学镜头还包括霍尔传感器及检测磁铁,所述检测磁铁固定于所述移动支架,所述霍尔传感器用于检测当所述检测磁铁处于不同位置处的磁场强度。The optical lens according to any one of claims 14 to 19, wherein the optical lens further comprises a Hall sensor and a detection magnet, the detection magnet is fixed on the moving bracket, and the Hall sensor is used for for detecting the magnetic field strength when the detection magnet is at different positions.
  24. 一种摄像模组,其特征在于,模组电路板、感光芯片、滤光片以及如权利要求1至23中任一项所述光学镜头;A camera module, characterized in that a module circuit board, a photosensitive chip, a filter, and the optical lens according to any one of claims 1 to 23;
    所述模组电路板位于所述光学镜头的像侧;所述感光芯片固定于所述模组电路板朝向所述光学镜头的一侧,所述感光芯片用于采集穿过所述光学镜头的环境光线;The module circuit board is located on the image side of the optical lens; the photosensitive chip is fixed on the side of the module circuit board facing the optical lens, and the photosensitive chip is used to collect images passing through the optical lens. ambient light;
    所述滤光片固定于所述感光芯片朝向所述光学镜头的一侧。The filter is fixed on the side of the photosensitive chip facing the optical lens.
  25. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括壳体及如权利要求24所述的摄像模组,所述摄像模组安装于所述壳体。An electronic device, comprising a casing and a camera module as claimed in claim 24, wherein the camera module is mounted on the casing.
  26. 一种摄像模组的拍摄方法,其特征在于,所述摄像模组包括光学镜头以及感光芯片,所述感光芯片位于所述光学镜头的像侧;A shooting method of a camera module, characterized in that the camera module comprises an optical lens and a photosensitive chip, and the photosensitive chip is located on the image side of the optical lens;
    所述光学镜头包括马达、第一透镜以及自锁组件;所述马达包括驱动件以及移动支架,所述第一透镜安装于所述移动支架,所述驱动件用于驱动所述移动支架沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动;所述自锁组件包括底座、转动件、施力件、弹性件以及限位块;所述底座与所述移动支架间隔设置,所述转动件转动连接于所述底座,所述弹性件的一端连接于所述转动件,另一端连接于所述底座,所述限位块位于所述转动件与所述移动支架之间,所述限位块固定于所述转动件;The optical lens includes a motor, a first lens and a self-locking assembly; the motor includes a driving part and a moving bracket, the first lens is mounted on the moving bracket, and the driving part is used to drive the moving bracket along the The optical lens moves in the direction of the optical axis; the self-locking assembly includes a base, a rotating member, a force-applying member, an elastic member and a limit block; the base and the moving bracket are arranged at intervals, and the rotating member is rotatably connected to the The base, one end of the elastic member is connected to the rotating member, and the other end is connected to the base, the limiting block is located between the rotating member and the moving bracket, and the limiting block is fixed to the base. the rotating part;
    所述拍摄方法包括:The shooting method includes:
    接收拍摄信号;receive shooting signals;
    控制所述施力件通电,以使所述施力件向所述转动件施加作用力,以驱动所述转动件克服所述弹性件的弹力,带动所述限位块转动并离开所述移动支架;Control the power-on of the force-applying member, so that the force-applying member exerts a force on the rotating member, so as to drive the rotating member to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member, and drive the limiting block to rotate and leave the movement bracket;
    控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动;controlling the moving bracket to drive the first lens to move along the optical axis of the optical lens;
    当所述移动支架移动至目标位置时,控制所述施力件断电,所述转动件在所述弹性件的弹力下带动所述限位块转动,以使所述限位块压紧所述移动支架接触;When the moving bracket moves to the target position, the force application member is controlled to be powered off, and the rotating member drives the limit block to rotate under the elastic force of the elastic member, so that the limit block is pressed against the desired position. contact with the moving bracket;
    控制所述感光芯片将光信号转换成电信号并输出。The photosensitive chip is controlled to convert optical signals into electrical signals and output them.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的摄像模组的拍摄方法,其特征在于,所述光学镜头还包括霍尔传感器以及检测磁铁,所述检测磁铁固定于所述移动支架;The shooting method of a camera module according to claim 26, wherein the optical lens further comprises a Hall sensor and a detection magnet, and the detection magnet is fixed to the moving bracket;
    在“控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动”之中,所述方法还包括:In "controlling the moving bracket to drive the first lens to move along the optical axis of the optical lens", the method further includes:
    所述霍尔传感器检测检测磁铁的磁场强度;The Hall sensor detects the magnetic field strength of the detection magnet;
    当确认出磁场强度不等于预设磁场强度时,控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动目标位置。When it is confirmed that the magnetic field strength is not equal to the preset magnetic field strength, the moving bracket is controlled to drive the first lens to move the target position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens.
  28. 一种摄像模组的拍摄方法,其特征在于,所述摄像模组包括光学镜头以及感光芯片,所述感光芯片位于所述光学镜头的像侧;A shooting method of a camera module, characterized in that the camera module comprises an optical lens and a photosensitive chip, and the photosensitive chip is located on the image side of the optical lens;
    所述光学镜头包括马达、第一透镜以及自锁组件;所述马达包括驱动件以及移动支架, 所述第一透镜安装于所述移动支架,所述驱动件用于驱动所述移动支架沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动;所述自锁组件包括第一卡扣件和第二卡扣件;所述第一卡扣件固定于所述移动支架,所述第一卡扣件开设有第一通孔;所述第二卡扣件包括弹性件、限位块以及施力件,所述弹性件位于所述第一卡扣件远离所述移动支架的一侧,所述限位块位于所述弹性件与所述移动支架之间,所述限位块固定于所述弹性件的一端;The optical lens includes a motor, a first lens, and a self-locking assembly; the motor includes a driving member and a moving bracket, the first lens is mounted on the moving bracket, and the driving member is used to drive the moving bracket along the moving bracket. the optical axis of the optical lens moves in the direction of the optical axis; the self-locking assembly includes a first buckle and a second buckle; the first buckle is fixed on the moving bracket, and the first buckle is provided with a first through hole; the second buckle includes an elastic piece, a limit block and a force-applying piece, the elastic piece is located on the side of the first buckle away from the moving bracket, and the limit block is located between the elastic piece and the moving bracket, and the limiting block is fixed to one end of the elastic piece;
    所述拍摄方法包括:The shooting method includes:
    接收拍摄信号;receive shooting signals;
    控制所述施力件通电,以使所述施力件向所述限位块施加作用力,以驱动所述限位块克服所述弹性件的弹力,移出所述第一通孔;Controlling the power-on of the force-applying member, so that the force-applying member applies a force to the limit block, so as to drive the limit block to overcome the elastic force of the elastic member and move out of the first through hole;
    控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜自固定位置沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动至目标位置;controlling the moving bracket to drive the first lens to move from a fixed position to a target position along the optical axis of the optical lens;
    控制所述感光芯片将光信号转换成电信号并输出;controlling the photosensitive chip to convert optical signals into electrical signals and output them;
    控制所述移动支架带动所述第一透镜自所述目标位置沿所述光学镜头的光轴方向移动至所述固定位置;controlling the moving bracket to drive the first lens to move from the target position to the fixed position along the optical axis direction of the optical lens;
    控制所述施力件断电,部分所述限位块在所述弹性件的弹力下伸入所述第一通孔内。Controlling the power of the force applying member to power off, part of the limiting block protrudes into the first through hole under the elastic force of the elastic member.
PCT/CN2021/115344 2020-09-10 2021-08-30 Optical lens, photographing module, electronic device, and photographing method of photographing module WO2022052829A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010949115.0 2020-09-10
CN202010949115.0A CN114167570B (en) 2020-09-10 2020-09-10 Optical lens, camera module, electronic equipment and shooting method of camera module

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022052829A1 true WO2022052829A1 (en) 2022-03-17

Family

ID=80475713

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/115344 WO2022052829A1 (en) 2020-09-10 2021-08-30 Optical lens, photographing module, electronic device, and photographing method of photographing module

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114167570B (en)
WO (1) WO2022052829A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114879437A (en) * 2022-05-17 2022-08-09 深圳市火乐科技发展有限公司 Light uniformizing device, projection optical machine and projection equipment

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002023037A (en) * 2000-07-07 2002-01-23 Sony Corp Lens barrel
CN1880995A (en) * 2005-06-17 2006-12-20 索尼株式会社 Shifting mechanism, and shifting mechanism-mounted image capturing apparatus
US20070008627A1 (en) * 2005-07-07 2007-01-11 Tomohiro Matsumoto Method for fabricating lens unit, lens unit and imaging apparatus
CN1912670A (en) * 2005-07-20 2007-02-14 索尼株式会社 Lens moving mechanism and imaging apparatus
CN208461918U (en) * 2018-06-15 2019-02-01 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Camera module, CCD camera assembly and electronic device
CN210381049U (en) * 2019-09-12 2020-04-21 格科微电子(上海)有限公司 Camera module
CN111492286A (en) * 2017-12-21 2020-08-04 富士胶片株式会社 Lens barrel and image pickup apparatus

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3875823B2 (en) * 2000-03-01 2007-01-31 ペンタックス株式会社 Eyepiece attachment / detachment device for observation optical equipment
CN103135195A (en) * 2011-12-01 2013-06-05 佛山普立华科技有限公司 Zoom lens and imaging device
EP3848749A1 (en) * 2018-02-05 2021-07-14 Corephotonics Ltd. Reduced height penalty for folded camera
CN108174077A (en) * 2018-03-14 2018-06-15 欧菲影像技术(广州)有限公司 Integral type camera module
CN110488451A (en) * 2019-09-10 2019-11-22 上海比路电子股份有限公司 The assemble method of optical zoom motor, photographic device and optical zoom motor

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002023037A (en) * 2000-07-07 2002-01-23 Sony Corp Lens barrel
CN1880995A (en) * 2005-06-17 2006-12-20 索尼株式会社 Shifting mechanism, and shifting mechanism-mounted image capturing apparatus
US20070008627A1 (en) * 2005-07-07 2007-01-11 Tomohiro Matsumoto Method for fabricating lens unit, lens unit and imaging apparatus
CN1912670A (en) * 2005-07-20 2007-02-14 索尼株式会社 Lens moving mechanism and imaging apparatus
CN111492286A (en) * 2017-12-21 2020-08-04 富士胶片株式会社 Lens barrel and image pickup apparatus
CN208461918U (en) * 2018-06-15 2019-02-01 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Camera module, CCD camera assembly and electronic device
CN210381049U (en) * 2019-09-12 2020-04-21 格科微电子(上海)有限公司 Camera module

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114879437A (en) * 2022-05-17 2022-08-09 深圳市火乐科技发展有限公司 Light uniformizing device, projection optical machine and projection equipment
CN114879437B (en) * 2022-05-17 2023-07-25 深圳市火乐科技发展有限公司 Dodging device, projection optical machine and projection equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114167570A (en) 2022-03-11
CN114167570B (en) 2023-06-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110798594B (en) Electronic device and method for controlling decorative lens
US20220217253A1 (en) Camera Module and Electronic Device
WO2021164519A1 (en) Camera module and electronic device
WO2020107985A1 (en) Imaging module and electronic apparatus
TW202143702A (en) Electronic device
WO2020038068A1 (en) Imaging device and electronic apparatus
CN108833746B (en) Camera shooting assembly and electronic equipment
CN114726977B (en) Camera module and electronic equipment
WO2021180033A1 (en) Zoom lens, camera module, electronic device and focusing method therefor
US11863694B2 (en) Mobile terminal
CN111726503B (en) Camera module and electronic equipment
CN113438402A (en) Telescopic camera assembly and electronic equipment
WO2022052829A1 (en) Optical lens, photographing module, electronic device, and photographing method of photographing module
WO2019227974A1 (en) Electronic assembly and electronic device
CN1598685A (en) Electronic apparatus
US10951795B2 (en) Image pickup apparatus having movable part that is movable between retracted position and projecting position
WO2022052728A1 (en) Motor, camera module and electronic device
CN110753175A (en) Electronic equipment
WO2019114301A1 (en) Dual-camera module, and electronic apparatus
WO2023011559A1 (en) Camera module and electronic apparatus
WO2023030261A1 (en) Camera module and electronic device
CN218162616U (en) Camera module and electronic equipment
CN113315899B (en) Camera assembly, electronic equipment and control method thereof
CN215453078U (en) Fixed focus motor structure based on sensor displacement technology
CN114373786A (en) Display device and electronic apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21865885

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21865885

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1